.

’ -
s: < firm” g,,\,?p :: ,,..

Infantry
Drill Regulations
UNITED STATES ARMY

191I
CORRECTED TO APRIL 15. ,917
(Changa Nos. I to 19)

WASHINGTON
GOVERNMENT PRNIING OFHCE
1917

““$qqe
! {T i;p
r ‘. 1 ,,.y ,,. ,, -~.I /m?p
_1_~,
 wm DEPARTMENT
Dnrameot ~NO.304
OIIIIChTOP THE CHIEB “F GTAPB

*DDITION*T. COPIES
UP THIS P”BLlClTlON MAY BE PROCURE” FK,III
ThIE S”PER,NTmmENT “1 IX,CII\IFNIY
OOYERNIdENT PRlNTMO OPPICE
W*SAINOTdw, 11.C.
*T
35 CENTS PER COPY
n
 WAB DBPAmd&NT,
OFFICE <IF TIE CHlEF OF RTAFP,
1Vashington, A*LguYt ,,$I, 1,911.
The following system of nil, RPelliatiOllS *or Illftlntry, Bl-2.
wed by n bo:trd of oflieer~ con&&g of ma ~1. &an F.
%rorrisan, Infantry; Cs[L NhTh 1% stavat, Eighth Infantry;
:uld ~!nl~t. Alfred w. Hionrstnd ‘I’wPnty-eighth Infautry, i8 up-
Fmren alId is pllblishid for the inf.p. ~nmmntion and ~orernment
of the liegnhw Army and the Ormnined m1itin “f the united
sti1te.s. wit,, a riem to iI,S,m= ,111if0rmit.v tlllmlghollt the Army,
all infantry drill fcmm,ti,m~ not e,,d,ri&a u, tnis sy~te,,, are
wohibitrd. and those herein Prescribed will be fitrictly observed.
By order of the Secretary of war :
ImxvAKII WOOD,
llfajur “eneml, chief Of staff.
TAULE Or COXTEKTS.
 ill” .I
1s9-4
.mLT,
;,i 1-5
,7,l7-i
5&w
;I31-.5x
53T-622
537-546
51i-563
5.54..RRT
T,;,R-,Sr;;
.ioD-~s
.ii ‘r-;>,:is
.&-ii! 33
;,s1(-5! ,5
5!3fiL,i, 13
 INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.
UNITEli STATES ARMY. 1911.

DEFIM'~IOKS.

Alignment: a straight iin(. ,I,K,I~ which sererd ekww~fs ore

formed, or are to be formed ; or the dressing “f SW”ml ele-
Iw2nts U,,“,, n straight line.
Bose: The elenlelit on WlliCh ii l,l,,remcut is regu,;,trd.
Bottle sight: The ~‘“sition Of ThC re;,r sight wire,, tlJc leaf is
hid dowrr.
center: The Illiddk point or eb?mellt Of R c”“m:l”d.
Column: d for,w,ti”,, i,, whit,, the ele,,m,ts are ,llaeed “,,e beg
hind ““other.
De,hy: To extend the front. 1” 6e,uer”, t” ch:m?e from ~ol”n,,,
to line, “L‘ from close order to extended order.
Depth: The s,,ace fron, head to rear of any *“rur;~ti”ll, incioding
the leadlinl: and rear elen~?,,ts. ‘The de,‘th of i, man is
assnmefl to be 12 inches.
Distance: Sriace betwwo el~uwnts iu the ~lirmtio~ of depth.
Dist;n,ce is measured fro,,, tk hck “f the man in front to
the breast of t,m Ulilli in rc:,L’. ‘The didmre between fi,,,kY
is 40 inches in both line and COllllllll.
Element: h *iit’. xwi~d, ~1li~1oon, co~~~~~iiu~, or iarger body, fom-
iup port of n st,ill lixrgcr hodp.
File: !S’\vu uiei,. f~lx front~r;t,,lr ,LI:IU c,,,tl the corrt~spo,~,in~ ,,,a,,
Of the renr rilnk The fr”nt-r:mli llliill is the file leader.
A me which has 11” re.lr-ranlr lllilll ii il hlnnk h/e. The ,“n,,
B/e :Ip,llies “Is” to il single man ill il ringi~!~r”~ll< f,,r,,,;,ti”,,.
File dosersr Hw.11 <~,fiw,~ : I,,,, ,,,,,IcwI ,,,,, issionec, o,,i,.<.r: of :,
c”“1,m,y ilS arc ,iasterl ill rwlr Of the line. 1’01‘ ronrenieuce,
811 n,eu ,l”S+ed in the IilK of file (li”S<TS,
Flank: The’ right 01’ ldt of i, c<in~w:~i,t, iu line or in c,i,,,,,,n;
also Ihe ~lelllcnt “11 the right or left uf the line.
7
 DEFINITIOBS.

Formotion: *mmgmw~t of the elrnm~ts of n commuud. me

placing Of ;*,, fmCti”n* in their “rder in line; in CO1”rm, “1
for battle.
Front: The ap:sce, iu width, occullinl by ml elelucnt, either in
line or in coh~mn. The front of a nmn is :rssumed to be 22
inches wrout also denotes me direCtiOn Of the enemy.
Guide: Au oltiwr. ni,~~r”m~nissi”~red otkw, “v prir:l+r U~I”II wll”m
tile omml;,*1d or eicments thereof regulates its mnreb.
Head: me hdiug eielnellf of i, co ,,,,,,n.
Interm,: S,i:lce brtwww ~!it?lwlLlt~ Of lk same line. ‘me interval
between me,1 in ranks is 4 ilrcbes on* is u,c?avured from
elbow tn 1’11,“W. Ib2l,VW,l cInII,~:ulies. sgllads, <!tc., it is
mtxsurerl *roni the left db”W “f lh” left “U111 or guide of
me gruu,, 011 Ibe ri#lt. to ibe rigllt elbow of ale right man
or gum? Of tbc grou,, 011 tile left.
Left: T1E left extremity or elenlrllt “f :I body “f tr”“ps.
Line: .4 fonnntion in which the dimxent rkme~ts tare abreast
Of each other.
Order. close: 3%” fortnntion in which the units, iu douhk rank,
are nrrnngrd in line or ill C”l”nm with normal intervals
and diS,anCeS.
Order. extended: WE fornrati”,, in whid, the units are sep>,rate,j
by interrnls greater thm in close order.
Pnee: ‘I!bWy inclres: the ieugtb Of th? full step in quick time.
Point of Pest: Tk ,l”illt at which :, f”rmnti”n Iregins. sywific.
ally, the point twmrd wbicb unit8 are aligned in successive
movements.
Rank: A iiN Of rile,,, ,,lX<!d Silk by ai&?.
Right: The right extremity or element of n body “f troops.
 PAILT I.--DRILL.

INTRODUCTION.
1. Success in battle is the ultim:tte objwt of all militnm
training; *,,cce69 may be looked for only when the training is
intelligent and th”r”“gh.
2. Commnnding odicer6 me accountable for the pmper train-
ing of their re~vxtire org~nimtio~~ within the limits prescribed
by regulntions nnd orders.
me ex!ellrnee of “11 “rmnizeti”n is jnaced by its field em
cienclcg. The field etF~icieney of an organization dqrends primarily
npon its efftxtireness a8 a nh0k. Thoroughness and unifornnty
in the trxining of the unite of an orgganizntion are indiswnsable
to the etficieney of the whole; it is by such means nlone that
the requisit-e teemw”rB may be devel”Imi.
3. Sirn”k nr”rcnle”ts nnd el”GtiC f”nnnti”nS :,*e essential to
aorrect tlnining for battle.
4. The Drill Reg~iiitious are furnished 89 it guide. They pro-
vide the principles for trniuinf and for increasing the probability
of snecess in battle.
I,, the interpretation of the regulations, the spirit mwt be
8m~ht. Quibbling “rer the minutile of form is indicative of
failure to ~grnsp tile Rpirit.
6. Tlw ,,rineiplt-s Of combnt :,r<. considered in Pert 11 Of tlle*(?
regulations. They nre trented in the rnrions Schools included
in Part I onlv to the extent necesearv to indicnte the functions
of the mrio& commanders and the- division of responsibility
between them. The nm~lificntion necessary to I, woL%r “nder-
standing “f their application is to be sought in Part II.
8. The following importt~ut distinctions must be obserred:
(12) lhills exen~ted at attention imd the cermmmies are dis-
ciplinary exercises. designed to teach precise 2nd soldierly more-
ment, and to inculcate that pronwt and subconscious obedience
which is essential to proper military control. To this end.
9
10 INTRCIDUCTIOH.

Smartness and precision shonk1 be exacted in the erecutiou of

erem detni,. Such drills shonl,, be frequent, but short.
Cb) The I)UI’IIOS~ of extended order drill is to teach the mecha-
nism of deployment, of the firings, md, in general, of the emgloy-
mat of troop8 in comb;lt. Swb drills are in the uature of
disciplinary exerciws nnd shoulri be frequent, thorough, and
exact in order to habituate men to the firm control of their
leaders. Extended order drill is executed (If ease. The COUI-
PimY is the iarrest unit WhiCb e\ccntes exteudrd ovrler rll’ill~
(c) Field exe&ises are for instruction fin the duties incident
to campaign. Assumed situntions are employed. Eseh exerei~e
Ebonld Conelude with n disenssion, on the ground, of the exercise
and principles inrolved.
(d) The comhot exercise, a form of field exercise of the corn-
PXW, battxlion, and lnrfer units, consists of the npplicotion of
tmticcd principles to assunm~ silnation~, employing in the exe-
cution the oppragriate fonuations an4 mo~~eements of close and
extended order.
Combat exemises must simnlnte, as ftlr as I)ossible, the battle
conditions assumed. In order to fnmiliariae both omers and
men with such conditions. companies :mr, bnttirlions Will fre-
quently be consolidated to provie m~v~strength organisntians.
Officers and n”ne”mmissi”rled omers not reQ”ired to Complete
the full quota of the units pnrl.icipating are assigned as ab-
serwrs or umpires.
The firing line can rxrely be corrtrolled by the mice alone:
thorough training to insure the iroper me of prescribed si&mnls
is necesmrv.
The crekse should be foilowed by n brief drill at nttention
in order to restore SmartneS8 and contra,.
7. 1” tklll en?xi’c6 me rn,w,y is s:,i,, to be imaginary ,vilen
his position and force are merely a~mmed; outlined when his
position and force arc iudicntcd by :I few men; represented whew
0 body Of troop acts a* S”Ch.
General Rules for Drills and Formations.
8. When the prepm7tory c”n”ni,“d consints of “lore tlxm one
part, its eltnwnts are srranged as follows:
(1) For morements to be execute,, s,,ccessi,-ely by the sub-
divisions or ekwrnts of an orgnnisstion: (a) Uewription of
tile luarrwent: (0) IlOW executed; or On what eleulant executed.
 INTRODUCTION.

(2) For movements to be execntd ~imultaneonsly by the

snbdi\-isions of ml orgmimti”n: (n) The designation of the
subdivisions; (a) the mownlent t” be executed.
9. Mo~e~~ent~ tht may be exeented toward either flmk are
explains, as toward but one flank, it being ~x+cessar‘y to sub-
*titutl? the ,~~“r<l “left” for “right,” X”d the rererse, to Ilaw
the ~xphnation of the corresponding mooement toward the
other flB”%. me c”mman‘ls are given for the execution of the
moxwnents ton:lrd either flank. The substitute word of the
c”mmnnd is pl:rePd within parentheses.
10. Any nlorenlrnt m;,y he elPC”twc1 either from the halt or
when mnrchiue. _ unlcsv otherwise nreecribed. If at n hnlt. the
conrrnnull for n~~emauts irwolrin~ n~arching need not be bref-
need by forword. ns 1. Column right (left), 2. MARCH.
11. Any nro\-ement not *pecinlly exeeptcd may be executed
in ~l”“bk time.
If nt n halt. or if mnrehing in wick time, the command double
time precedes tlm commm~3 0P execution.
12. In successire ,norcments t!xecu+ed in double time the
leading or bese unit rnnrchrs in quick time mben not otherwise
prc:swib&; the other units march in double time to their places
in the fornmtion orderfd nnd then conform to the gait of the
lending or bane unit. If marching in double time, the commanrl
double time is onrittsxl. Tlx kxding or h;lue unit mnrches in
quick time: the other units eontinne nt double time to their
Idaces in the formntion ordered and then conform to the _~~
rait
& them leading or base unit.
, S. TO ,,z~stc,, the execution of :, movement begun in quick
time. me c”nnnnnd: I. Double time, 2. MIRCH. is given. The
Imding or base unit contimw to nmrch in quick time, or re-
mnins at hnlt if nlready halted: lbl? “tbrr units eompk?te the
execution of me morenrent in tlonbie time am1 then conform
to the gait pf the leiuling or base unit.
14. To sfny the execution of :I mwen~ent vben marching, for
me correction Of wr”I’s, me c”n”“:lnri : 1. In plnce. 2. HALT, is
given. A11 holt and stand fnst. witlmut clumping the position
Of tile pieces. TO res”nIl! the m”\-emcnt the c”mmm,d : 1. Re-
sume. 2. MARC//, is given.
16. To revoke :I prepcmltory connmnd, or, being nt a hxit.
to begin anew :L n~~emerrt inqn-openly begun, the command,
AS YOU WERE. is giren, nt ,rhidl t,“! nwrement ceases ““d the
former position is resnmed.
12 INTRODUCTION.

Id. Unless “thenvise nnnounced, tlm guide Of n company or

s,*,,i,-isio,, of a eoupuny in 1iue is right: Of a battaii”R ill liUl
or line Of subdirisions or Of n dc,ii”yti line, center: of a ruuli
in C”,“lll” Of sq”ad*, townrd tile side “f the guide Of the com-
1lB”Y.
TO lllX1’Cb with guide utller t1im as prescribed above, or to
Cbilllge tile gum: Dvide (right, left, UP center).
In successire f”rmutious illto line. tire auide is toward the
,l”,,,t “f rest: in platoous or 1srger’ subdikions it is SD un-
U”“llCW3.
‘me ,l”n”unce”lent of tile guide, when give,, ill c”nllecti”n
with n nl”rewa~t, *“ll”rvs the conxnand Of eXecuti”n *UT tll;,t
movement. Exception: 1. As skirmishers, guide right (feft or
center), 2. MARCH. (0. I. I). R., ,Vo. z,)
17. The turn on the fixed pivot by wbdi~isions is used in :x11
fornlntiorls from line into c”lu”ln and tile rerer%e.
The turn on the moving pivot is used by subdivisions of R coluron
in executing e1,anges “f direction.
18. l’artiill cllanges Of directiou ,uny be executed:
BY illtel.lloltiill~ in t11e ,nwpxrntory coullnlllld the word hslf,
as Column h/f right <hff,, or Right (lett, fwlf turn. A cbxnpr
of direction of 46” is execute?.
By O,e comnnnd: INCLINE TO THE ,?fGffT (LEFT’). The guide,
or guiding Clement, “l”reS in tile indicated direction :,nd the
remninder Of the conlmaud eonforms. This movement effects
slight cb:l”ges of direction.
18. TIE design:lti”ns line of platoons, line Of cornponies, ,;ne
of bottolions, etc., refer to t,,e f”rnl;rti”ns in ,,.,,ic,, the pli,t”“nF,
;ioO~~panies, battalions, etc., each in c”lumn of squads, nre in
20. Full distance in C”l”lll,, Of subdiriaious is such tll;,t j,,
forming line to the right or left the subdirisions mill ha\-” their
proper intervzlL3.
In C”l”um “f subdivisions tile guide Of the lending s,,bdivisi”n
is charged with the stq, and direction; the guides in rear pre-
serve me trace, step, :md distalIce.
21. In ciose order, flu dctniis, detnCblwmtY, and other bodies
of troops are habitually formed in double rank.
To inure ~mifonuit~ of iuterwl hatmer~~ files when fnmng
in, nnd in alignments, exch nun places the palm “f the Left hand
won the hip, fingers pointing dmnwnrd. In the first case the
 IBTRODUCTIOH. 13
band Is dropped by the side w,,e,i the next mil~l 011 the kft Il:IE
his interrn,; i* tlie 8ec”“d CIIBC, nt the conlmiiud front.
2%. rp,,e ,]“StS “f ofliccrs. l,,,” co”,“,issi”,,e,~ omcers, syecbr1
units (such as band or mnchioe-gun Wm~~any), c?!c., in the
various farmutions of the c”nlp;lny ,&~lion, or regment, nrc
show” in phtcs.
I” a,, eflnnges from one f..-~-~~~~~ ‘,>1~,ll>,
t 1x4 .~.,~
0 .anotber involvine n
change Of post 0” the part of any of thesPClysts are w”ml)tlY
take” by t,,e most c0,,re,,iL?,,t ronte as LO”” ix6
the commnnd of exec”tiou for tli”
am,n,issior~ed ot,iccrs Fbo bare rrescribed
with the n~orement ordered, take their
duties are completed.
AS i”Etr”Ct”rS, odierrs :,ncl n”n~!“*~m~issi”,,e omeers go
w~“:‘~‘-“”
,C,rl
tl>oi* I,*llP.,ea iF “‘v.OIPI1,T~
ll.l,ll ,,I~..\..I,~. .I ..”
,Ar ,710 ~,“sP,‘R it is their
;-.. l_.“. _._ -.- .~.~..~~~

duty to rect,ify mistnkes and insure ~teadilles~ and ,~“mlltlleS8

in me mnlrs.
2.3. mce,,t nt cere”l”“ies, t,,e S,ieci;,l units bar-e “0 filed
plnces. They tnke ,,,ncea us directed; in the :,bsmce of diree-
tions, they conform as nearly IS -.. nr:>~~i~~hle
L ~._.~. to tl,” ~~~~~nhtes. and
in Svh.cm~m+ n>n\~enlr.nts
__,-__ll_..” -... nr:,i ntuin their rekltire
..~~.~~.~~~~~~~ pos,tions with
wt to the Ban,< ur en,, of the c”““nu”d 0” wh-icll they were

of the rank

flnz of the eenernl “Beer nnd in reilr

the front of the staff and orderlies, each line executes twosright
or fours right, as esI,,uined in the C;lvalry Drill Regulutious,
;,“d f”,l” ws A... ^^...... ^._1^”
,“5 C”lll”lilllU~L.
wbc” I,a,t otberwive Ixescribed, sti,fT @ieers draw and return
snber wit,, their chief.
25. I” n,:,liing the about, an omer. m”““tL~, habitually turne
to the left.
\wlen me c”““,mnd‘:r faces to give commmds, tile staff, Aug,
nnd orderlks do n”t chnnfe rmition.
 14 IIWRODUCTIOX.
as. When making or receivinf omcial 1WPOrtS, or on meeting
““t Of d”“K3, “1, otricers Will S:,i,,te.
Milit;,rV c”“rk?sP reouirt’s t,w i”“i,W to S.llll+(l firrt, b,,t when
the same is i”tr”;l”etors to n ~r&,rt “rndl3 at n military cere-
mO*y or formntion, to t& rqxesekative Uf R comm”0 s11~ri”r
(ns, for exmwle, to the adjutant, oficer. of the d-a.“, etc. 1. the
oflicer mnking the report, whatever his rank, ~~41 1.1.. sa,ute’&st :
the omcer to whom the P*““rt is mnr7r WilJ . . . ncknowled~e by
SUIhtillg that hc has received and understood the rrr,ort.
cc. I. Il. R., NOS.6 and 17.)
Z7. For ceremonies, all mounted enlisted men of n regiment
or smaller unit, except those belonging *.lr l.l‘
to +I.- --?chine-nun
ai-zanizations. nre mnsolitl~~~rl info )I dd~h...~...,nnn+, the smior
pr&ent eomr&~ds if n” uCicer is irl charge. The
_.. detuchlnrnt is
formed 3s a plntoon or squall of cavnlry in lir IP OP column UC
: f”U Irs; nonmrumis~ionecl staff otbeers arc on the rifht or in 1:,,e
leadinz ranks.
28. For ceremonies, such of the nonco ssioned stuff oficrrs
as are dismounted nre fmmed 5 pwcs-i ear of tbe color, in
Order Of rn”k from right to Mt. In ?x c “” Of Sq”atlS they
march IIS file dosers.
29. Other than for ceremonies, noneommL3isnioned staff adicers
I and orderlies aecorn~~ny their immediate chiefs unless otber-
I wise directed. If mounted, the noncommissiur,cd st;rE ot,icers
are ordinarily Posted on the right or at the head of the orderlies.
80. In a11 forrrlations ilrid movrlnerits n noncommissioned
offieer commnnding :L glntuon or comrxany carries his piece as
the men do, if he is so armed, and t3ke~ the sane post ns an
officer in like situation. When the commnnd is formed in line
for ceremonies, n nonc”m~nissiaued officer commanding a eom-
pnny takes post on the right of the right guide after tbe cum.
paw has been aligned.
 ORDERS, COMMANDS, AND SIGNALS.
81. Commands0,113.ire PLll,>l”Wl ill drill at nttention. Other-
wise either a command, signa/, or order is emplo~~l, as best suits
the occi~sion, or one may be used in eonjorKtion with another.
8% Sign>llS Sh”,,,,, be freely usei, in inStmCti”ll, in order that
omeers zln,, mp,, may readily B,,“,” them. In malting arm sig-
nn,s the si,ber, rifle, or he;rd<lress may be held in the hnnd.
88. “Ricers m,r, men fix their attt?nti”” at the first word Of
commnn,,, the first note of the bugle or whistle, or the first
motion of the signal. h signal includes both the preparatory
command an<, the commnnd Of erecuti”” : the rrKNement corn-
mences as SO”” as the Signal is “nderst”“d, Unless otherwise
prescribed.
34. Except ill m”reme”+S executed :,t attention, cornmnnders
or lenders “f Sl,bdiYiBi”“R repent orders, c”mm:lllrls, or signll1s
whenever such repetition is deemed neeessnry to ins”re pronm
zmd COrRCt e1ecution.
oHicers, hi,ttlLli”” n”nc”mmissi”necl staff officers, platoon kR&
crs, gukles, and musici;ms are equipped with Whistks.
The major and his staff will use ii whistle of ~~istinctive tone;
the captui,, am, mmp:,ny InUSieianS a secund nn,, distinctive
whiStle; the platoon lenders and guides n third distinctive
whistle.
cc. I. n. n., NO. 15.1
36. rreseribrn signn,s are limited to such as are essential
as a. substitute for the voice under conditions which rem&r the
voice inntlcqnnte.
Before or <iluring an rngagrment Special SignnlS mny be agreed
upon to filcilitnte the sdution of such spwial difticulties as the
particokw situation is likely to dwehp. but it must be r~mern-
bered that simplicity and certainty nre indispensable quxlities
Of n signal.
Orders.
86. In thrar remhtions ;I” order rmbr;~es instructions or
divxtions given oriill~- or in writin, $7 ill terms suitn, to the pnr-
ticu,nr “cPasi”n am, not prescribrl, herein.
Orders are cmp,oye<, m1y ,,%en the commands preseribrcl
herein Cl” not sumiently inlliwte the win “f the commnnder.
Orders arc more fully described in PXWW~S 378 t” 383,
indusive.
16
 ORDEBS, COPm.NDB, *Ial SI(I~ALB.

Commands.

37. In these reguhticm n command is the will of the eom-

nlander expreused in tile ,~Llrllseol,,gy ,lresrribed berein.
38. Thel’e are two kinds of uonllllands:
The prepnratsr~ c”rrnlr:nLd, &,,Cb as forword, ilrrlic;,tes the more-
ment that is to be executed.
wle eonnnand or” execution, SUCb iis MARCX, HALT. or ARMS.
czlmes the execntion.
Prepnrofory coerm;nrds are distinguiebed by ifolics, those of
exec!Aian by CAPITALS.
Where it iR not menlioned iI, the tmt Nil0 girrs ilk? corn-
mam prea:ribed, they fire to be giren by the e”“m~nnder Of the
unit concerned.
me pPepEIPnfo,y conlmand SbO”id be gixn at SUCb an interval
Of time before tm c”mln:,nd Of exec”tion ilS to :muit of Being
Droped~ uuders+““d : the c0,,,,,u,,a, Of exec”tion SllO”ld be gLren
at the il,FtRnt me morulmmt is to conmlen’x.
The tone Of eollmlznd is animted. RiStillCt, and Of a loudness
proportioned to the nuulber of me*, fur wllow it is inten&xl.
Each preparatory command is enuncii~ted distinct~ly, with a
rising inarctim at tile eni,, and in such manner that t,,e mm-
mund Of’ exec”tion nu,y be ,,,ore WlPI’getiC.
The c”“lnullld of execution is fir,,, in tone :,,x, brief.
39. Majors and rommmders of units lnrger tbnn a battnliov
repeat such conmands of their superiors 2x8 are to be erecvted
by their units. fw.hg their units for that ~nxpose. The bat-
talion is the hrgest unit that exeeotes :L mo\-emwt at the corn-
mnnd of execution Of its commander.
40. Wllml giving co*mx\nds to tr001m it is 11SURll~ best to
face townrd them.
Indifference in giving eomrnands mnst be avoided as it leads
to laxity in esecution. Comrunods should be &en with spirit
at all times.
Bugle Signds.

41. The n”thoriz* bugle SigMls RW “UbliShed in mrt ” Of

these reglllRtionS.
The following bugle signals may be wed off the battle fieik,
wllen not likely to convey informati”u to the euemy :
Attention: ‘lV00~~~ are brought to atieutiou.
 ORDEP”S, Ccl?dIM.4BDS, *ND SIQliALS. 17
Aftention to orders: Troops fix tlleir attention.
Fomvord, march: Used idso to exemte quick time from double
time.
^
“OYole WI% nl(lpC”.
To the ma,, march: In close order, execute squads right about.
Halt.
*ssemll,e, march.
The following bugk signals may he used on the hattle field:
Fix *oyonets.
Charge.
Assemhie, march.
These signids are used only when intended fur the entire
firing line ; hence they can be authorized only by the commander
of n unit (for exsm~le, R rephnent or brkade, which occu~le5
n distinct section of the battle field. Exception: Fix bayonet. i
(See par. 318.)
The following huglc sigrms are used in exceptional cases on I
the bnttle tield. Their prineiaal uses are in field exercises and
practice firing.
Commence firing: Ofticers charge ,d vith fire direction and eon-
trol open tire as mm as ymetie: ,bk. When given to n firing ~
line, the signal is equivaknt to fire at will.
Cease firing: All parts of tL..,P line
..~ PxeC”te cm88 firing nt once.
These signals are not used by 1,nits smaller than a regiment.
va-mt
__.__L_ when aneh .~~~~~ unit is inden endent or detached from its /
regiment.
Whis.,t,e Signals. I

42. r(ttention to orders. abnrt h/ad of the whistle.

A -.._ This
signnl is used on the mnrcb or in eombnt when neceSSBry to fix I
the llttention Of troops, or Of thei ~ com*“xp,Io*’ n* I.“rl,xw
1”111 “L .“yy-.I, n7.s
r_l
gnrtitory to giving co~nmnnd~. orders. or signals.
When the Bring line is tiring, each squad lender SUSW~~S
firing and fixes his attention L ,__. “I_.* x.,”
at n shoti “,“S( ,llU -,^i,...”
&,L.LL”“L.
kader’s whistle. The ,~latoon leac ,~*~~~~&.““.....~i nnmmnnAe “.
‘O1”rl.r C”.I.LYY..Y.I n*
I
signals are repented and enforced by the squad leader. If n
squad leader’s attention is nttmcted by n whistle other thiln I
that of his Dlatoon leader. or if there are no orders or commands
t” CO,l”ey to his squad he RSUmeS firing nt once.
Suspend firing. A long blast of the whistle.
All other whistle signals are prohibited.
cc. I. n. n.. N”. 15,

f
18 OmmES, COXIM.4BDS, mm S1GITBI.S.

Arm Signals.

43. The followina nrm simaIs are nrew~ihcd. 111 nlill<i”S

signals either arm nnw be used. Otticers who receire sienals
on the tiring line “ &at back ” at once to prevent misu;der-
Forward, march. Carry the hand to the shoulder; r;traighten
and hold the inn hodzontalh. _ thrustine ._ it in direction of
march.
This signal is also used to execute cpick time from double
time.
Ho/t. Carry the hand to the shoulder: thr”st the hand umc,rd
and hold the mm vertically.
Double time. march. Carry the hand to the shoulder; rapidly
thrust the hand uwvnrd the full extent of the nrm fieveral times.
Squnds right, morcb. Ilnisc the arm laterally until lrorizontal;
carry it tu n vertical I)oSition abore the head and swing it
several times between the vertical and horizon(;,l ,,asitions.
msitions.
Squads left, march. Raise tlx au,,, lateraliy uutil Iloriwntnl;
carry it downward to the ride and swing it sereml times be-
tween the downward and horizontal pmitioim
Squads right about, march (if in close or&r) ur, To the PB(IP,
lnorch (if in shiurnish line). Ihtmd the an” wl3icsy abore
the head; carry it laterxlly do,r,,ward to ,,hr side and swing
it several times betsee” the rerticnl and do,\-nwnrd ~iositicm.
Change direction or Column right (left), march. ‘I’hc hnnrl on the
c4de toward whic11 the ch;in~e of direction is to be ,nade is c:,P-
ried DCI-“8s the body to the qqmite rhonlder, forearm horim,,-
tnl; t,ben swing in il horizontal plnne, arm extended, pointing
in the new direction.
As skirmishers, march. Raise both nrn~ Inter;iils until IKE-

As skirmishers, guide center, march. Raise hoih arn~~ Iatcrally

until h”Pizo”taL ; swing both si”Lulta”e<lll61y “pwrd ,mti, ver-
tim, and return t,” the horizmt.?, ; re,,e:,t serer:,, times.
As skirmishers, guide right (Mt), march. Raise both arms lat.
ernlly Imtil boriaont:!l : hoid the lmr~ on the side of the guide
8tr~1dily in the hoPiaont81 gositi(m: swing the other u,mnrd
until wrticitl and return it to the horizontal; rqleat sereral
times.
Assemble. march. Xilise the :~rn~ rertieally to its full extent
and describe horisontal circles.
 OBDEBS, coxAc*I?DB, *ml sIcm*Ls
Range. or Change elevation. To announce range, extend the arm
toward me ,en,,lcrs or Illl~” for wham tile signul is intended,
fist closed: by !zeeying the fist closed battle sight is inllieatecl: by
opening snd closing the list, expose thumb and fingers to 0 mm-
ber equal to the hundreds of ynrds ; to i,dd 50 ymds describe a
short boriamtnl line with forefinger. To change devotion, indi-
cat.2 the amount ot increase or decreme by fingers as ;,,,ove ; point
“Dwsrd to indientr incrr:w? am,%downward to indicate deerense.
What range we you using? or What is fhe rlinge? Extend the
zunls townr,1 me perSOn :Kblressell, ""e bartl "IJCII, pnhn to the
front, resting 011 the Other bsL"d, fist dosed.
Are you readyB or I am rem). Raise the im"d. fingers extentled
and joined, palm tuwiml the person addressed.
Commence firing. Move the ,:um extended in full length, hand
IMll" ~lO\ml, arceral times throllgh a barizontul arc in front Of
the body.
Fire faster. Execute rapidly the si~nn, “ Commence firing.”
Fire dower. Ewcute Si”WlY the Signal “ Commmcr Bring.”
To swing the cone of fire to the right, OPleft. Rcterrd the arm in
full length to the fr”nt, palm to the right (left, ; swing the nrm
to right (left), and puint in the tli~e~tion of the new target.
Fix bownet. Simnlnk tk movement of the rie,,t ,,:,n,, in
“Fix bnjmet ” (par. 95,.
Suspend tiring. Kiise and bold the forearm steamy In ii bori-
zont;,, gosition in fr”nt “f the forebend, Dill”, of the band to
the front.
Cease firing. Ilaisr the fmwnn as in suepend firing and swing
it "I) Bntl ,,u\rn severi,, times in frurlt Of the face.
PhhO". l~ktend the arm boriz""tnlly townn, me plntoon
lender; rlescribe small circlrs with the bmd. (Sue ~nr. 44.)
Squad. Extent, the arm horiz”nt>llly t”Wi,r,, me plutoon lender;
swing the b;,nd up am, ,k,mn from tbr mrist. (See p:,r. 44.)
Rush. same US double time. ((7. I. I). I<., N”S. 2 and 14.)
44. ‘Tb,! Signills pkzt00n illl,l squad t,rr illtrlllkt, primlrily l-or
rommunic:,tion bet\\rm the cnptain xn,, biS ,,,:,toon lenders.
mrr Sib’llill platoon or spund i”tliCRteS +,Klt t,w pklt”“n corn-
mander ia ,,I C:L,IV tbe si@ml which fo,lows t” be executed by
platoon or squall.
eo CmDEBB, COMhl*LADS, ann SIcm.418.

Flog Signals.

45. The simnal dogs described below are enrried by the corn-
puny musicinns in the field.
In B rP,niment in rvhich it is imDrncticnb,e to mnkr the ,,ennn-
nent bnttnlion division alphabetically, the Rags of R battalion
are as shown ; flags are assigned to the compnnies nlphnbetically,
within their respxtive battalions. in the order gi!mn below.
First bnttnlion:
Company A. Red lidd. white square.
Cunwtu~s 6. Red field, blue squure.
Company C. Red field, white diagonals.
ComDany D. Red field, blue diagonals.
Second bnttxlioh:
Oompnns E. White field, red square.
- Company 1”. White field, blue squnre.
Comuanv G. white field. red dlaPO”31s.
Company H. White field, blue di&onals.
Third battalion :
Company I. Blue field, red square.
Cornsmy K. Blue field. white SQUBR.
Company I,. Blue field, red diagonals.
Company M. Blue Reid, white diagonals.
48. In addition to their use in visual signaling, these Bsgs
serve to mark the assembly ,mi”t of the com,,any when dis-
organized by rombat, and to mnrk the location of the company
in bivouac and elsewhere, when web use is desirable.
47. (1) For communication between the firing line and the
reswve OP eommnnder in the rear, the subjoined signals (Signal
Corps codes) are prescribed and should be memoriaed. In
transmission, their concenhnent from the enemy’s view shoold
be insured. In the absence Of sim,al finas. the beaddress ,,P
other substitute may be used.
 ORDERS,coxxA~s, alrn SIOlulS.
IatterOf ! If “i@&&$&r”’ to 1 II si&$edfrommefiring
a,pil2bet. 1 huetothewar.
A M ............ Ammunition going farward ..... AmmunitIon ryle%uired.
ccc.. ......... charga (mandatorystalltimes). Am abut to 0 wge if no in.
StNctiollS to the oontmry.
CF.. ........... ~cwOnlinl.. ...................
D T.. .......... Double time or ‘:niih” ._ .... kYlz%i% or “mh.~’
F.. ............. commencnflrlng.. .............. Comme”eefiring.
F B ............ Fix b”yonets .................... Fix blyonets.
P I.. ........... *rtiuery iim ia causing us 10sses. *rtii,ery fir? is o*using us ,msa¶.
R.. ............. MOW IOrw*rd.. ................. Preparing to move ,orwsr,l.
AHII ......... Halt.. .............. . ........... aan.
K.. ............ NB Live.. ...................... i%gstiw.
LT.. ........... Lx.. .......................... La,&
0 ............... ,~*~~~~~.~e(R.N.etc.)l Inter- What is the (R. N. em)? ID
wrdois Blld temgntory.
m~Phore
- - - - - - Wrllag~tR.N.ete.~? Inter- What is the (R. N. etc.)? In.
(AI, mathods terrogatorg.
but BIdOiS
a&f ma-
P .. __..... ..... Afirmathe. __.................. *T?sirmative.
R ............... Aeknowledgmnt.. ............. *ckr.owledgment.
RN.. .......... rlsnge.. ........................ Range.
R T.. ........... Right.. . ...... Right.
8 8 8 ............ SupDort go*ng fOnv8~d
............................ support needed.
s u F .......... R”Spe”d firing .................. 8”Spe”d firing.
T ............... T arget.......................... Target.

(2) Tar: TWO-ARM SEMAPHOXE CODE

(seeikstlations on pages*okxving.,
cc. I.D. R., NO.IS.)
ORDERS, oOPY*NDS, AIiD s1om.m
TWO-ARM SE.y.W”OH6 CODE.
ORDERS. COMIHANDS, AND SIGNALS. 23
 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER.

48. The imtructor erplnins briefly each ~~ovement, first exe-

cuting it hiluself if txectienbk. He requires the recruits to
tnke the proper l)ositions unassisted nud does not touch them
for the yuq,ose of correctiug them, ercek,t when they i,re unable
to correct theu,se,rcs. He avoids Leet,ing them too low at the
SBY~ mo,wuent, although each should be understood before
passiug to nrrother. He exacts by deaees t,he desired ~reeisior~
and uuiformity.
40. In order that all m:ty advance as razlidl; as their nbili-
ties permit, the recruits are grouped according to proficiency as
iustroction pr”greSLeY. Those ,vho lack :,ptit”de and quickness
are separated from the otberu and ~li,ced under er,,eriencetl
drill uasters.
IMSTRUCTION WlTNOUT ARMS.
CO. For preliminary instruction II number of recruitsi mually
;~;~xxceeding three or four, are forluti :,I) a squad 1~ single

Position ot the Soldier, or Attention.

51. Heels 011 the 57”~ line and as near each Other a8 the
eonf”rm:mo” Of me IwLn ,le?nIits.
Fret tumed out equaily und forming an angle of about 45”.
Knees straight without ~tifhess.
Nips lew1 and drawn back slightly; body em3 md resting
tyualiy on hi,x; chest lifted nnd ucbed; sbo”lderS square and
falling equally.
Arun and bands bangi”~ nnturnlly, thumb ;,lon’& the 8eau
Of the trousers.
IIend erect nnd squarely to the front, chill drawn in so that
the nxi~ of the herd and neck is vertical; ep?8 straight to tk
*rootat.
Weight of the body resting equally “,mn the heels and balls
of the feet.
The Rests.
62. Beilli a1 n halt, the rom”l:,nds are: FALL OUT: REST;
AT EASE; and, ‘I. Porode. 2. Rest.
26
 es SCHOOLOF THE SOLDIER.
At the command fo// wt. the men may lenve tbe nmks, but
are required to renr:,in in the immediate vicinity. They resume
their forvler g,aces, at atteution, at the c”mmmld ,a,, in.
At the commnnd rest each man keeu~ one foot in &~e, but is
not required to pwserve silence or immobility.
At the comnmnd ot mm encb man kee~ls one foot in nlnce
nnd is required to yremrre silence but not immobility.
58. 1. Parade, 2. REST. Carry the right foot 0 inches straight
t-3 the rear, left krlee slightly bent; elnsp the hands, without
constraint, in front of the center of the body, fmgen joined,
left hand un,x?ITn”st, left thumb cl:~fi,ied by the thumb and fore-
fin@~ of the right hand; ~,‘e~erve silence nnd steadiness of
paition.
34. TO resume the attention: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENT,ON.
The men tnke the position of the soldier.

Eyes Right or Left.

56. 1. Eyes, 2. RlGHT (LEFT), 3. FROYT.
At the cm,mand right, tnn, the head to the right oblique,
eyes fixed “11 the line of eyes “f the me” in, or sug,msed to be
In, the 8.1311,:ra”%. At the ~“mrnrn~l ‘rant. turn the bead and
eyes to tlJ.2 frunt.
Facings.

56. To the Bank: 1. Right (left), 2. FACE.

,, Raise slixhtly the left hce, and right tue; Pace to the rig,&
: tnrnine cm the rixht heel. aasistecl bv :I slirbt n~+ssnre “11 tb”
lmll “f-the left f&: ,,l:& the laft f”& by file s:dae of the ri&t.
Left face is executed on the left heel in the correslxn,divY
lll~Ill1~~.
Right (left) half face is cxrcutcxl liinlil;lrl>-, facing 4.5-.
“To fxce in marching” <and zidrimw. turn on the b:,,l of
either *out nrld Sk,! off Vi-iih the other *out in the new lb,” Of
direction: to ftrce in nraxahing without gaining ground in thr
,,e,v directi”“, tmn on the ball “f eitbcr foot n,ld m:,r,r time.
SF. To ,be ~‘ei,r: 1. About, ‘)i. ,““A.=“*=
carry Hre +oe Of the right fo”t about :I hnlf foot-lenpth to the
L’BRII :md sliW,y to the left of tbo left bee, witbout eb:m~i,i~
the position of the left foot; *ace to mr re:1r, t”rLlillp to me
right on the left heel and right toe; pince the right hWl by the
Bide of the left.
 ScaeeL 0s TlfE SOLDIER. 27

Salute
Slllvte with the Hlmd.
88. 1. Hand. 2. SALUTE.
Raise the right hand smartly till the tiu of the forefinger
touches the lower Dart of the nenddress a. forehead abow the
right we,
rim e.W, tbunlb
thu”,b and lingers
I?n@~-s extended
exte,,ded and joined, pall”
pa,“, to the
left, forwrm inclined ut nlrout 45”, hand and wrist straight:
at the fame time look trr-nrd the pax,” saluted. (TWO) Drag
the 1(x” smartly by the side.
For ruk8 gO”er”ing mutes, see /I Honors nmi Salutes;’ pnra-
qwhs 75S765.
(C. I. 11.R., .wos.3, 6, and 18.)
STEPS AND MARCHINOS.
39. AI1 steBs and marchings executed from a halt, except
right step, begin with the left foot.
60. The length of the full step in quick ti”x is 30 IIIC~BS,
measured from heel to heel, and the cade”ee is at the rate of
120 steps p?r minute.
The length of the full step in double time is 36 inches: the
cadence is at the rate of 180 str~s per minute.
The instructor, when “ecessnry, indicates the cndenee of the
8te1, hy enlling one, two, three, four. or left, right, the instmt tk
left and right foot, reoiwtiwly, should be ~lnnted.
61. All steps and mnrchings xnd movements involving march
are executed in quick time unless the squad be mnrchiw in
double time, OP double time be orlcled to the commmU ; in tW
hitter case double time is nclded to the preparntory commnnd.
Emm~le: 1. Sqvad right, double time. 2. MARCH (School of the
Squad 1.
Ouiek Time.
62. Being at a halt, to “IUI‘C,, *<,mmY, in qnick time: 1. For-
ward, 2. MARCN.
At the comm:uut forward. Shift the \vei@,t of the hotly to the
right leg, left knee straight.
At the com”n”tl march, move the left foot smartly straight
forward 30 inches from the right, sole “em- the erwnd, and
plant it nithout shock; neat, in like ma”“er, ndvaoce the right
88 SCHOOL 9s THE SOLDIER.

foot and ,,lnnt it a8 above: continue the march. The arms

swing n:itnr’~lly.
68. Reing at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march in
double time: I. Double time, 2. MARCH.
If nt n halt, at the first com”rand shift the weight ,,f th.?
body to the right leg. At the co”m,nud march, ri,ifie t,,e fore-
arms, fingers closed, to n horioontnl pxition along the waist
line: take II,, 8,” easy r nn with the ste,, and cadence of da,,ble
time, llllowing a neturn, swinging mation to the ar”r8.
If “larcbing in quick tin% at the co”““zlnd march. given as
either foot strikes the ground, t:x%e one stew in quick time. and
then step off in double time.
94. TO resnn~e the quick the: 1. Quick time, 2. MARCH..
At the command march, giren :,a either foot strikes the ~ron”d,
advance :tnd ulmt the other foot in do”ble time: resume the
quick time, dromdng the ha”& by the sides.
To Mark Time.
66. Reing i,, march: 1. Mark time. 2 MARCH.
At the command march, giren as either foot strikes the ground.
advnnee :,nd ,,lnnt the other foot; bri”g “y the foot in renr and
cootblue the e:u3ence by alternately raising each foot about
2 inches and nla”ti”g it on line with the other.
Being at n halt, nt tbe comnrnnd march. raise and plant the
feet a8 described ;,bove.
The “elf Sfep.
66. I. Half step, 2. MARCH.
‘Eke steps of 15 inches in q”kk time, 18 inches in double
time.
67. Forword. ho/f sfep, ho/f, aud mark time nliw be executed
one from the other in qniek or double time.
‘TO resume the full steg from half E~PP or mnrk time: 1. For-
ward. 2. MARCH.
Side Step.
68. Reing at a halt or mark time: I,. Right (left) step.
2. MARCH.
Carry and l>,i,r,t the right foot 15 inehes’to the right; bring
the lrft foot betide it and eontin”e the movemeut in the radence
of quick time.
 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 28

The side star is nsed for short distnncw “,,,v and is not exe
ented in double time.
If at order ilrm8, the side step is exrc”t* af *roil without
co”u”s”d.

09. Reing at n halt or m;,rk ti”,e: 1. Sockward, 2. MARC”.

Take &ens of 15 inches st,‘tl’ni~&,t to the rear.
The back ste,, is “led for sh”rt distn”cesbnl~ and is not exe-
cuted in double time.
If nt order arms, the back stew is executed at tr& without
eommnnd.
TO HoH.
50. To arrest the march in quick or double time: 1. Squad,
I) “dli-_
_.
At the commnrrd halt, given as either foot strikes the gruund,
plant the other foot :xs io marching: raise and plwe the first
foot by the side of the other. If in double the. dro” the bnnds
bp the sides.
To March by the Flank.
‘i 1. Being in march: 1. By the right (left) Ilonk. 2. MARCH.
At the command mores, give” :is tbe right foot strikes the
ground. advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right
in marching and tier, ofI in the new direction with the right foot.
To March to the Rear.
72. Being in march: I. To the r-em-, 2. MARC”.
At the comnmnd march, give” ns the right foot strikes the
ground, advance and ~Ia,,t the, left foot : tnr” t” the right about
;,tF balls of both feet “nd m”nodi;&ly ste,, off with the left
If m:,rehi”g in double time, turn 10 the right about, taking.
four stew in place, keeping the cadence, nerd then step OS with
the left foot.
Change Step.
73. Reins in mnrch: 1. Change step, 2. MARC”.
At the command march, ~ivell as the right foot strikes the:
&?l‘o”“d, “dvnnce n”d ,lia”t the left foot; ,lln”t the toe of the
right foot near the heel of the left and 6tq, off wit,, the left foot.
The change on the right f”ot is similarlr executed. the c”“I-
mnnd mlrmh being @EL, as the left foot strkes the gruund.
 80 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER.

MANUAL OF ARMS.

74. AS soon as ,,rnctienb,e the recrnit is taught the “se,

nomenclature (IT. I). a”d care of his rifle; wbe” fair progress
has been made in the i”struction without ams, be is taught
the “,uaua, of arms; i,,strwtio” without a.rols and that with
ormS llmmate.
73. The following ruks goxwn the currying of the ,kce:
li‘irst. Thu ],ie(‘r is not cnrried \vi+h cartridges in either the
chamber or the magazine except when specifically ordered.
Whe” so ,o!lded. ov srrm~osed to be loaded. it is babitonlls CBT-
ried ioeked; that is, &ii11 the safety lock ~urnc~l to the “s:lfe.”
At all other times it is carried “II,OC~CX,, with the trigger

i
pUlled.
Second. Whenever troop are forwed under arm8, ,,ieees are
immediately inspected at the commands: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS:
3. Order (Right shoulder. port). 4. ARMS.

i A similar
If catridges
remmw,
inspecti”” is made ilnmedintely before dismissal;
are fouud io the chamber 01’ magar.i”e they are
:nd ,l,ilced in the belt.
'Third. The cut-oft i8 kept turned ” oLT” except when cnr-
trillges are Bet" ails “Sod.
$onrth. The 1w’onet is not fixed except in bnsonet exercise,

Iion guard, or f0, conlbat.

Fifth. Foil in is ~~.x,!cuted with the “iwe at the order 8~~8.
Falf out, rest, ;,nt, ot ease are executed ar witbout arms. On

i reswning attention Ihe posilion of order arms is txken.

Sixth. If at the order, nnkw
is brunght to the right shoulder
othenvi~e prescribed,
al the comm:md march, tlie
the yiece

1
1.
three motions corr~s~~~ndiug with the first three steps. illore-
nwnts may be executed nt the trail by ,wef:l~i”~
,tory cownu,nrl with rhe wortls at trail:
2. MARCX; the trail is taken at the cmnu~:md march.
When the facings, alignL”e”ts,
the pl’epara-
as, 1. At fra;,, forward,

“,W” arm CI”8P KL”l<~, taking

interval or distaw~, and msrmbiinps nre csenlted from the
orclcr, riti~e the ,,iew to the tr:,il while in motion a”d rcsnme
the order o-11%““‘LLrrg.
x.^lLi’--
The ,iiwe is brought to the order on halting. The
exeention of the oz’dcr beei” WE” the halt is con,~,,eted.
Eidlth. A diseugnged band io double time is held as when
witho,,t arms.

r,,
 cur-wt-s.4w~E.

6X.2-K LOMspR/G.

.wfETY~ LOCK 7iv”M“ SP!E.

90461--17. 0-o 13cepqe 30.)

 SLIDE CIP SCKW:,
?AC<OR‘VLLAR S”&?AM7 SLYCAR W/Nff,,GE SC&-M
/ i

4crm. ma-D BbSrr

I
RRIFTSUDE. WhAGE SCRLW COLLA,?

FmwZ s
fLATi.
m.
 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. sx

76. ‘The folioming rlllcs govern the exw”ti”n Of the manus

“i Brms:
First. In al, gositions of the left hand at the balnnce (center
of gPt,“it,y, tJ:,gonet “ntixed) the thulnh c1asfls the piece; the
s,i”g is included in the sras,, of the hand.
Second. I,, all p”Yiti”ns Of the ,1iae “ diag”nRlly ac1’088 the
body ” the position of the give, left arm and hsnd are the same
as in port arm&
Third. In resnuhq the order from ally ~~Bitioll in the
manu;tl, the ,uotion ~,elit ro the last concludes ‘with the butt of
the ~,iece nbout 3 inches from the wind, barrel to the rear,
the left hand nbore and near the right, steadying the ,,iece,
fingers extended and joined, foreann alld wrist straight and in-
clining duwnwnrd, a11 finyers of the right hand ~rnq~i”~ the
mce. TO C”“lBkk the order, lamer the Diex geut1y to the
ground with the right h:m~, drop the left quickly by the side,
and take the ,,osition of order arm8.
Allowing tile piece to drop through the right hand to the
Gronnd, or other simihir abuse of the rifle to ,md”ce effect in
execllting the nuanonl, is prohibited.
Fourth. The cnr,euce Of the motiuns is that Of quick time;
the recruits are Rrsf nquired to gire their whole attention to
the details of the motious, the cadence king ~radwlly BC-
hired na t,,e~’ become acc”stomed to hmdlin~ their pieces
The instructor niny require them to count nloud in cxdewr
with the W”ti”nS.
Fifth. The mnllnnl is tBnRht at x lrnlt and the mowme,,ts we,
for the pur~~me of instrwtion, dirided iuto moiions and exe-
Cute-d in detail; in this cnse the commnnd of execution deter-
INineS the m”m,,t clcr,lti”ll “f the first I”“,~i”,l. and the e”,,,-
mnnds. two, three. ‘our, th:,t of the other n,otio,~s.
TO emxute the nroremrats ill detail. the irrstrwtor fnxt ci,w
thins: By the numbers: a11 ~uonxuents di~idd into nMions RIT
then exeente,, as above ex,,hi”e* until he cn”ti”“S: Without the
numbers; 01) rornrna~~l~ u~orcnrcuts otln~ than those in the mnn-
llnl of ar,t,s.
Sixth. Whcnerer ciK!nmstnnces require, the reguhr D”*iti”nS
“f ,,lr ,~li,u”ct, of :,,II,s i in, 1 .t,,e lil.inss n,:ly ix ordered x,‘itho”t
L’txllPd to the ,rrevions pohition of the piex.
Under exice~,+ioml conditions of weather “r fatigue the rifle
may be ?:lrrM in :,11s m:,r,ner aireaed.
 52 8CfmOL cm THE SOLDIER.

?‘i. iosifion of order CT,-msstanding: The butt rest* evenly on

the wound, tmrrel to the rear, toe of the butt 01, a line with toe
Of, and touching, the right slloe, i,l’,ns nlud bands banging nat;
ur+Y, right hand holding the l>iece bet\,-““” the thumb and
finenra~
2. ARMS.
Center “f

“-“.“-“” .--. ,
zontnl; left foreann restin; L’ BPRIIIS~
~~“~~~~.. ‘he ~_. body; the piece in a
wi-ticnl rhn~e pmillel to the front.
80. wing at present aru18: 1. Port. 2. ARMS.
Carry the piece diagonally BCL’OSSthe Imdy and take the posi-
*ion Of nort arrnus.
81. &zing nt port arnrs: 1. Present, 2. ARMS.
Carry the uiwe to n vertical msition in front of the center of
the body and take the ,,mition -“f present anus.
8Z. Being at WeSent or Port arms: 1. Order, 2. ARAf.9.
Let go With the ri!dlt hand: lower nnt1 ~~~~_ .~...” tha
PIlIT” __I piece to the
right with the left hand: r&s” it with the m-c-t rich hand just
above the lower band; let fii-wit-,, t,,” left ~hnnd. and take the
uext to tt le last position in coming to the order.’ (Two) corn.
me order.
Being tit order arms: 1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS.
With the riEht hnud raise and throw the oiew > diaam,lly
ncro*s the body; cLll’ry the right haud quickly -t”~ the butt, em-
bRlL!illg it, the hWl bet\Veell the first two tinger*. (TWO) With.
“Ut Chwing the sras,) of the right hand, ~laee the piece on the
right shoulder, bilrrcl UJ, and inclimd nt :IH :IIIPIP nf about 45”
1Yom the horizontal, tri&er ward in&e hollow “f the sboulder.
r$ht elbow near the side, the ,,iece in a wtieni pia& perpen-
dlCUk%r t” the fr”llt; CITY the left biu,d. t,,“,“,, :,,,d Angers
extended rmd joined, t” the small of the stuck, tip of the fore-
tillg~r tUUChillK the COCkillg Dime, ,wisf strnight and elbow
dowu. (THREE) Drop the left hand by tbr side.
 scEooL OF TILE S0LDn.R. 33

84. Being at right shoulder arms: 1. Order, 2. ARMS.

Press the butt down quickly nnd throw tbe piece diagonaiir
~WOSS the body, the right hand retaining tb” gruq, of the butt.
/TWOI. (IHREEI ~secute order arm as doscribed from rnwt
&ma.
86. Beirrg at wxt rmns: 1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS.
Change the right hand t” the butt. (TWOJ, (THREE) A8 in
ri’&t ~h”“lder nr~s from order arms,
86. Beiue at rieht ~h”ulder i,rms: 1. Pod. 2. ARMS.
Press the-butt &mm quickly 2nd tbr”w the piece diagonally
across the body, the right hnud retaiuiug its gras11 of the butt.
[TWO) Chmw the rifht band to the s~llnll of tb” 8tock.
87. Being at right ~LIoulder arum: 1. Present, 2. ARMS.
Execute port mxu~. (TXREE) Dxec”te yreseut arms.
88. Being nt present nnm: 1. Right shoulder, 2. ARMS.
Execute wrt ilmm. (TWO). (THREE), [FOUR] Exetzute right
shoulder nrma as from Iiort ar,,~s.
89. Bei,@ at Port unus: 1. Left shoulder, 2. ARMS.
Carry the niece with the ri&t hand nud @CC it on tbs
left shoulder, barrel up, trigger guard in the hollov of tbe sbnui-
da’; at the same time grasp the butt with the left hand, bee1
between first and sec”nd fingers, thumb and lingers closed “11
the stock. (TWO] llro~ the rigkt hzmd by the side.
Being at left should”,’ arms: 1. Port. 2. ARMS.
Grasp the piece with the right band nt the sm;,ll “f the stock.
(TWO) Carry the piece t” the right with tbe right hand, regras~,
it with the left, and tnke the position of port arms.
Left shoulder a,“,8 nrily be ordered directly from the order,
right shoulder “r Lxesent, or the re\erse. At the command .,Fms
exeC”te port ttll”,s and e”“ti”“e iu cadence t” the ,,osition
ordered.
90. Being at order 8rm8: 1. Pm,de, 2. REST.
Curis the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee
slightly bent; carry the nl”zele in front of the center of the
body. barrel to the left; gx’as11 the piece with the left hand just
be,“,” the stacking swivel, and with the right hand below .and
agaiust the left.
Being at parade rest: 1. Squad, 2. AVERTION.
Resnme the order, the left band quitting the piece oy,,osite
the right hip.
WM1~-17----3
34 SCEOOL OF TEE SOLDIER,

91. Being at order ams: 1. Trail, 2. ARMS.

Raise the piece, right arm slightly bent, nnd indine the
muzzle forword so ttl:,t tile barrel nlakrs a11 angle Of about 30”
With tile vertical.
When it can be &me withoat dmger or inconvenience to
athers, the piece Nay be gras,Fd :,t thL. hnkiuce and the rn”z5k
lowereil until the piece is h”rieOntal ; a similar Dosition in the
wt band mny be used.
9%. Being at trail arms: 1. Order. 2. AIIMS.
Lower tile piece with the right ha,ld nnll resume the order.
Rifle s,dute.

09. Being at right stroulder arms: 1. Rifle. 2. SALUTE.

carry thn left hano srnnrtls t” the Sumi, Of the stock, forearm
horiuontnl, pahI of hnnd down, thulllb nml dllFCPS extended zmd
.ioined, forefinger tmching end of oxking piece; 1ook toward the
Inxwxl saluted. (TWO) mop left Iland by the Side; turn Imad
-find eyes to the front. (C. I. n. R., NO. 6.)
94. 1+&w at order or trail GPUIS: 1. Rifle, 2. SALUTE.
cnrrg the left banA snlartly to the IwIt *ide, ,,a1111 of the
i~:lun dlornll, thumb nIlI3 tingers exteildea nlld joinei, *urefinger
ilgnillst ,liCCC near the nruzz,e; lOOk to,vnril the ~,erson mlut~ed.
(rwo) 1~10~~the left hand by the Ride: tinn the heall and eyes
ta the front.
For rll,eS governing sautes, *et? “ mmors nwJ Salutes ” (psrs.
15~i%, ,
The Bayonet.

95. Beiug nt order arms: 1. fix. 2. BAYOA’ET.

If the hagourt seilbbard is carried “” the belt: Ereeute yaraade
rest : gri,q, the tmyonet With the right hXld, Luck of hamI to-
ward the body; maw the bayonet from the SCabbtlrd ana fix it
on the biuTe1, glanciug at the m”ZZle; reYllme the order.
If the bayonet is cnrr% 011 the haverscck: Draw the bnyunet
with the left hand nnd fx it in the most comenient mxnner.
96. Being at order arms: 1. Unfix, 2. BAIONET.
If the tlnyonet .%xbbnrd is carried 011 the bdf : Execute parade
rest; gpil*Il the h:mdk! "f tue lx1yonet frmly nitll the right hand,
pressing me syriPg with me forefinger of me right hnlld; raise
 SCHOOL OB TIIE SOLDIEE. 3.5
the bayonet until the handle is about 12 inches 8bore the muzzle
of the piece; dro,p lhe ,Mnt to the left, back of the hnnd toward
the body, and, @anci”g at the scabbard, return the bayonet, the
blade ,msi”~: between the left nru, and the body; rega8~ tile
Ws? with the right Lund nnd resume the order.
If the b:,)-“net scnhbnrd is carried u,, the hi,~ersack: Take
the bayonet from the rifle with the left hand nnd ret”111 it to
tlie sc:,bb:,rd in the most convenient m:,r,ner.
If mnrchiug or lxi,le down, the bayonet is fixed and un,ined
in the most exwditious and eonve”ier,t manner and the piece
returned to the original position.
Fir and unfix bayonet are executed with ~rom,,tness and
re$ularity but not in endence.
07. CHARGE BAYONET. Whether exeeutcd nt halt or to
motion, the bayonet ia held toward the opponent as in the gosl-
tion of guard in the ?,ranua, for Bayonet ,~xercise.
Exercises for Instruction in bayonet combat are prescr~%ed in
the ManuB for Bayonet Exercise.
The Inspection.

00. Being nt order arms: 1. tns,%ction, 2. ARMS.

At the second commnnd take the position of port BPnl8.
(TWO) Seize the bolt handle with tne thumb and fore&rger of
the right hand, turn the handle up, draw tire bolt back, and
fiance at the chamber. Hiwin&’ found the ehnmber em&, or
having emptied it, r;\ise the head and eyes to the front.
00. Being at in~~eetion terms: 1. Grder (Right shoulder, port),
2. ARMS.
At the rrqnmtory command push the bolt forward, turn the
bmdle d”nm, pu11 the trigger, and res”nle p”Pt arms. at me
eommnnd imus, complete the movement ordered.
To Dismiss the Squad.

100. Being at halt: 1. Ins~eclion, 2. ARMS, 3. POPS, 4. ARMS.

5. DISMISSEO.
 SCHOOL OF THE SQUAD.
10 1. Soldiem are grouped i”to squads for I,UL’,KISCSof iuutruc.
tion. discipllue, eantro*, and order.
10%. The squad wx~er c~usists of a corpora, zmd seven
privates.
The “r0re111ents in the School of the Squad are designed to
ILlake the squad R fixed “nit aud to facilitate the ~ontr,,, and
lnoveuleut of the corapauy. If the nwnber of men gro”I)ed iii
more than 3 and lest than 12, they are formed as IL squad of
4 files, the excess above 8 being aosted ns file closers. If the
number grouwd is grenter than 11, 2 or more squads are formed
and the group is termed n platoon.
For the imtmctio” of rwr”its, these rules may be modified
100. The cor,mral is the sq”ad leilder. ;,ud wbe,, absent is
replaced by a designated private. If no private is designated,
the senior in leugth Of serwce acta lis leader.
The corwxnl, wheu in rmks, is w&d as the left ,,,an iu the
front rank Of the squad.
Nhell the coqmal leaves the ranks to lend his squad, his rear
rank man steps into the fwnt rank, and the Rle remains blank
until the cor~~oral return8 to his plnce in rnnks, when his rear
rank man steps bock into the rear *auk.
104. In battle officers and sergeants endeavor t,, ~x~serre
the integrity of squads; they designate new lenders to replnee
tho8e disabled, or@,nize new squnds when “eeessnry. nnd see
that every man is placed in a squad.
Men are taught the neressity of remaining with the squad to
which they bekmg and, in case it be broken up or they become
separated therefrom, to atbeh them&Yes to the nearest 641md
and plntoo,, lenders, whet&r these be of their OX,-n or of another
organization.
105. The squad nxecntes the no/t, reds, facings, afeps and
“mchiigs, and the ,,~,““a, of (inns “s ex,~lained in the School
of the Soldier.
To form the Squad.
I”& To forIn tllc equad the instructor pblces himSelf 3 pilces
in front of wlrere the center is to he nucl commands: FALL IN.
 SCHOOL OF TllE SPU.4D. 31

Tbe weu assemble trt attentiou, pieces itt the order, and me
arrauged by the eorpwal in doubk rank, aa irearly as prketieable
in order of beigbt from right to left, racb mall dropping his left
band as SOO” as the ,,,nu “11 his left him hi8 intel?a,. The rear
rauk forms with distance of 40 inches.
The i,Ml.“ct”r then comnnmds: COUYT OFF.
At this command all except the right file execute eye8 right,
and begimiug 011 the right, the men io aacb rank count one,
two, three. few: each man turns his head and eyes to the front
BE he couuts.
Piecea are theu iuspeeted.

Alignments.

107. To align the squad, the base file or Bles haying bea
wxablished: 1. Right (Left). 2. ORES& 3. FRONT.
At the comnraud dress all me” @ace the left band “non the
hip (whether dressiny to the right 01‘ left, ; each mm,, exce,,t
the base Ble, when 01, or ,,a,r the new line executes eyes rig,&
and, taking steps of 2 or 3 inches, alaces himself so that his
right arm rnts lightry 3gnin8t the e.rm of the man on hia rigLIt,
rend 80 that his eps and sbo~dders are in liue mitb those of the
men on hi8 right ; the rear rank men cover ill me.
The instructor rerifies the aligrmwnt of both rmks from the
right flank and o~%em up or bnek such men a8 may be in rear,
or in advmce, of theline; only the men deSignsted move.
At the commimd front, gire,, when the run& are aligned, each
man turns his head and eyes to the front and dross his left
hand by his side.
In the first drills the basis of the alignment is established on.
or ~nrallel to, the frout of the eq”nd; afterwards, in oblique
directions.
Whene\-er the position of the base file or files necessitates R
considerable “w~elnent by the squad, s”cb morernent will be
executed by ux~rcbiu,y to the front or oblique, to the Bank or
backward, as the cme may be, without other co”,maud, and at
the trail
10% To preserre the ulim,nent when marching: O”,DE
RIGHT (LEFT).
The men ~,reserve their intervals from the side of the guide,
vielding to gresuure from that side and resisting pressure from
 38 SCHOOL OF TEE SQUAD.
the OPposite dirfftion: they TeCowr interrals, if lost, by grxdn-
ally opening 04t or eming in ; they recover nlignmc!nt by s,ight,y
lengthening or slyrtening the step; the recn-rank men cover
their file leaders nt 40 inches.
In double conk, the front-rank man on the right, or designated
Bank, conducts the mnrcb; when marcbin~ faced to the dank,
the leadlUg man of the front rank is the guide.

To Take Intervals and Distances.

100. Being in line sit n halt: 1. T&e inferval, 3. To the right

(left), 3. MARCH. 4. Squad, 5. XALT.
At the SeemId C”rnnl:lnd the rear-rank men mnrc1, backward
4 stem and halt: at t,he commnnd march ail face to the right
and the leading nxan of each rank steus off; the other men step
aft in succession, encll following the grewding ma,, at 4 ~pnces,
rear-rank men marching abreast of their file leaders.
At the commnnd halt, given when all have their intorvnls, a”
halt and fwe to me front.
1 IO. Being at intervals, to nssmble the sqund: 1. Assemble,
to the right (left), 2. MARC”.
The front-mnk mnn 01, t,ba right stands fast, the rear-rank
nm” on the right Cl”fieS to 40 inches. The other men face to
the right, close by the t;hortest line, and fnce to the front.
111. Eking in line at a halt nud bn,-ing connted “E: 1. T&e
distance. 2. MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.
At the cummand marclr So. 1 of the front ,xnk moves ~traigbt.
to the front; NOS. 2, 3, ;,,K, 4 “E the front r;t,,k and Nas. 1, 2, 3,
and 4 of tbe t’wr r:mk, in the order named, move straight to
the front, eilrh step,ling “W so as to follow UK! preceding man
nt 4 paces. The conmrand halt is gircu whm ill, have their
distances.
In ease m”re than one quad is in line, encb sqn;,d erec,,tes
the movcmellt as nbore: The guide of cncb xnrk of numbers is
right.
112. Being at distnnera, to nssemble tbc ssund: 1. Assemb,e,
2. MARCH.
NO. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the Other ,,,,rnbers move
forward to their proper places in me.
 SCIIOOL OF TXE SQUAD. 3s

To Stock and Take Arms.

113. Being in line 0. a halt: STACb ARMS.
Each even number of the front rank grmps his piece with
the left hand at the upwr bnnd and l’e&~ the butt between his
feet, barrel to the front, m,,ozlr inclin‘x, alightly t” the front
and opposite the celllcr of the interval “~1 his right, the thumb
and forefinger raising the stacking wivel; each even number
of the rear ran!4 tllun ,insses his piece, barrel to me rey to
his file leader, who grafips it between the hands with his right
hand and thr”n.s the butt ab”ut 2 feet i,, ndva’nce of that of
his own piece and “y1)“~ite the right of the interval, the right
hand slipping to the upper baud, the thnnrb and forefinger
rnising the stacking swivel, which he engnges with thilt “f his
own piece; each odd muubcr “f the front rauk raises bis piece
with the rig-ht hand, wr~‘ies it \vAl.f”rward, barrel t” the fmnt;
the left h,aud, guiding the stncking SIVIYPI, engages the lower
hook Of the Swivel of Itis o\vn piece With the free hOOk of that
of the even number of th” ~‘“8,’ ,w,k; he then t”rn6 the barrel
ootwurd into the angle formed by the “tiler tw” ~)i”ces a,nd
l”we1‘8 the butt to the ero”“d. to me ri!At of and against the
toe of his right shoe. ”
The stacks made, the loose pieces zre laid “n tllem by the
eve” numbers of the front rank.
When exh mm krs finished himdlim I. nieca. he~~~~~~~~ trikes the
posit,ion of the soldier.
114. Being in line behind tbc stxcks : TAk’E IARMS.
‘The loose &ces are rrtnrurd by the even numbers of the
frront mn!x; each eve” lumlbcr of the front raulr @YlSIIS his “WA
piece with the left hand, ,be piece Of his rwr-rank man witll
his right hand, griwping bath betmoeu the baud*; en& odd
nun~ber of the front xmk gmsps his piece in the 8~um way with
the vight hand, disengages it by rnisiug the butt from the
g:1’“““d nnd then, t”c”i”g ,bC piece to the right, detaehees it
from the stack: ec,rh “Y”” nrmber “f the front rank disengnges
and detaches his 11iece by twuil% it to the left, “nil then ,X,SS~Y
the pipce of his rcnr-rank u,nu t” hiu, and 811 resume the “c-de,‘.
115. Should tmy sqm,d have SOS, 2 aud 3 bkmk tiles, No. 1
re(L* t’anlr tykes me ,llaCl? Of NO. 2 ITar lmlk in rualrine and
breaking the stack; t!k &da made or broken, he rcsum&hia
pat.
Pieces “at “sed in ruuking the stmk are termed ,oose pieces.
Pieces 8,~ “ever stncked ,vitb the bayonet dred.
 40 SCHOOL OF THE SQImD.
The Oblique March.
110. I?Or tb0 inStrUCtioll of remwits, the sqnnd being in
cohmm or CorrectlY aligned, the i”Str”Ct”r rn,mes me squad to
face h*lf right or half left, points o”t to the men their relative
Positions, mid explains that the.% are to be maintained in
the oblique march.
117. 1. Right (Left) oblique. 2. MARC”.
Each man *teas off in a direction 45” to the right of his
orkim front. He preserves his relative position, keeping his
shoulders Dnmllel to those of the gnido (the “,a,, a,, the right
front “f the line or c”l”mn), and so wg”,ntes his steps that the
ranks remain pnrallel to their original front.
At the COnmxmd holt the mm halt faced 10 the front.
‘To resume the Original direction: 1. Forw,~rd, 2. MARCX.
The men half face to the left in marching and then move
straight to the front.
If at haif step or mark time vhile obliquing, the oblique march
is remned by the commands: 1. Oblique. 2. MARCX.
To Turn on Moving Pivot.
118. Being in line: 1. Right (Left) turn. 2. MARCH.
The iWwanent IS executed by e:wh rank successively and on
the SBme ground. At the Second commnnd the pivot man of
the front rank faces to the right in mnrcl~ing and takes the
half step; the ,otb@ men of the rank oblique to the right until
opposite their &-xes in line, then execute n second right oblique
and take the half step on arriving abreast of the pivot man.
ALI glance townrd the marching dank while at half step and
take the full stel, without command as the last man arrives on
the line.
Right (Left1 half tmn is executed in n similnr ma”n”r. The
pivot ma” makes a half change of direction to the right and
the other men make quarter changes in obliquing. (G. I. D. R.,
No. 8.)
To Turn on Fixed Pivot.
119. Being in Xne, to turn and march: 1. Squad right (left),
2. MARCH.
At the second command, the right flank man in the front rank
faces to the right in mnrching and marks time: the other front
rank men oblique to the right, place themselves abreast of the
 SCKOOL OF THE SaTJan. 41

pirot, and mark time. In the renr rank the third mm from the
right, followed in culomu by the wand and first, mores straight
to the front until in rem of his front-rank man, when all face
to the right in marching and’mq’lr time: the other number of
the rear rank mores struight totie Sryt four paces and places
hilllself abrenst of the man on his r&la, a1en 011 the new line
gInwe toward the marching Bnnk while .q,a,rking time and, as
the last ULRll RTl’iW8 “11 the me, both mih execute forward.
march. without commnnd.
130. Being in line, to t”n, and halt: 1. Squad ‘right. (,e‘t), 2.
MARCH, 3. Squad, 4. HALT.
The third ~ommnnd is given immediately after the second.
The turn 1s executed ns prescribed in the preceding pnrngragl~
except tIltIt a,, men. on arriving on the new me, marli time
until the fonrth commnnd is airen. wheu all halt. The fourth
command should be @ren GS the last mm, arrives on the lioe.
121. Being in line. to t”m about and mnrch: 1. Squad r;gi,t
Cleft) about. 2. MARCH.
At the s&ond commnnd. the front rank twice eaealtes wuod
right, initiatfng the SeCOnd squad right when me man on tw
marching Aahk has nrrired abreast Of the rank. In the rear
rank the third mall from the right, followed by the second and
first io colunm, ~noves straight to the front until on the prolonga-
tion of the line to be occo~~ied by the rear rank; changes direc-
tion to tile right; rimvss in the new direction until in rear of
his front-rank man, when 811 face to the right in mcwchiog,
mark time, and ~Ixnee toward the marching Bank. The fourth
man marches on the left of the third to his new noS*tion : ns he
arrive8 on the line, both rank8 execute forward. ‘&ch, without
command.
122. Being in line, to turn about and hnlt: 1. Squad right
(left) about, 2. MARCH. 3. Sqrrod, 4. HALT.
The third command is given immedintely after the second.
The turn is executed zm prescribed in the preceding paragraph
except that a,, men, on nrriring on the new line, mark timo
until the fourth comm;,nd is given, when all halt. The fourth
command Should be &w, DS t,,e last man arrives on the line.
To Fo,,ow the Cwporal.
123. Being assembled or deployed, to march the squad with-
OUt “nn~essary commands, the eoqmra, places himself io front
Of it and commands: FOLLOW ME.
 42 SCHOOL OF THE SaUAD.

I* in line or skirAsh line, NO. 2 of the front m*k follows in

the traC’e of the cor,loral nt aboUt 3 paces : the Other nlen con-
form to the movemeut6 of No. 2, guiding on hiln and maintain-
ing their relative positions.
If in L!“l,,“nl, the held Of tile COl”D,ll f”,loWs the corporal.

To Deploy (I.3 Stimlishsrs.

3214. Being in xn.p formation, nssemhled: 1. As skirmi*b.ws,
2. MARCH.
The curpmnl ,,IRCc?S himself in fmrlt Of tile SlJWd, if not
already there. Mo%ag at a rl1l1, tile men place &mm?lVes
niJre.mt Of tlx! corp”l~l nt h:llf-pnce inter\‘nls, NO% 1 ona 2 on
his right, No,% 3 and 4 on Ids left, rear-rank men on me right
Of their me leadersl cxtrn men 011 the left of No. 4; RN then
conform to me corporaI(s gait.
When the SQwld is acting nlone, skirmish line is sImiktr1y
formed on NO. 2 of the front rank, WllU stanan fast or con-
tinues the march, as the ca*e mny ix; the COrpOrRI places IaIl-
SeiP in front of the sqm4 w&n advnneing and in rear when
baited.
*hen deployed ns skinnishms, the men march at ease, pieces
at ihe trail OnIess otllenvi8e ordered.
The cmpomI is the guide when
io the lhe; otherwise No. 2
*rout ran!? i6 the guide.
126. The norma, intervn, 1retmem skirmishers is one-half
pace, resnlting pmctfcnlly in one man per yard of front. The
front of a squall thus deployed as skirmishers is about 10 paces.
To lncrense or- Diminish lntemds.
126. If nssembled, and it is desired to Ae~~loy at greater than
tile nOrnlal iIlterw1: or if dPployed, and it is desired to inaew3e
_ or ckiw?ase the interm,: I. As skirmishers, (SO mm”) paces,
: 2. MARCH.
Interralu are taken iit the indicatd nomlxr of pnces. If
! Rlready deployed, the men move by tllc fl:m,< townrd or away
: from the guide.
Tire Assembly.
127. Beinf de~loyti : I. Assemble. 2. MARCH.
The meu move toward t:he corporal and form in their proper
places.
 SCHOOL OP THE SB”*LD. 43
If me coqm-a, continuev to advance, the men move in double
time, form. and mhnv binI.
The asmlmy while mare,,ing to the rear is uot executed.
Kneeling and Lying Down.
128. If stundinE:: KNEEL.
Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 foot to the
left rear of the left beeI; kneel on right knee, sitting as warly
88 possible on the right heel; left forearm xmm left t,high;
piece remains in position of order mms; right lmnd grasping it
abore the lower band.
la!,. If standiug or kneeling: LIE DOWN.
Kneel, but with right Lnee against left heel; carry back the
left foot nnd lie Bat on the belly, inclining body about 35” to the
right; piece horimntal, bmTel up, muas,c ,,R the groum3 and
painted to the front; elbows on the gmuud.; left band at the
balance, right hand gPilSpillg the mm,, “f the *tocli opposite me
neck. This is the POSitiOn Of Order aPm8, lying down.
13”. If kwding OI- lying dnmn : RISE.
If kneeline. .,, Rtnnd II”. faced to the front. on tlu? mound marlred
the left heel. .
If lying down, rak body on both !mee8; stand up, faced to
the fl.“nt, on the @‘omd marled by tllu knees.
131. If lying down: KNEEL.
Raise the bodr on hot h knees: take the oositian of kneel
132. Ill double rank, the &itions aP kueeliug and lying
down are ordinarily used only for the better utilization of oxen
When dqiloscd its skil.~,ishers, a sitting ,msition may be taken
iu lie” Of me pOSition kneeling.
LOADINGS AND FIRINGS.
133. The rommnnds for loading and firing are the Sam?2
whether ntanding. kneeling, or lying down. The firings are
alwilys executed nt a ,,.?lt.
When kneeling or lying down in double rank, the rear rank
does not load, aim, or fire.
The instruction in firing will be preceded bg- a command for
loading.
laadings nre executed in line and skirmish line only.
134. Pieces hming been ordered loaded are kept loaded
Without command until the command unload. or imp&ion a-,,,~,
fresh clips being inserted when the magazine is exhausted.

- .>
44 SCHOOL OF TWE SBU.0.

135. The nimillg Point or target is carefully pointed out.

‘This may be do”t. befwe or after ;,,,no,,,~ci,~g the sight set.
tin& Roth ilre indicated before giving the command for dri,,g,
but “w’ be Onlitted whe” the target apwnrs snddenly and is
“““listakable; ill S”Cb case haMe Sight is nsed if “0 sight set-
tine is a”“ou”ced.
130. The target 01’ ainling IIoint baviilg bee” designated and
the sight setting i~nnouuced, such desipU”tio” or ;~“nom~ce”~e”t
need “ot be repznted until :L c,,a”ye of either or both is “tees-
1>1*.,
ll.J.
Troops nre trained to continue their fire “pm the aiming point
Or tar@t desiwrted, nrrd at the sight setting a”n”,mced, until
a change is ordered.
187. If the “1~” are not “lready in the psitio” of load, that
Position is take” at the anno”ncemcnt of the Sight settillg;
if the “““““llcenwlt is omitted, the position is taken at the first
eommund for tiriux.
138. When deployed, the use of the sli,,g a8 a,, “id to “cc”.
rate firing is diseretionnrg with e:xh ma”.
To Load.
189. Bei,,~ in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. With dum,,,y
(blank DP ball) cartridges, ‘2. LOAD.
At the commn”d load each front-rank man or &imisher faces
half right “nd carries the right foot to the right, “bo,,t 1 foot,
to S”C~ POSition “S will insure the greiltest iirmness ““d stendi-
ness of the body; raises, or lowe1‘8, the piece and dro[>s it into
the left hand nt the bnlauce, left thu”,b extended along the
stock, m”zzle at the height of the breast, and turns the cut-o,?
UP. With the rirht h”“d be tur”s a”d dr:,ws the b6lt back,
takes a loaded clin and i”ser+a the e”d i” the eIin slots, pl;tces
the th”“lb on the &vder SII;IC~ of the top oartridge, the fingers
extending nro”“d the yicce nnd tip8 resting on tbe “mgnzine
door pklte; forces the cartridges into the ~“n~asine by Iwessing
down vitb the thwllb: witbollt wmnrine the olin thrusts the
bolt home, twning d&l tile ~Gdle; G;“s-tl,e-~;fety ,“C,< to
the “safe” ““d cnrries the h:lnd to the sm;~ll of the stock.
DilCh rear rnllk man mortx to the rmt front, tnkrs a similar
position ouwsite the interval to the right of MY fro”t r:t”k ma”,
lnuazle Of the ,iicce extending bcro”d the fnxrt r;,“,i, n,,d loads.
A skirmi8l~ lim may load while mori”g, the pieces being held
ah ueilrly 86 practicable in the position of loud.
 SCHOOL OF TXE SQUAD. 45

If kneeling or sitting, the Ipsitim of the piece is simihir; if

kneeling, tbr ‘left fmwrnr wits on the left thigh; if sitting the
elbown are SUppOrtHI by the knees. If lying down, the left band
*leadies and s”,l,mrts the ,,ieee :tt me b;lkLllCe, the toe Of ttle
butt resting 0” the ground. the nllizzic off the gr”und.
For reference, these po*itims (standing, kneeling, and lying
down, are desimlnted 118 that Of hd.
140. For iustrnetion in hading: 1. Simulate, 2. LOAD.
Executed as abort? described cxce,,t that the CUt-OB remains
“ Off” and the handling Of cartridees is Sim”lated
me recruitv are first taught to simulate loading tmd Bring;
after n sew kSS”“S dummy cartridges may be “Sed. Later,
blank cartridges mny be used.
141. The rifle ulay be used ias a single loader by turuing the
magazine “off.” The magazine m,y be filled in whole or in
Part while “Off ” or “on ” by ,xas3ing cartridges singly down
and b:xk until they are in the ~lroper place. *he me of
the rifle 89 n single loader is, however, to be regarded a8
exceptioml.
To “nlood.
142. UNLOAD.
Take the px4tion Of load, torn the safety I”& up and lllove
bolt alternately back and forward until all the cartridges are
ejected. After the last cartridge is ejected the chnmber is
dosed by first thrusting the bolt slightly forward to free it
from the stud holding it in place when the chamber in open,
m’e89ing the follower down and back to engtrge it under the
bolt and the” thrusting the bolt home: the trimer ,a Dulled.
The cartridge are then picked up, cleaned, and returned to the
belt and the ,Aece is brongbt to the order.
To set tne Sight.
143. RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED [EIGHT-FIFTY, etc.), ,,r BAT-
TLE SIGHT.
The sight is set at the elevation indicated. The iuvtruetor
exglains and verities sisbt setting%
To fire by Volley.
144. 1. READY, 2. AIM, 3. Squad, 4. f,RE.
At the command ready turn the si,fety lock to tbe “ ready; n
at the commnlld aim raise the piece with both bands and sup-
 SCHOOL OF THE SQUdD.

Port the butt firmly agsinst the h”ll”w of the right shoulder,
right thumb clasping the stock, barrel h”riz”nta1, left elbow
well under the piece, right elbow ns high as the shoulder; in-
cline the head slishthllg forward and a little to the right, cheek
Wainst the stock, left eye dosed, right eye looking thr0”g.h the
notch of the rear sight so as to perceire the object aimed at,
second joint of forefinger resting lightly against the front “f
the trigger and taking up the siack ; top Of front sight is care-
fully raised into, and held in, the line of sight.
Each rear-rank mnn aims through the interval to the right
Of his file leader and leans slightly forward to advance the
muzzle of his Piece beyond the front rank..
In aiming kneeling, the left elbow rests on the left knee,
Point of elbow in front “f kneeen,,. In oiming sitting, the elbows
are Supported by the knees.
In niming lying down, raise the piece with both hands; nest
on bot,h elbows and uress the butt firmly against the right
shoulder.
At the command fire wss the finger nxninst the tagger; fire
withoot deranging the aim and witbout lowering or turning the
piece ; lower the piece in the position of Load ancl load. f C. I. D.
R., NO. 2.)
14.5. To continue the firing: 1. AIM. 2. Squad, 3. f,8E.
h&h c”111tnnnd iS executed as yreriously explained. Lo&
(ft’Om ~~WZCZ~IE) is a3”Cuted by drawina back and thrusting
homr the bolt with the right bond, leaving the safe& lock at
the “ read”.”
To fire at WiN.
140. FIRE AT WILL.
I3:1ch rn:ln iudeDeudently
~~-- -..-.-a Of the “tbers, comes to the ready,
aims careful,” ‘7 nn,, ..- d~,i,r”~n+rlr.
.....I-...._.,, rt *,,a
..I Ilill>ill”“* l,ylyL
“1_ 11.11.. .>n:n+ “r t;~ruet,
fiPc?S,hds. and continues

i I -ct<>r slloute

minute at effective

tively indistinct I
 SCHOOL OF TfIE SQUAD. 41

To fire by Clip.
148. CLlP FIRE.
Executed in the sunw ntanner in3 fire af will. except that each
man, after having exbnustetl the clrrtridges then in the piece,
suspends firing.
To Suspend F’iring.
14% The instructor blows n long blast of the whistle and
repents LUIUC, if necessnrq, or commands : SUSPEND FIRING.
Firing stops; pieces are held, loaded and locked, in a nosi-
tion of readiness f”r instant resuml)ti”n of tiring, rear sights
unchanged. The men continue to observe the target or aiming
point, or the pbrce at wbieb the target disappeared, or at which
it is expected to reappenr.
This nbistle sign”1 mny be used as a prellminnry to ceme
Ririno.
To &me FirinG.
150. CEASE FIRING.
Firing stops; pieces not ;,lready there are brought to the p&
tion of load, the cut-off turned down if Bring from magazine, the
cartridge is dmwn 0~1 the empty shell is ejeeted, the trigger ts
pulled, sights me laid down, and the piece is brought to the ordeE.
Cease bring is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
position “I- to steady the men.
(C. I. LJ. R., NO. 7.)
151. Connnnnds for suspending or ceasing fire may be given
at any time after the prep:,rat”ry command for firing whether
the tiring hiIS actunlls e”n~“~e”eed or not.
THE USE OF COVER.
152. The recruit should be given cnreful instruction in the
individual use of corer.
It should be impressed upon him tbiit, in taking advantage of
nntwnl co\wr, he must be able to fir” rmily and effectively upon
the enemy; if ILdvRliCillg “ll all enemy, be must 4” so steadily
and ns rapidly ns pussible; be must conceal himself as much
ns ,,ossible while firing and while advancing. While setting his
sight he sh”u,d be under COYer or lying- prone.
15.3. To teach hi,” to fire enMy and effectively, at “E SC,,&
time coneet~ling himself from the view “f the enemy, be is
~mlCtiwl, ill simulated dring in the vrom, sitting, kneeling, and
emuebing Dositiom, from behind hillocks, trees, heap of earth
0,’ rocks, from de,,resai”“s, pullies, ditches, doorways, “r win.
dews. Hr is fnWbt to fire around the right side of bis ~oncea,.
 48 SCHOOL OF THE SPUAD.

ment whenever possible. or, when this is not possible, to rise

enough to IIre over the t0p Of his e”ncenh”e*t.
When these details i,re ““derSt”od, he is required to s&et
cover with referewe lo an assumed enemv and to nlace himself
behind it in proofer position for driug. ” -
164. The evil of remainirg too long in me plnce. bowever
good the concealment, should be esglained. He should be taught
to adYa”Ce from corer to cover, selecting corer in advance
before learing his c”ncealment.
It should be il”preesed upon hi”l that n “XL” rnnning Elpidly
toward an enemy f,,r”iSbeS a poor target. He should be trai”r?d
in qlringing irom a prone pOSiti”” behind r”“seal”le”t, r”““i”g
at top speed to cover and throwing hiinself behind it. IIe shmld
a,80 be practiced in x,mncing fro”1 cover to cuver by crawling.
or by lying on the kft side, ride grasped in the right hand, and
pushing himself forward with the right leg.
185. He should be taught that, when fired 0” while txting
independently, be Sb”uld drag to the ~romd, 8eek cover, a”4
then endeavor to locate his euemy.
156. The instruction of the recruit in the use of cover is COLI-
tinned in the combat exercises of the conmanp. but he must
then be taught that the proper advance of <he piatoon or corn-
wny and the effectivenem of it8 fire ia of greater im,mrtnnce
than the question of rover for individuxls. He should also be
taught that he may not mow about or shift his position in the
firing line except the better to see the tar&.
OBSERYA TION.
157. The ability to use his eyes nccorntely is of great impor-
tance to the soldier. The recruit should be trained in observing
hi8 surrounding from positions and when on the march.
He should be practiced in pointing out and mmning military
features of the ground; in distingni8bing between living beings;
in countng distant grouna of object8 or beings; in recognizing
colors and formti.
15% In the training of mu,, in the m?cbnnim,r of the firing
line, they shonld be practiced in repeating to one another target
and airninE point designations and in quickly locating and point.
ing out a’ designated target. They should be taught to dis-
tinguisb, from a prone position, distant objects, particularly
tmopS, both with the naked eye and with field glasses. Simi.
larly, they should be trained in estimating distances.

,
 SCHOOI, 01’ THE COMl’ANI.

1.59. The cnptain is responsible for the tbeoreticnl and prae-

tic”1 illstructio” of his utlicrrs awl lroncorllllrissiolled oficers, “ot
only in the duties of their respective grades, but in those of the
next higher grades.
100. The company in line is formed in double mn% with the
,nen arm~gccl, as far as gmeticabk, :,ccording to bcigbt from
right to left, the tnllest on the right.
The originill division into sqwdfi is effected by the command:
COUNT OF,=. The squads. snccessively froru the ri&,t. count “8
as in the School of the S~nad. co~‘po~‘:iIs ~alncing themselves
a* N”S. 4 of the fr”“t lx”,‘. If tile left sqond Co”t”i”s kSS than
nix men, it is either increased to that nmubcr by transfers from
other sq,,uds “r is broke” “~1 8”d its “lembera assigned to other
sqwlds “nd posted in the li”e of file closers. These squad or-
~:r,“inations “re mni”l;,ined, by transfers if necessary, ““til the
eom~nny becomes so redoctsl in nnmbers as to necessitate n new
dirisio” i”to sqnads. ;2‘0 squad will CO”t”in lrs~ tbn” six me”
181. The company is further divided into two, three, or four
platoons, each consisting of ““t less thn” two nor “,ore than
four squads. In garrison or cere”m”ies the strength of ~latoo”~
may exceed fmr swadx
182. At the formntion of the company the plnto”“S or squads
RR nnmbercd ronsecntirelg fro”r right to left ““d these designn-
tions do not cbnnge.
FOP convenience in giving eommnnds nnd for reference, the
drsipontions. right, center, left. aben in line, and leading, center,
mv, when in colnmn, are applied to platoms or Sq”“ds. These
designations “,?p,y to the net,,“, ri&t. left, center, head, or rem,
in wbntever direction tbc comp”“y “lay be fixing. ‘The center
squad is the middle or right ,“iddle sqnad of the co,“p”“y.
The desig-nation “So-and-so’s” squad or ,,lntoo” may also
be nsed.
ll3S. Plntoorls “LIC nsSig”ed to the mutennnts ““d noncom-
nlissioned Miters, in order of rmlr, ns follows : 1, right ; 2, left ;
3, center (right center) ; 4, left center.
90467’-17-i 48
5u SCHOOL OF THE GOMPANY

$z
$-

$!z
-

$Ei
m
>p””

js E
-
.ce
I
5KlRMlSH LlNl E-h
<II-T
L ., a-a-7,
.- m; / >< 2’Ptil
,.vLm +_._.._......_.x..............
r >
Cal 2. mu
srn
 scEcloL OF TIE3 COMPANY. 61

The noncowmissiilncd OmcrrE ncrt in ran!+ are nssigned as

G”id%?F, one to ench pint”““. If sergeants Still lwmin, they BE
nssigrled to plnt”“~? as additional guides. U’bta~ the pli~t”“n is
deployed, its guide, or mides, arc”,“~,any the platoon lender.
Dnrin~ bilttlr, these as~i~nmmts are not chnnfed: ra~:,ncies
are tilled by noncommissioued oEcers of the ,,la+or,n, or by the
neare*t RTaiiilblf OfEClYS or “““c”“missi”“ed omers arriving
with rernforcing troajis.
164. The first seergcnnt is never nssigmd ns R guide. When
not e”mmandin~ n Dint”““, he is noated ns a dir closer op,,“site
the third file from the “llkr flank of the first P~B+“OII; and when
the com~nny is dq>loge,, be aceom~;,nies the mptain.
The quartermnstcr SerCennt, when present, is nasigned amord-
ing to his r;,n,< as a Sel’peant.
Enlisted nirn bekm the grade of Swgeant, armed with the
rifle, are in ranks nnle~s 6eming ns guides; when not so am&,
they are posted in the li”e of file elosers.
Mmicinns, when reiluircd to ,,lny, are nt the head of the
CO,“~“. When the c”mpt,“y is deployed, they neeompany the
eaptilin.
166. The company executes the halt. rests. facings, steps nnd
m”‘mhi”gs, monuol of on”% loadings ““d firings, takes ;ntervm,s
and distances and assembles. increases and diminishes intervals,
rcs”r”e6 attention, obliques, res”l,les the direct ruarch, preserves
.~lig:nme~tts, kneels, lies down, rises, ,sfocks nnd takes a-ms, as
~~plaine,, in the Schools “t the Soldier ~“d the Squad, sub-
stituting in the comnmnds com/mng for squad.
The snme rule npplie~ to plt~+mms, det”cbments, d&nils, etc.,
fi,lbstlt,,tir,f tl~irdrsi~~,ti”n for sqond in tbec”m”,mrds. In the
Eane ““Inner these executca the “~““emeuts Presmibed far the
c”m~nnp, wbene~cr ~xmsibl”, substit”tiq their desiguation for
company in the c”n,m:unds.
166. A cmnpilny so dleplcl~ed RR to nmhe division into platoons
imp,rneticnblc is led by fbe cngt;rin as n single plntoon, bnt r”.
tains the designxti”” of con~iinny. me 1ientennnts ““d first
sergennt nesie in fire C”“tr”I ; tile Other Serfeants p*am? them-
selves in the firing line as skirmishers.
62 SCIIOOLcm TXE COMPANY.

CLOSE ORDER.
Rvles.
107. The guides Of *he ri&t and Icft,
or le:~Riny and rear.
,altoons, are me rigllt :,“a ieft, or ieadillg :,ml rear, guides.
rrslmtirelg, of the cou~pmy wheu it is in Jim or iu column
“f sqnads. Other &gli‘lPL: :,w! ill the line of lib dOSP~S.
I,, LlliltlKm ,ll~O~CI,

me ClOSerS to the other fhlk, the C:Llkaill cu”i”ml;ls: 1. File

c/oserson /e,t (r&v, %mk: 2. M/IRCH. The me c,osersaarr
through the eulumn; the eagtnin aud guides cllange.
In column Of sqo:Kls, each ran!5 preserves the alignment to-
,PJd me Side Of the guide.
160. Men in tilt? iiue of mu c,osLxx au not execnte me hll-
iugs or Arings.
Guidesand eulisted men in the line of *le c1oser‘s
executethe
manunl of illmlSduring the drill UllkSSsgecially excused,whl
they remain at mc order. During ceremoniesthey executeOil
movements.
150. In taking intervals and distances, unless otherwise di-
rected, the right :ud left guide*, at the first conlmand, place
tll~mmlves in the line of file closem and. with then~. take il
distance of 4 paces from the rear rank. In taking intermls, iIt
the conlmnlld mom*, the me dozers face to tile flnuli anI3 e:,c,,
ste,,s OR with the me nenrest him. 111 assembling the guides
nnd lik c,0sers resume their position(i in iine.
171. IU mOveWelltS executfd *im”lta”eO”S1J. by plntaons (as
platoons rig/it or platoons, column right), ~~li~toou le:ulers repeat
the preparatory commnnd (platoon right, etc.), a~~plimble to
their res,Ectire I,lnt”ons. The command Of execution is giren
hy the Clll,Mll only.
To Form the Cornpony.
172. At the sounding of the nssembiy the f1lxt Srrvxlul takes
&tion F ,,;,ees in *rout of wllrrr the ceuter Of the c<,nqlxny is
to be, *aces it. draws Yillm, :,nd Con1nmUds: FALL IN.
 SCm3OL OF THE COIdP*NY. 63

The right guide of the company places himself, facing to the

front, wbero the right of the eompar~y is to rest, and at such
point that the center of the company will be 6 ~nces from and
opposite the first sergeant; the squads form in their proper
pIaces on the left of the right guide, snperh~tended by the other
sergenuts, who the” take their poe3.
The first sergeant comrunds: REPORT. Remaining in posi-
tion nt the order, the squad leaders, in succession from the
right, salute nnil report: All present; or, PN’“ate(s) - nb-
sent. The first xr~eant dues “ot retur” the salutes of the
Sq”ad leaders: be the,, commanda: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, 3.
Order. 4. ARMS, faces abo”t, sx1”teS the CBD~“~“, reports: Sir,
al/ present OP accounted for, or the nnmw of the ““authorized
nbsentees, and, without comwn”d, takes his gost.
If the com~nny Call not be formed by squads, the first ser.
gennt eommnnds: 1. Ins,,ection, 2. ARMS. 3. Right shoulder, 4.
ARMS, and calls the ~‘011. Each ma”, “s his name iB call&
8nswers here and exec”trS order “rms. The sergeant the;
etfects the diViSion into sq”ads and reports the comnn”y as
wescribed above.
The captain pkxes himself 12 puces ill front Of the center of,
aud facing, the company in time to receive the report of the
first ser@nnt, whose salute he rot”ms, n”d then draws w,bor.
The lieutenants take their posts when the first sergeant has
EPOrkd ““d draw saber with the captain. The company, if not
Under arms, is formed in like manner omittiug reforo”ce to
arm*.
153. For the irlstruction of platoon lenders and guides, the
compa”!?, who” smnll, may be formed in single rank. I” this
formation close order movements only 8ro executed. The si”glo
rank execute8 all movementS n8 explained for the front ra”k of
B company. .
To Dismiss the Csmpmy.
154. Being in lille nt a halt, the captain directs the first
sergennt : Dismiss the company. The ot,icors fall o”t; the first
sergeant places himself fxed to the front, 3 IIBC~F. to the front
n”d 2 Dnces from the nwlrest dnn% of the comp,ny, salutes,
faces toward Opposite Bank of the compnny, 2nd commands: I,
Inspection. 2. ARMS. H:Port, 4. ARMS, 5. DISMISSED. (C. I. D. n.,
No. S.)
Alignments.
176. The alignnlmts are executrd as prescribed in the
School of tbo Sq”“d, the guide beiug estnblisbed instead of
64 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

the flank tile. Tbc rear-m”,‘ ma” of the tln”k file Beers his
head and esc8 to the front and col‘ers MS tile Irader.
At each nlignmeut the cngtain glaces himself iu prolousatian
of the line, ? w,ces from iud facing the dnnk toward which
the dress is made, icritics the nlig-nmenf, and commands:
,YD,?#,l
“““I.
Platoon lenders tnke a like rmsition mbm xyuired to verify
nlignmeuts.
Movements on the Fixed Pivot.

1763. Deing in line, to turn the comgnw: 1. Company righ!

(left), 2. MARCH. 3. Company, 4. HALT; or, 3. Forword, 4.
MARCH.
At the second command the right-dmk man in the front ran’s
faces to the right in “xmchi”g and marks time; the other front-
rank meu obliuue to the right, place themsehe~ abreast of the
pivot, and mnri< time; in the rem? rank the third man from the
right, followed in column by the 6eCo”d and first, moves Btmight
to the front until in rear of his front-rank ma”, when al: face
to the right in marching and mark time; the remnininp me” of
the rear rank move straight to the front 4 ~)nces, oblique to the
right, nlace thermekes “breast of the third man, cover their file
lenders, and mark time; the right guide steps back, takes yost
n” +llP RR-‘. ^..A
~/I,., il”U
._^_
UlilL~l‘C
I_^ Ai-”
uu1*.
The fol urth comrnmd is given when the last ma” i8 1 pnce.ia
rear of the new ,iue.
The command halt may be given at any time after the move
ment he~ins: onlv those hnlt who are in the new “osition.
Eneh of the others halts upon arriving on the line, ali&ls him-
self to the right. and executes fmnt without command.
17,. neing in line, to form c”,“mn of platoon*, or the
reverse: 1. Platoons right (left), 2. MARCH, 3. Com,mny, 4. HALT:
or, 3. Forward, 4. ,n*nrn. ‘a”-,-”
Executed by WC:b nliltoo,, “s described for the com,m”~.
Before forming line the capt:li” sees that the guides ~0” the
Oxnk toward wbieh the moveme”t is to be exeellted are cover-
ing. This is eRected by previously n”no”“cing the wide to
that flnnlt.
17% Being in line, to form column of SWads, or the reverse;
or, being in line of platoons, to form colnmn of platoms, or the
reverse: I. Squads right (feff), 2. MARCH: or, 1. Squads right
(left), 2. MARCH. 3. Cornpony. 4. HALT.
 SCHOOL OF THE coIdIp*?TY. 66

Executed by exh sqilsd as described in the Sch”“i “f the

Squad.
If the company or I)ii,t”“ns bc formed in iim toward the Side
of the die closers, they dart tbr”u@, the column and take
Posts in rear of the c”m~):my nt the serond command. If the
c01”m” of sQ,,ads be fanned from line, the die elosers take uosis
on the pivot tkmk, abreast of and 4 inches from the nearest
renlt. (C. I. Il. R., N”. %)
Movements on the Moving Pivot.
179. Being in line, to chncge direct,ian : 1. Right (Left) tw”,
2 MARCH. 3. Fwward. 4. MARCH.
Executed as dem’ikd i” the School of tbc Sqund, excent
that the men do not rlmce towmd the “mrcbiu~ flank and that
all take the f”,, stel, at the fourth command. ‘The right guide
18 the piYOt of me front rank. Each rear-rank mm obliques on
the snme ,qro”“d as Y- ll,D ,I,?2
-,- 7--_1-..
ruaurr.
180. Being in co1lumn of “latoom. to channe direction: 1.
Column right (left). 2. MARCH.-
At the first commnnd the leader of the leading plntoon corn.
mauds : Right turn. At the command marclr the lending platoon
turns to the right on movine ni~ot: its leader commands:
1. Forword, ,2. Makcx, 0n co~"plti& of’tbe turn. a& uht00ns
march squarely up to the tu, ming p&d of the leading~platoon
and turn at eommn nd of their leaders.
181. Being in co ,l”mn of sq”xd8, to cbanzrz dir&ion : 1. Co,-
““?” right (left), 2. MARC”.
At the second command the front rank of the le”dina sauad
turns to the right “n moving pivot as in the School. -of-the
Squad; the “t&r raulr~ i, without commmd, t”r” s”cce88ively
on the same ground and in a simil 8r manner.
188. Being in ~olunrn of squads,
the rewrse: 3. Platoons, column r;gf,t (left), 2. MARCif.
Executed by each &too” as described for the compa”~
183. Being in line, to form col”un of squads and
direction : 1. Squads right (left), column right (left), 2. A
or, 1. Right (Left) by squads, 2,. ,,,“,l”,,.
u”wu
In the first case the right 6quad initiates the column right 88
soan US it has comyleted the squoo ~,g”r.
In the second case, at the comm:,nd march, the right squad
marches forward: the remai”der of the comp;iny executes squndr
 SCHOOL OF THE CO~P*BY.

right, columnMt. and follcms the right squad. The right guide,
when he has pclstedhimSelf in front “f the right squad,takes
four short stem, then remmeothe full step; the right slluad
conforms.
184. Being in line, to farm line of &itOonS: 1. Squads right
(hff), p,otosns, co,umn right (left,, 2 MARCH; UT, 1. Platoons.
right (left) by squads. 2 MARCH.
Exeentcd by eirch phtoou 89 described for the company in
the preceding wu?vyaDb.
Facing OP Marching to the Rear.
I!G. Eking in line, ,i,lT? Of mt”onS, or in C”,U,ml of phtoons
or squads, to fact or marel, to the rear : 1. Squads right (left)
about, 2 MAW”; or, 1. Squads right (left) about, 2. MARCH.
3. Com~my, 4. XALT.
Executed by end, saund as described in the School of the
Squad.
If the company or p,ntoons be in column of swads, the file
ciosers turu ._I.. _...-.- the
51hont townrrl .~~ column.
.~ and tnlse their mStB:
rswh darts throueh
if in liue, c~~~~- the n&rest intehl betweed
squads. (C. I. D. R., No. 2.)
180. To march to the rear far n few paces: 1. About, 2
FACE. 8. Forward, 4. MARCH.
If in HI& tile guides &Ice tbemselres in the rear rank, now
the front rank; the file clasers, on facing about, maintain their
relative positions. No other morement is executed until the
line is faced to the Original front.
On Right (Left) fnto Line.
1_-..
SIT ROi”l:
-_.. in eo,l,mn Of platcmns or squads, to form ,hle on
right or left : 1. On rioht <left) into fine, 2 MARCH. 3. Company,
4. XALT, 5. FRONT. -
at the first command the leader Of the leading unit cmumands :
Right turn. The lendem nf the other units ~ommnud: Forward.
if at a halt. At the second command the leading unit t”m8 to
the right on moriug ,>irot. The command halt-is &en when
the leading unit hns advanced the desired distance in the new
directian. it hats ; its leader then commnnd~ : Right dress.
‘Fhm m:its in wnnp rontimw tn mxrcb straieht to the front:
b, when opposite the right of its plnce in l&e, executes righi
I nt the command of its leader; each is halted on the line
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPBNY.

at me commnnd Of its leader, who the” co”,mn”ds: Right dress.

All dress on the first unit in line.
If exewted in donhlr ti”~, the leading squad marches in
double tinre Until hlkd.
Front tnto Line.
188. Being in ~“I”,II,, of ,~i;rtoo,,s or sq,,ads, t” form line to
the front: 1. Right (Left) front into /ine, 2. MARCH, 3. Com,mny,
4. “*LT. 5. FRONT.
At the first ~“r”“m”d me leaders Of the ““its in rear Of
the lendiug one comlw~~d: Right oblique. If at B halt, the
leilder “f me kimng ““it co”l”l”“ds: Farword. At the seeuurl
co”lmn,,d the lending unit “,OIc% stlxigllt for,,‘ard: the mill’
units oblique as iudicnted. The conmmud ho/t is given when
the lending unit has ndr:t”eed the desired diatanee: it hnlts: its
lender the” co”“nn”ds: Left dress. Each “f the rear ““its.
when “~,mite its ~,l;,ce in line, resnme~ the original direction
at the command of its lender: ench is halted on the line at the
co”mla”d “f its leader. mh, the” commands: Left dress. Al,
dress “n the first ““it in Ifne.
180. Being in eoiunm of squads t” form column of platoons,
“I‘ being in li”e Of oiatoons, to *mm tile Conlpany in line:
1. Platoons. right (left) front into line. 2. MARCH, 3. Company,
4. HALT. 5. FRONT.
Executed by eilch Pht”“” “8 described for the company. I”
forming the compnny in line, the dress is on the left squad of
the left p,iltoon. If f”r”li”g col”m” of platoons. p,,lntoon leader*
rerify the alignment before taking their posts: the captain com-
“nl”dS front Wht2, the ali@mlents have been verilkd.
When front into line is executed in double time the e”mmn”ds
for halt,“&. a”d “li@“g “re omitt6d arrd the guide ,is towar~d
the side of the first ““it io line.
AT EASE AX0 ROUTE STEP.
190. The COlUrn” Of squads is the h”ta”“l eolum” Of route.
but route step ““d at e(1.v are nyDlic;ible to any marchiug
fown:3ti”n~
191. To mnrch at route step: 1. Route step, 2. MARCH.
Snbers are carried at will 01‘ in the scabbard: the me” carry
their pieces nt will. keelliu~ the I”,lzzles deviltell : the” ill_P 1101
rewired to pi-eserre siienci, nor to Iwep~tici i& ~mrikier%~
corer and ~“‘eserre tlleir disti,“ce. If halted fro”, r”“te ste,,,
the men Stand at rest.
58 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

10% To march at ease: 1. At ease, 2. MARC",

The cornpuny marches 11s in route step r*cw~t that silence is
preserved ; when halted, mc “ltw ren,:,in d ease.
19% Marching at route step or at ease: 1~. Company, 2. AT-
TENTION.
St tlw mmnx~nrl attention tlw pieces are brought to the r&W
shouldIs* nnd the cadlenccd stew) in quick time is resumed.
TO DIMINISH THE FRDNT OF A COLUMN OF SQUADS.
194. Bring in co,,mu, UC squntls: 1. Right (,eft, by twoa.
2. MARCH.
At the commllnd march all files except tile two right files of
the lending squad exeente in place halt: the two left files of the
leading squad Oblique t” the right when discn~n~ed nnd follow
the right files at the shortest practicable distunce. The remxining
squads follow s”we~si~ely in like manner. CC. I. U. R., NO. 2.)
1RTr. Brine in column “f sowada or twos: 1. Right (left) by
file. 2. MARCH.
At the commnnd march, a11 files execute in @me halt except
t,,e right file of the leading two or S”““d. The left fde or files
“I me lending twu “P snnsld ~_~~~~~~ oblique successively to the right
when disenmzed nnd 1 each follows me me on its right at the
shortest yrxticable disturree. The remaining twos or squads
follow successively in like manner. (C. 1. D. R., No. 2.)
196. Being in column of files or twos, to form alum” of
squads: or, being in eol”mn “f files, to farm c”l”“ln “f twos: 1.
Squads (Twos). right (/eft) front into line, 2. MARCH.
At the command march, the leading file or files halt. The
remninder of the squad, m,tw”, obliques t” the right -and halts
OR line with the leading file or tiles. The remaining squads
or twos dose “II and s,,c~esPiPely *or,* in rear Of me first in
like n~~nner.
The movement descrihecl in this pnmgmph mill be ordered
right or left, so 8s to restore tt~e files to their normal relative
positions in ttlc tvo “P sonil.
197. The mo\ wnents wescribed in the three &meedi”~ ~“r:,-
rrtinhs nre dificnlt “f eremtion nt nttention Blld llnoe no vnlut!
as iisCiglina~p eaerrises.
i9S. Marching by twos or files c”” not be executed WithoUt
swions delnp nnd mnste of rend RPWP. Ewl‘y reasonnble w’e-
rnntion will be taken to obviate the necessity for these form”-
tions.
 SCIIOOL OF THE CmmANY. 59

ESTEh’DED OKDEI:

Rules for Deployment.

199. The command guide right (Mt or center) indicntes the
base wwatl for the deplo~mcnt ; if in lhie it designates the actua,
right (left or center) sqnntl; if in cdnmn the command guide
right (left) designates tlw lending s~nx,, ;r,,d the comlnan,~
guide center (le~ignatcs the center squna after the de$oyment
is cmu~~leted, the guide is center without connmnd, unless “tber-
wise ordered.
200. At the prepnrotory c”“““n”d for forming S,<imliSh
line, from either column of fiqw~ds or Me, cacb sqmd lender
(excrut the lender of the bnse squad, when his sqwild does not
ndvnnce), cauti”“~ his squad, follow me or by the right (left,
flank, as the cue nny be; “t the command march. he stegs in
front of his wund and lends it to its place in line.
201. Having given the command for forming 8khmish line,
the captain, if necessary, indicates to the corpxal of the b*sr
squad the wint “o v,hich the squad is to m”rch; the corpora1
habitunlly lo”Bs to the cnl~tain for such directions.
202. The base squad is deployed as SCM,,,“s it has soi?icient
interval. The other squads “r” deployed as they urrive on the
geuernl line; encB corporal halts in his phce In line nnd Toni-
mands or signals, a8 skirmishers: the squad deploys and halts
abreast of him.
If tilcticnl c”mideratiom demand it, the squad is deployed
before mrivblg on the line.
ZOO. Deployed lines preeerr-e a general alignment townrd the
guide. Within their rengectivc fronts, indiridu:cls or “nits
“mreh so as best t” scc”rc cover or to fxilitnle t,he ndmnee.
but the gcnenl ““d orderly pr”grcss “f the whole is gnmmoont.
On halliug, :I dqloyed line f:,c”a to th” front (direction of
the enally) in a11 ci,ses ““d ,UkS adlrmtnge “f cover, the men
Isine d”W” if “ec”ssill‘J‘.
204. The rom~anny in skil.misb line ndvunces, halts, moves by
the flank, or to the P~CIII,obliques, res,,,ucs the direct march, ,lasses
from quick to double time and Ih” reverse by the a:m” conmnnds
Snd ill a similar nlnnner ns ln CIOHC order; if nt a halt, the
m”~ement by the Rr,nk or to the rear is esrcntcd hy the SR,,I~
ron”r”mds as when IunPching. Com+wny right (left, half right,
60 ScaooL OF TIE COHPANY.

huff left) is executed as eaninined for the front mnk, skirmish

interlx,s being mni”t:\i”ed.
zo5. A Imtoon or other ,mt Of the comlmny is deployed 3”d
marched in the same nvinner as the rompan~. substituting in
the c”“mn”ds, plotaa” ~ddetadment. etc.) for mmpmy.
ceploJvnents.

206. ~Being in line. to for,” skirmish me to the *rant: 1.

As skirmishers. guide right (left or center). 2. MARCH.
If marching, tlrc eorporn, Of the base sqnod “IOreS strnigllt to
the *rant; when that sqnnn has ndunnced th? deSired distnnce.
the cnptnin c”“l”lX”d8: 1. Cornpony, 2. XALT. If me gnid0 be
right (left), the other cor~mxk more to the left (right) front,
and, in SllCCeSSi”” fr”“, t,ic base. ,llnCe their f?xlullds 0” the line;
if the guide be ce,,+er. the other cor~oralfi IOOW to the right or
left front, ace”rdin~ as they BPS on the rigllt or left Of the center
sq”zld, ““d in SnCCeSSi”,, from the center squad place their
squads on the line.
If at a halt, the Lln*e squad is deDl”yed without sdvancing:
me other 8q”RdS “my bl! c”“d”eted tu their *r”Der Place* by the
flank ; interior sqnnds ~may be? “~“Ved when Rqnads “l0re distant
from the b;m hare ~nined comfortnble marching distxnce.
20,. Being in r",""," of cqnndn, to form Bltirmish line to the
front: 3. As skirmishers, guide right (left or ~centerl, 2. MARCH.
If m~~rchtng. the corporal of tie bxse s~~ild deploys it and
“IOreS *traig,,t to the front; if at n hIlIt, he deplop his squad
without advancing. If the guide be right [left), tile oltw COP-
pmtls move to the left (right) front, and. in succc6~ion from the
bna‘?, phlce their sq”:lds on the line; if the goirlc Is2 renter. Lhe
c”r~“rEl18 in front Of the center squad m”Ve to the rildlt (if at a
halt, tD the right rear), the cor~)orak in rear of the center squad
mow to the left front, and each, in succession from the base,
plnces his squad on the line.
The colnmn of twos or files is deployed by the 88me commands
and in like mnnner.
208. The compnny in linr or in mlnmn of squnds may be
deployed in an oblique direction by the same commands. The
enptni,, poi”ts “nt the desired direction; the c”r,‘“ral of the
&me squad I”“,-es in the direction indic:lted; the “ther c”r,~“rnls
eonfarm.
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. El

208. To form skirmish 1iue to mc Rank or renr the line or

the column of x,,,i,ds is turned by s,rrads to the dank or rear
and then deployed. as described.
210. The i”tetTnls betwM5” “le” nre incrensed “P decreased
88 described in tbe School of tile Squad. adding to the wqxwn-
tory c”mmand, guide right (left or center) if necessary.

The Assembly.
211. The captain takes his Ilost in front of, or dlesignntes,
the elc”lmt 0” which thlc C”“l(IA”y is to ase2nlhie nod eom~
man&: 1. Assemble, 2. MARCH.
If in skirmish line the me” mol‘e promptly toward the desig-
nated point and the r”m,~i1,~y is re-formed in line. If assemble3
by ,,lat”““s, these are condocted to the desigwated Imint by
platoon leadem, and the com~nny is reformed in lb,“.
Platoons ““,y be nssembled by the conmltmd: 1. Platoons.
.wmb/e. 2. MARC”.
Executed by encb Dint”“” as deexribed for the company.
One or “lore platoons may be nssernbled by tbe command:
1. Such platoon(s). msemb,e, 2. MARC”.
Executed by the designated ~>lnt”on or platoam as dascribs,
for the cormany.
The Advance.

212. The ad,‘n”ce of n company into n” e”!+WX,“?“t (nhether

for attack or defense) is c”“ducted in close order, Dreferably
~olnmn of wnds, ~mtil the pmbnbilit~g of encountering hostile
Bre makes it ndrimble to deploy. After deployment, and before
openinr~ fire, the ndrance of Lb” c”ml)a”y “my be contimti b,
skirmi& line or other s”i+able formnti”“. denendiog upan cir-
enmstnncrs. The ndr;mce may often b” facilitated, or better
ndrznta~~ tnken of co\-er, or Iosse8 reduced by the em,,loyment
of the phtoon or squad columns UP by the use of n succession of
thin lines. The selection of ,l,e methail to ,,i‘ :,sw, is m;,dr by
the cn,,tain or mn,“r, the choice dqmrding- ,I,,“” conditions C,P,S.
ing during the progress of the ndvance. If the deployment is
found to be ~nwnatnre. it mill ~:ewxall~ be best to :rs~n,b,e the
compnny and emceed in cl”86 order.
P.?tmls are used to provide the necessary securitp againfit
*“.-pl3Se.
 SCHOOL OF THE CcmPBNY.

213. Being in skirmish line: 1. Platoon columns, 2. MARCH.

The platoon leaders move f”rwnrd tbrou~b the center of their
respective platoons; merl to the right of the plntoon leader
march to the left and follow hi”, in tile; those to t,he left march
in like mnnner to the right; each platoon irader U,LIR conducts
the march of his platoun in double columns “f files; pkltoon
guides follow in rear of their rcs,,ectire #ltoons to insure
prompt and orderly execution of the advance.
214. Being in skirmish line: 1. Squrrd columns, 2. MARCH.
En& squad lender moves to the front; the members of each
squad oblique toward nnd follow their squad leader in single
file at easy “mrchiug distnnces.
21.5. Platoon co,“mns are Prodtubly use,, where the ground is
so dit,ic”lt or corer so limited as to make it desirable to t&e
advantnge of tile fern fnror:d,le routes; no two ~lato”n8 should
mnreh within the area of burst “f a single shrapnel.’ Squad
columns are of value princiwiiy in facilitating the advance over
roueh or brush-n’own eround: they afford no material advantage
in &curing co&. -
216. TO deploy pintoon or squad coinmns: 1. As skirmishers,
2 MdRCH.
f3kirmishers move to the right or left front and s~~ccessively
place thornselves in their origin** positions an the line.
2317. Being in plntoon or squad rohmms: 1. Assembb, 2.
MARCH.
‘The plntoon or squad leaders signal assemble. The n,en of
each platoon or sqnnd, BS the rn8e mny be, advance and, moving
to the right and left, take their I)L’“~c,’ ,,laces in line, eaeb Unit
nssembling on the lcadirig “lenrent of tbe colnmn and re-forming
in line. The platoon or sqnnd lexders condwt~ their units
toward the elenwnt “I‘ ,,“iTlt indicated by t,h,? ca,knin, and t”
their places in line; the company is reformed in line.
218. Heing in skirmish lint, to ndrnnc~ by :I s~~ceession of
thin lines: 1. (Such numbers), forward. 2. MARCH.
The captain points out in advance the selected position in
front of the line ocr”‘Gd. The designnted number of each
e,~und moves to the front; the line thus formed rx”scrrm the
“rig-inn1 intcrrn,s as uczlr,y ns pmctirnble: when this line IIn*
advanced n auitnble distanca C~enerally from 100 t” 250 y’lrds,

t Onlinerilg about 20 ynrna wide

 ScHOOL OF THE 00l,w*BY. 63

dewndinfi ,I,~“,, the terrain ;,nd the chnrncter of the hostile

fire), R second is sent forward by similnr commands, und so
on nt irregular diatmrces nntil the mhoie line has adranced.
Upon arriving at the indicnted ~msiti”n, the first line is b;llted.
Successire lines, np”” nrri,+ng, hiiit “11 line vith the first and
the men take their proper places in thr skirmish line.
Owlinnrily each he is wnde up of oue mm arr squad aud the
men of a squad we salt farmnrd in order from right to left as
deWn’ed. ‘I-be first line is led by the slat”“” leader of tQe right
platoon, the semnd bx. the mid” of the rieht ulatoon. nnd so on
in order from right to left:
The advance is conductell in quick time unless conditions de
““and a *astn mit.
The compnny hnvillg nrrired nt the indicated gositian, n f”r‘-
t&r “dranee by the same “leans “my be ndvisable.
210. The ad\-awe in x sucressiw of thin liues is used to
CTOSS B wide stretch swe,,t, or likely t” be swept, by artillery
Iire or heavy’, long-range ride tit‘” which can not ~rotitubly be
returned. Its pur~wse is the huiiding np of n strong skirrnisb
line prepnratory to ctlgaging in II fme fight. This method of
adrancing r”s,,l,s in mrious (th”uFb temmxu’y) l”8s of control
over tile c0*,,11111y. Its iidKt”tRge lies in aa t-act tmt it omrf3
a less definite target, hence is less likely to draw fire.
220. ‘The :,,,o\r :,I’<> rnggestions. Other ““d Iletter formi,-
tions may he dcriretl to fit ,)i,rticoliw wises. The best formation
is the on” which ndvnnces the li”” fnrthcst with the least loss
Of men, ti,,,e. :,nrl C”“tl’“,.

The Fire Attack.

221. The pri”ciples ~CrrPrnill g tk ai,rance Of the fring line
in attnck
attnc,< are
i,re cansider~~
cansider~, in the School
Scllonl of tb”
t,x! nsttnlion.
nnttn,ion.
When it berom~s im,ir:,ctim!i,e for the co ,111 mny to ndvanee
as a nhole by ordinary urwmg, it admncrs by rushes.
222. IGAng in sl<ir”,ish he: 1. By pfbxln (two platoons,
swnd, four me,,, ~to. ,, from the riglit (left). a. RUSH.
The pl:,tam lender 01, the indicated &ml; carefully nrrange~
the details for i, ,,r”,n,,t and vi’orms execution of the Ruth
and puts it into eff’ect as s”on as nracticabla. If necessary. he
desigmtes the leader for the indicated faction. Wbrn wbont to
rush, he cnnsrs the “,rn of the fri,cti”” to cease firing nnd to
hold t~2eluselves dat, but in rnndiueas to spring forwmd in-
04 SCmwL OF THE CODIPANY.

mntly. The leader of the rushdat the signa of the PIntoo”

leader, if the hitter he not the lender of the rush) e”mm:“lds:
Follow me, and, running at top speed, lends the fracti”” to the
nem me, ~vherc he haits it and cnn~es it to we” fire. The
leader of the rush selects the “es liue if it has not bee” PE
&udy designated.
The first frnctio” ha~i”g established itself “11 the new line,
the next like fmctim is ser,t forwnrd by its ~lataon leader,
without further com”,n”d of the ca,~k,i”, a”,~ 8” 0”. s”ccrS~ivdY,
Until the entire C”“1,El”~ is 0” the line eshhlished b,T the first
l.“Sh.
If more than one plntoon is to join in one rush, the junior
&,twrn lender co”for”rs to the ncti”” “f the ~e”iOl’.
A part “f the line ha,-i”g “dmnced, the cn~tni” “W’ i”“~~:lSe
01) decrease the size Of the fractions to C”“lplete the “,o”ement.
823. When the CO”I~a”y flx”lS a \wl‘t Of the firm me, the
rue, Of the eOn,,ln”y “S il whole is conducted by the CRlltBi”, as
described for a ~,,atoo” in the preceding ,mn~rWh. The CBP
tnin le:tds the rush; phtoon lenders lead their res~lective @a-
tnonu; ~htoon guides follow the line to insure prompt and
orderly execution of the ndrxnee.
224. When the foregoing method of rushing, by yunuing,
becomes impraeticahle, nny method of advance that bmgs the
olttlrck closer to the enemy. such as crawling, should be employed.
FOP regulations goreming the cha’ge. see gar”gmphS 318
and 319.
The compclny in support.
!Eb5. To enable it to follow or reach the firiug line, the 8”~
port adopts suitable for”l:ltio”S, foll”Wi”g me rxineims ex-
,,,ai”ed in pnragrs,?hs 21%21s.
The SU”“OT~ sho,,,d be kept assewbled ~8 long “8 j)PBCtiCXbk.
I ~~~~~.~..“,,,,“rrrr,r,r)
. . * iL__ illla.sb
.~,.A-,.” tllI” h-l.4
. . . . . . it;I f”T
If after aep1oying n Ill,-,,ri,“le
mn,e time in dose for”1;7ti”“.
~~~~ it Sh”“ld be renssenhkd. It _I
is
redep,loyed whe,, “eccss”W.
226. The morements of the SWI,~? as a whole xud the
di8,xltch of re e”forre”E,rtg fro”, it t” the iirillg line are CO”-
trolle@ h” +h~ r
A r’ ,&&,,$:‘df l.zsfi than one ,,,:,to”” hns little i”U”&!l!
and w,,, ,272L^ ,...^:,lnA
“r: >I, YIUCY ..rha,la.
1yl.rl.L .\L.,,,. ,,.
n,.actie&,e.
The CnDtni” Of n co”~,xl”y ii , sn,,,,ort is mmtantly on the
alert for the ronjar’s eig:nals or commands.
 SCHOOL "F THE COl6PANY. 66

225. h reenforcenwnt sent to the firing line ,joius it deployed

as skirmishers. The leader of the reenfovcemeot 1~lace8 it in &,I
intervnl ill the line, if 011e exists. owl conmmnds it thereafter
xs n “nit. If no such mitable interrnl exists. the reenforer-
malt is nd~~nced vith incre:~sed interrals between skirnlishers:
exh ma,, “CCUII~S thn ne;>resf intel’~aI in the firing line, and
each then obeys the urders of the nearest squad leader and
platoon leader.
228. A reenfarcement joins the firing line as quickly as DOS-
sit&z without exhnustirrg the men.
228. The origiunl ~ilatoon division of the con,,xmics in the
tiring line shonld be nmiutained aud should not he broken ug by
the mingling Of recnforcenlents.
Upon joining the firing line, odirers and sergeants nccompnny-
ing n reenforcement take orer the duties of others of like grade
who hare bee” disabled, or distrihnte themselres so as best to
exert2ise their normal functions. Condition will vary and no
rnles cnn be prescribed. It is essential that nil assist in master-
ing the increasing difficulties of contrpl.

The Company Acting Alone.

230. 1” general, the canllianp, rT-hc” acting alone. is employed

nccordiny to 11~: ~,rinci!~ks ;~,,,dicahle to the h;,tl:~li,xr RC, i,,r:
alone; tile eaptnin c”I,I1”ys ,k,t”““S as the ““ljor C”qJI”J.’ s”“l-
[xmies, “mking due :,IIo~w,,ce for tllc difference in strength.
The 8upwr1
8”,1,,“1.1 may
“My he smaller
snx,,,er in Dro~oL’liOn
,~I’“~“L’liO” or
“I‘ luliy
“my he dis-die
,,enred with.
231. The company must he well poteeted ngninst surprise.
comOi,t Ixltl’old 0” t,,LI “rinks BE s,,eci:illg inlportnnt. Each
lcader of n fk~nk pl:itoou details it win lo watch for the signals
of the D:l+r”l or ~ntrols 0” his &in,<.

ITI~I<.
23”. Ordinarily ,iiWCS :\I‘c I,l:l<ltYl nn,, rltw n”“ll”“i, ion is
issuedbr!forethe coin~miyd~p!o?-s for cornbi~t.
lo ~cJos~ urdrr the con~pi~ng
esecntrs the *kings :il llic cow
miind of the ci~~tain,ml10joists himself in rmr of the ~enkr “I(.
tile conlpnny.
1~s”zlly lfk? firings in C,“Seorder consist of saluting roih?ys
only.
““liii”..~17-b
36 scaooL OF THE COMPANY.
233. when the conr~any is derdoyed, the 1nen execute the
firings at the c~nnnantl of their platoon lwders; the latter give
such eon,n,an,,s ns are necessary to curry out the c:wt;~i”‘s
tlirectims, nnrl, from” time to time, ;ald swb fwther commands
:,s are ner.essary to Continue, correct. and control the fire
ordered.
~84. TIE voice is ~UIIPP:~I~~ in:~kwtlte for giving commands
during fire and must be re~lacrd by signnls of such chnrncter
that proper fire direction nnd control is nsSWX?d. TO ~t~~;LCt
attention, signals must us,,:11,y bc preceded b,” the whistle wnn!
(short blast). A f*;xtion of the firing li*re *bout to r”sh shoold,
if practicable, avoid using the long bhmt sign01 0s R” aicl to
cm86 Bring. Otlieers nnd men behind the dring line CUl not
ordiniirily move freely :dong the line, but must depend on
lnutua, wntchfulness and the gr”!~r “Se “f the DESCribed Sig-
nnls. .4ll should pst themselves 80 as to see their immediate
sul)eriors and s”bordin;lteB.
255. the musicinns assist the captain by observing the
enemy, the target, and the fire effect, by trunsmitting commnnds
or signals, and by watching for signals.
aSO. Firing with blnrlk cnrtridges at n” outlined or FVFB-
sented enemy “t distnnces less than 100 yu’ds is prohibitwl.
237. The e&et of fire “ml the tnduence of the ground in
relation thereto, and the individual ““d collective instruetioll
in marksmnnship, are treated in the Smnll-Arms Firing M”“u”1.

Range*.
ass. RW ~ouv~nience of refwence ranges are dassified as
f”ll”ws :
0 to 600 ynx,s, C,“S!? rnnge.
600 lo 1,200 yards, effective range.
1,200 to 2,000 yards. long range.
2,000 yards an,, “XP, diSta”t range.
239. the di;tnncr to the target must be determined “s BCCU-
rntely ns possible n”d the sights set accordingly. Aside from
training and morale, this is the mwt important single fxetor 1”
securing effective fire at the longer mnges.
MO. Excegt in n delibwxtely wepnred defensive pusitio”,
the most aw”r”te il”d o”ly pmcticable method of determining
the range will generally be to take the me”” of SPVL?L‘BIeSti-
mlltes.
 SCBOOL OF THE COX’PBNP. 67

Five or six ofllrers or men, selected from the most nccurate

estimntor~ it, t,,c ~.,““p:l”~. “lx designnted ilS range e*tin!.tor*
nnd xw w?dally twined in cstimnting distnnces.
Whenever “ecess”ry and ymctierrble, the enytni” assembles
the range cstimetors, points out the target to them, ““d ndoyts
the mean of their cstimnles. Tbr rnnjie estimators then take
their cust”mnry posts.
(C. I. n. n., N”. I?.)
C/asses of Firing.
241. Yolley firing has limited npplicatiun. In defense it mny
be used in the early sta:‘cs of the “etiun if the enemy presents
x large, compact target. It may be ns~d by troops executing:
rire of position. When tbe gro”nd near the target is such that
the strike of bull&~ can be seen frmn the firing line, ranging
uolleye may be used to correct the sight setting.
I” cornbut, volley firing is exwnted babit”nlly by platoon.
243. Fire at wi,, is the class of fire normnlly em,Myed in
nttaek or defense.
24% Clip fire has limited a~~llcntion. It is principelly used:
1. In the early stages of combat, to steady the men by babitu-
atina them to brief pnuses in firing. 2. To produce ” short
burst Of fire.
TIE Target.
24-k Ordinarily the major will “sir” tu the company 80
objective in ~ttaek d sector in defense: the c”“qmny’s tor@t
will lie within the limits so nssigned. I” the choice of target,
taetienl considerntions are pnnnount ; the nearest hostile troops
within the objective or sector will thus be the US”“, txrget.
This will ordinnrily be the hostile firing line: troops in rear
are ordinnrily proper targets for artillery. mnehine guns, 0~1,at
times, inf:~ntry employing tire of position.
Ch;!n~c of tnraet should not be made without excellent reaso”s
therefur. such as tbe sndden n,,,~“rnnce of hostile troo1)s under
renditions wbieb ““dre them more to be feared than the troogs
e”“pPiSi”g the for,ncr target.
!245. The distribution of fire over the entire farget is of
Sfm!i;,l ir”D”rtn”ee.
The cnptoin nllots n part of the target to each &&on, or
each platoon lender takes RS his txrget that part which come-
spends to bis pofiition in the cornyang. Men are so instmcted
es SCHOOL
OF THE CmlPBNY.
that each fires on that part of the tnrget which is directly
opposite him.
246. A11 pnrts of the target are e~uxily importilnt. Care
must be exercisr,, thnt thr 1nrn d” not slight its less YiSiblP
pmts. A S&i”” of the target not COYered by tire represents a
number of the enemy perlnitted to tire eDmy nnd effectivelx.
24,. If the target al” not be seen With the naked eye, pmoon
leaders select an objcut in front of or behind it. designate this as
the ttimino tw17ef. ;md direct a sight setting which mill carry
the cone of fir; into the tnwet.
(C. 1. u. IL, NO.17.)
Fire Direction.
!M*. When the eompnny is large enough to he divided intp
platwns, it is impractienhle for the eaptnin t” command it
directly in combat. “is ediciency io managing the firing line
is measured by his ability to enforce his will tbro”gb the pl:ltOO”
leaders. Having ihdicnted clearly what be desires them to do, he
avoids interfering except to correct serious errors or omissions.
~49. The cngtai” directs the fire of the corn~ny or of desig-
““ted glntoom. He designates the target, and, when Inlrticable,
a,,ots a part of the target to mcb ylatuon. Before beginnin::
the tire action be dctcrmines the r;l”~e, ““““““UPS the Sight
setting, and indicxtcs the chms of fire to be wlploy?d and the
time t” upen fire. ‘rhrrenfter, he “hsrrvcs the fire effect, COP
r&s muterinl errors in sight setting. prevents mbn”StiO” Of
me n”m”“iti”” supply, and Giwes the ciistribution of such
extra iI”1 n,,, nitiun as “lily he rrccire,, fr”“, the reiw.
Fire Control.
!ZsO. In combnt tbi: ~,,ntoo” is the fire “nit. I<-~““1 2” to 35
rides nrr as many as one kader van wntrul elfertivclr.
251. EU‘h p,ntoon ,e;n,er p”tY into executi”” the c”“lmll”ds
or directions of the captai”, kiavi”&T first tnkc” swb p’ec;lntk~“s
to insure corrw:t sight settin:: an,, <:,ear lk!scriptian Of the tirrget
or aiming target i,s the situi~tion permits or reqnirrs; there:,fter.
he gires such additionnl cormnrrnds or tlircxtiuns ns are news-
siwy to exnct corn,,,iunce wit,, the I;Ipt:,i”‘s Will. He corrL=cts
the Sight setting when necesswy. HI2 designates :in ni*ning
target when the tnrget cm not he seen with the naked eye.
(C. I. u. A?., NO. 17.)
 SCHOOL OF THE COrfIP*NY,
252. In general, platoon leaders obserre the target and the
effect of their fire mrd are on the alert fur the eantain’s co”,-
manrluor signala; they ObSerYe
““d regulate the. rnte Of fire.
The platoon guides watch the Bring line and check erery breach
of tire di%i:ipli”e. Squad leaders tr;,nw,it co,,,m:,nds and sigmls
when “‘mssary, obverre the conduct of their squads and abate
excitement, nssrst in enforcing tire discipline and tnrticipate in
the firine.
235. The best troow are those that submit ,o,,gest to iire
Control. Loss of control is an eril which robs success of its
&Text& Rsults. To nroid or delay such loss sbonld be the con-
*tant air” “f a,,.
Fire control impI,lies the ability to ston Bring, change the
sight Setting and target, and rrs~me :I well directed tire.

I Fire Discipline.
254. “ Fire discipline imlaiies, besides a habit of obedience, a
COntI’Ol Of the rifle by the soldier, the result of training, which
will enable him in :iction to nmkc hits instmd of misses. It
e”lbl.3~~~ tilting adwntnge “f lbe groond: CRI’C in setting the
Right and delivery of fire: constnnt :,ttc,,tion to the orders ,,f
the leaderr, nrld cnrrful obsrrmtiun of the enm,y: on inmense
Of fire ~.lle” the t:rreet is fnrorable, and n verbatim, of fire ,.&&
the enemy disnmenrs; economy of ammunitiou.” (smn,,-.~r,us
FirilL. Aln”“al~,
In combat, shots which ~rnze the rncn~g‘s trenc,, or ,,ositi,,,,
and thus reduce the efiectireness of his tire ,,a,.e the a~qm,xi-
IKIt‘! 1’81113 of hits; Sllcb ShOtS only, or nctun, hits, c”r,trib”tc
toward IIre Supel’iol’it~.
hire diSCiplille inlplk?s that, in n firhE line without lenders
65wh “XI” retzd”S his pwsence of wind and directs ebective fir;
upon the proper t:ir,ol?t.
233. TO crente a correct n,>,ireci;lti”” Of the I’eQ”il.C”,e”ts Of
til’u <‘isCi,lli”C, “ieli :>l‘u ta”ght thnt th,! r;,tr r,f fire shonld be :,s
raPid as is cO”SiSte”t with :Icc”raie aiming: that the rate Will
de,xm, “I)“” Ihe risibility, proximity; and size Of t,ie tnrgct ; an,1
that the IW~E~ rate mill ordinarily Suggest itself to ench trained
Win, wnally renc+riug cautions or conmx~nds unncccs8~~‘y.
I” inttack the h&W!st rilte of fire is enr,,loyed at the halt vre-
c(ldin,o tlw ;~ssnnlt. and in pursuing fire.
70 SCHOOL OF THE COHPALNY.

250. In an ndrance by mshes, leaders of troow in firing PO-

sitions are responsible for the delivery of heavy fire to cover
the ndrance of each rushing fmction. ‘Troops are trained to
change slightly the direction of tire so as not to endanger;the
f,an,<s of advanced Dortions of the firing Ihe.
207. I” defense, when the target disappears behind COP**, .
pk,toon leaders~suspend Bre, prepare their nlatoons to fire upon
the pint where it is expected to reappear, and greet its re-
BppeBranCe i”Stn”tly with vigorous tire.
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.

258. The battalion being purely n tactical ““it, tbn_ __“.._

nninrva _
duties al’t2 L”‘i”M~ily those “f a” illstructor in drill 81113tactic*
and of a tactical commander. He is respormible *or the the”-
retical a”d practical training of the battalion. He supxvises
the tmi”i”Y Of the eomonnies of the hn~tilliml with n view to
imuring tl;e th”r”“gh”e;s ria un~formitv-o-ifhe k instruction.
In the instructi&of the battnlion a8 ;~‘wbol~, his efforts will
be directed chiefly to tbc derekqment of tiletic:,, &iiciency, de.
voting only such time to the mechn”ism of drill a”d to the
ceremonies as msm he nece*sarv in order to IIISIIPP precision,
SnlartmaS, and pr&er control. ”
259. The movements exPlained herei,, are on the basis of a
battalion of four companies; they may bc exeated by a bat-
tulio” of two or more comnanies. not, ~rewaing six.
zoo. me eompnnies are generally arm”., Iced from rieht to
~~ ..D_. ._
left mcording to the ~,“k of the CB”tili”S wesei,t nt tile forma-
tion. The arra”gement of the compnnies may be varied by the
major or higher commnnder.
After the battnlio” is formed, no cognion”ce is taken of the
re,:,+ire ardor of the companies.
201. In whatever directi”” the battalion faces, the companies
are designated “umericnlly from right to left in line, and from
bend to rear in co1um”. first cornpony. second company, etc.
‘The terms right n”d left anply to actual right and left as the
line faces; if the ikb”“t by squads be executed when in line. the
right compnny becomes the left compnny aud the right e&r
becomes the left center Conqmny.
The dlesignxtian center compnny indicates the right center or
the wAna center mmpany according as the number of CO,,,.
IXl”k3 is era, or Odd.
262. The hnnd and other special units, when attached to the
buttxlio”. take the 6::“~ n”st with res”~?t to it as if it were the
nearrst datta1ion i;hOW” I” ime IT.
 12 ScaooL OF THE BATT*LION.

CLOSE ORDER.

263. mptnins repent such wepamtory commnnds its are to

he immediately executed by their comwnies, as forward, squads
right, etc. ; the men execute the commnnds march, halt, etc., if
np~~lyi*~g to their companies, when given by the major. In

UNE,(COS.in Lane)
T’
2;
-5 1s I-
/UNE.. COMPANIES.(COS.i”
COiLOfsqd5j

b”
YLWW

$
3
s
:.L 1
‘YE BATTALION.
Plate /II. Muorl/*,T3JTh//rrc,.. c.“,OEme O,ilCTNN., 7°CCoLOX-a
NyMLilRL5 PRE “,ITASEB o/I INTEFI”IILS v.2mLcL5.
Dmvmentselccute,~ill route step or :rt ells?the W,iklillS wient
the rom,u;,ndof exeL!nti”ll,if nec~ssilry. C’nptninsCl<,
not repcat
the major’s commandsio sxecnting thr mannnl of :W*us,nor
those sYxmnxndS Which are not essentialto me execution Of a
,norement by Weir com,x,nies. 1,s column of squads, first corn-
pan,‘, squads right, etc.
 SCHOOL OF mu3 B*LTT*IION. 73

In giring commamTs or Ca”timS cnk,tnins may prefix the

LmxEr letter deSigll;lti”nS “f their c”luyiulies, as A Cornpony,
HALT: B Company, squads right, etc.
264. At the command guide center (right or ,eff), captains
command: Guide right or left, acconling to the gositions of their
eomganies. Guide center d&mates tile left guide of the center
cuIwxmy.
28.5. wlleu me Coml)nnies are to be dressed, captnins pblce
themselves on tllnt flank toward which the dress is to be made,
ns fOllO,Vf3 :
The battalion in line: Beside the gniile (or the flank file of the
front rnnk, if the C”ilh? is not in line) “,,,I f;,cing to UC front.
The bnttaliou in colum” “f cou~~nnies: Two ,,nces from the
guide, in pr”1”ngation “f nncl *acing d”,W, the line.
Each eapt;lin, aftor dressing his e”rq,;,,,y. co”,m;,,,ds: FRONT,
nnd tnlies his pmt.
The bnttalion being in line and “nlem otherwise prescribed.
at the captain’s commm,d dress, or at the a,lnn,a,,d halt, w&n
it is prescribed tlmt the company sha11 dress, the goidl? on the
tlB”k nway from the point Of rest, with his ,,iece at right 6h”“,-
deer, dresses ,nmn,dly “11 the ca,,tnin and the ~“n~~mnies beyond.
During the dres~i be mows. if necemr~, to the right and left
ouly ; the ca~,tni,, dresses the com~mny o,,_the line tb”s estnb-
lished. The guide takc*the “mirion “f older ;,rms nt tlw com-
“land front. (C. I. D. 22.. ‘vo: 2.)
266. The bnttniion PSCCU~~Sthe halt. rests, facings, steps nntl
mmhings. monml a‘ mms. res,,lues attention, kmels, lies down.
rises, Stocks and takes (IPm9, as exgklined in the Schools of me
soldier alid SQUild, SllbStitlifill, ” in *be comnlnllds battalion for
wood.
The bnttaiion exrcutrs squads right (left), squads right (left)
about, route step ::,,<I at ease, and obliques an,, res,,,nes the
direct march, ~8 ex,~loinerl i,, tlke SC~KX>,or tile Com~nny.
267. Tbe battnli”” in column of iilat”“lls, squads, twaos, “1’
mrs cballges dircclioll; in coiur~~o of squilds forms C”,,,nnl of
twos or dies nnd re~forllls C”,,,lllllS “f twos “1’ S~mdS, ns ex-
pinbred in me S&O”L Of the Con~,lxny.
268. When ibr f”r”mtiotl admits “f tll” si”loit;,“e”,,s execu-
tie,, by C”rn~i,“iCY or p,ntoons Of ,,,ove,,,e,,ts in the School of
fhc Company the ionjor may ciluse such morpnkmt to be exe
ccmed by prriixiug, rrh011 nec~f3si~ry, companies (platoops) to the
comnmlldr prescribed tbereilr : 0s 1. Companies. right front into
line, 2. MARCH. TO com~~lete such sin,u!tuneous ,,,oveme,,ts, the
74 SCHOOL OF TXE BATTALION.

wm,,mndn halt UT march, if ,ircswil~A. ax<< civen ,,y the mnjor.

The eammnnd front, when ~irescribed, is given by the captains.
269. ‘The battalion as a suit ewculrs tlw l”:ldinzs nml firinrs
only in firing SBlllting volleys. The co”,u,;l”ds &i iis far t;e
vuni,)ii~,~, substit,,l,ing baftolian for company. At the first COILI-
mand for loading, co~~t;~ins take post in rmr of the renter of
fbeir respective ~o”,~n”irs. At the conclusion of the firing,
lbe captains resume their posts in line.
On other ocr.nsio~s, when tiring in dose order is necessary,
it is execnted by com,xmy or other subdivision under instruc-
tions from the rnnj”r.

To Form the Battalion.

270. For ,,“r~oses other thnn crr.x,onies: The bnthlion is
for”v3i in r”l”“m Of m,n:Nls. ‘The rom,~,nie~ hn~ing been
formed, the adjntaur ]msis hinmeif so HP to bo facing the 03.
““I”, when farmrd, im,, 6 ,KICUS in front nf the ,lhC” to be “CC”.
pied by the k?a<lill~ ~rlide of the tmttnli”” ; he draws saber ;
odrutont’s co// is sounded or the adintnnt sianals assemble.
he comp:tnies are fornlfd, at nitentiau, ;‘n c”hm 0f SQ,~S
in their ~ro~w order. Each enptnin, after halting his mmpnny,
salutes the adjutant; tbe adjutant returns the snlnte and, when
the last captain lies saluted, faces the major and reports: Sir,
the bottolion is formed. He tlien joins the major.
271. For ceremonies or when directed: The battalion 1s
formed in line.
The conwmies having been formed, the adjutant pmt8 knself
so a8 to be 6 rhce~ to the right of the right eomgany when line
is formed, and faces in the direction in which the line is to
extend. IIe draws saber: adjutonf’s co// is sounded: tile band
plays if ~msent.
The right c<mI~il”y is condncted by its enptain 6” as to arrive
from the rear, p:lr:,llel to the iine: its right amI left gwles p-
cede it on the line by about 20 ~)aces. taking ,mst fztacinc t” the
right at order arms, so thnt their elbows will be awtinst the
breasts of the right and left tiles of their company when it is
dressecl. The guides of the other eom~~nnies suecessirely pro-
long tin? line to me left in Iike mnnner :,“A the e”“~,~a”ies
ap*roacb their reswctire places in line as explained for the
right commmy. The adjutant, from his post, ennses the guides
to cover.
 SCHOOLOF THE BATTALIONT. 76
When abont 1 ,x,ce in roar of the live, e;ich company is halted
ana dressed to tile right agai1rst tin? rrrnis Of the guides.
The band, arriving fro”, the rear, tilBCS its IlhLW ill line when
tbe right compmy is b:llted; it tenses pl:~sing wbm the left
con~gnny his hillted.
When the guides of the left company hrr been posted, the
ndjntnnt. moving by the shortest mite, Iakes post facing the
battalion michvay between the ~wst of the m:tjor and the center
of tile bnttaiion.
The mnjw, staff, no,,canrnlisr;iolroil staff, 2nd orderlies mke
their ~.~ts.
When xl, ~:,rts of the line linre bee,, dressed, au, oi%cersand
others bare reached their post*, the adjutant connnnnds: 1.
Guides, 2. POSTS, 3. Present, 4. ARMS. At tl,e second c”m,uand
gnide~ take their yhccs in tbe line. The aljntant the” trims,
about ““d reports to the mnjor: Sir, the battalion is formed;
the major directs the ndjntant: Take your post, Sir: draws saber
and brings the battaliml to tbr order. The adjutant takes his
post, grassing to the right of the mnjor.
\
To Dismiss the Battalion.

27% DISMISS YOUR COMPANIES.

staff and “““c”“l”lissia”wl staff “dicers f.711 ““t; each enptain
“IarcheS his company off and ais”lisFes it.

To Rectify the Alignment.

27% Being in line at n halt, to align the battalim: 1. Center
(right or left). 2. DRESS.
The captains dress their eomganies s”CCeSSively toward the
center (right or left, enick Of me battalion, each as ~“0” as the
captain nest toward the indiented guide co~“r”a”ds: Front. The
raPt”i”Y “f tile writer comp:,nies (if the dress is Centw) dress,
them without waiting for each other.
274. TO give the bnttalio” R new alignment: 1. Guides en-
ter (right or left) ~ompnny on the line. 2. Guides on the line. 3.
Center (right or left). 1. DRESS, 5. Guides. 0. POSTS.
At the first commlnd, ibe designated guides place khanselves
on the line C~ilr. 271) facing tbe’eenter (right or left). The
major establishes them in the direction be wishes to gire the
battalion.
76 SCHOOL OF THE B*TTAIJON.

*t the second comnan~~, the guides of the other companies

ts,re posts, fncing the center (right or left), so as to Prolong
rile line.
*t tile c”“ln,ar,d dress, eudl captain dresses his c”nr,x.ny to
the nnn,< tow;,rtl which tile guides “f his eompllny face.
at the command posts. Sir-eo when 811 COmDllnieS have eom-
,,*eted the dress, the guides return to their posts.

To Rectify the Column.

27.5. Being in colomn of companies, or in clmc column, at n

halt, if the guides cl” not cover or llave not their proper as-
tnnres. am, it is desireA t” correct them. the major commands:
1. Right (l&). 2. DRESS.
CaPtRinS Of conwanies ill L‘ear Of the Jlmt place their right
guides so as to corer nt the proper distnme; eK!b captain
aligns his company to the right and commands: FROXT.
On Right (Left) into Line.
256. Bring in colunm of squnds or corupauies: 1. On right
(left) into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Battalion, 4. HALT.
Being in COhnll of squads: At tile first command, me captain
of the lexlinr com,,tl,,y cmnrran~ls : Squads right. If at a lralt
each captain in rear e”nun;rnds: Forward. At the second corn-
“land tbs k%iing co”,pauy Iu”rc,,es in Ii”” to me rim; me
,.“lll”:llliPs in nxlr r”,,til,“e to ronrch t” the frunt nnd f”tlU SIIC-
~cessirely on the left, each, wbeo apposite its place, being
mnrched in line to tllC right.
The fnllrtb c”LJllllil”tl ii Fire” WhC” tllr first company has
“avnnced the desired Llistnnce in the llrw dirretioll; it halts
and is dressed to the riqht by its en,,tnin ; the “thers ~“nr,dete
the morement, encll h& halt& 1 pnce ill I’e:,r of the line
estah,islEd hy tllr first eoinpanp, mid thei, drussetl to the right.
J3eing in C”lU”l” of com,mnies: At the first c”mnm”d, the
Captmi” of the first conrp;roy commnlldn: Right turn. If at a
halt, en& ~i,,ttaio in real- mmnm~lls : Forward. Rncll of the
enptnins it? car of the ,en,,lins3 c”“l,,aliy gires the command:
1. Right turn, in time to ntld. 2. MARC”. mhe,, his C”~I,,IIII~
irrrires opposite the right of its place in line.
‘I’bo fourth comumnd is gi\-on and the moremeut com*iletrd as
eirlltrinerl nhure.
 SCHOOLOF THE BBTTALION. 17
wkthrr executedfrom ~“lunlrr Of squadsor colnn,” of ConI-
pauies, WChc”pt;lirr Iliar!en,,i”lSelf 8” as to n,ar(.h hesidethe
right guide after his co*np:~ny forms line or chnges clirection
to tile right.
If executed in double li”E, the lendiog c0,,,ptl,,y m;,rcheri in
d”“bk time nnti, lullted.
Front into Line.
255. Being in rolnnrn Of SQWldS or c”nlp3nies: 1. Right /Lee)
front into line, 2. MARCH.
Being in column of squads: At the first mnmand, the captnin
of the lending eowyuny commxnds: Column right: the captains
of the cOmllnnieS in mlr, column half right. At the Second COIIL-
nr:,nd the leading ConqKlny exccntes column right, zlnd, nz ihe
Inst synad co,n,,letes the chnnpe of dhwtion, is formed in ,i,,e
to the left, halted, and dressed to tl,e left. mch of the con,-
~nrries in rear is condncted IBY the most corwenient rnnte to the
re’citr of the right of the iireccding C”IU,~II~, thence to tk rinht,
pnrnllel to and 1 mire in rear of the new 1iur: when o,,,mi+e its
Nm?, it is formed in line to the left, halted, arid dressed to the
left.
Being in e”lumo Of conl,,m,ies : If “rnrching the ca,,tai*, “f
the ,eadi”r cam~~any “ires the necemarg co”,m:,“ds lo halt his
c”r”,sx~y at the sreorld commnr~d ; if nt 1, halt, the lei,di,,x co,,,.
,iany stands fast. At the first commnnd. the ci~,mi,, of eoc,,
i:“,l,,,“ny in rcor c”,““,;,“,,~: Squads right, or Right by squ,ds,
:ond after the swond mmmnnd condwts his company by rhe
“lost co”renilienl ro,ite t” itr place in line. as des(.ribed :,ho\.e,
Whither executed from ml”m” of rqwds or colu,“,, of co,,,.
~l:mies, ench ~aptnin halts when op1wsite or nt the point where
th” left Of his con1,uny is to ws,.

To Form Column of Cornponies Successively to the fight OP Left.

Z78. R*i”c in C”l”l”li of sqlr”<l: 1. Column of cornponies. first
eomwny,squadsright (left). 2. MARCH.
The kldillf co*n,~~lly exi’rlltrs squads ,+ght :,nd ,“,,T<~S fop
vud. 1‘110 other comjianies ino~-~ frwwrrd in colu~~~n of ‘iq”ndo.
““d s,lccesPir”lg mrrcll in line 1” the right “11 t,,c Si,“,P grolind
iis the le:~dinC conr,in”y :I”,~ i” ‘1w.,, “,i,““cr that the gnide
CO~OL’PSthe g”ide of the ,~wwdin~ co,,,,m,y.
78 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.

T” Porn co,umn of squads Suceessiveiy to the Right “P Left.

m’3. neinc in cn,,,mi, of (.om,,ani<.s: I. Column of squads, first
com,mny. squnds right (left,, 2. MARCH.
The lending wn~p:~t~~~ PW~II~W sguods right nml TIIOYPS for-
wm,. The Other conq,nnirs move forward in column Of corn-
panics nnd successively march in colunlll of FqUads to the right
on the wme ground UP the Iwl~iing c”nIpIIns.
To Change Direction.
l.” ,,/
!z&uhBeing in C”,,,I.... ,.C L_
nnmnoniaa n* ~.“-_
,...),L...‘I,.I.1. rlner C,,lllll~
.“.“.nn: .I. cot-
^~’
mm right (/left), 2. MARCH.
The rxptain of t,w first company comlnnnds: Right turn.
The lending company turns to the right on moving piwt, the
captain adding: 1. Forlmrd, 2. MARCH, UP”” its com~leti”“.
The other companies m:u~h squarely up to the turning wint :
eneh c,,i,n”w direction by the same commnnds und me:,ns as the
first urrd in SIX,, n,~nner that the wide c”“ers the wide of the
precPding company.
281. Being in line of companies or close line: 1. Bottdion
right (,eft), 2. MARCH, 3. Bottolion, 4. HALT.
The right eom,,:,,~’ ehan~es direction to the right; the other
eompnnies are conducted by the shortest line to their ~lnres
llkreast Of the first.
The fonrth eommnnd is given when the right company ha
advanced the desired distance in the new dir&i”” : that ?“II-
pany hnlts; the others halt s”~res~i”ely won arrivina on the

!%?!A Being in column of squ:*ds, the battalion changes direc-

tion by the snme ~omrn:~~ds and in the manner arescribed for
the company.
Mass Formations.
28~2 l-2. Bein; in column of squads, to f”rm B Iin” Of
columns of compnnies or compnny SubdivisiOnS, facing in any
desired direction. at any desired interval, on the right “I’ lrft
of the lending elrment of the b;kttalion: 1. Line of companres
(ha/f cornponies, platoons), ot (so many) paces, guide right (leffJs
2. MARCH, 3. Battalion, 4. HALT.
The leading eomp;my (or subdivision) marches in the direc-
tion previomly indientecl by the mnjor until the cOnNIlilnd IlRlt
is given nnd then halts. Enrb i;ncreedinl: com~nng (or sub-
 SCHCIOL OF TEE BBTTBLmN. 79

division, mnrch*s hS the most dirrct rOUtI? to its phlee nt the

jmsrribed interval “11 the left (right) of the next prereding
com~:my (or subdivision), halting when it is abreast of the
lending drment of the bnttnlion.
If the battalion be in any formntion Other thnn column of
sqnuds, the mujor indicates the desired direction to the leudinf
?h!ment. The entire ernnnxn~d forms ~“lurrin of squxds and
executes the m”\~e”,e”t in C”nf”rmity wit,, the prillciples km-
cated nhosr. (C. I. n. II., x0. .19.,
2gS. Being in line, line of companies, or rolunm of eomp~mies:
1. Close on first (fourth) company, 2. MARCH.
If at n halt, the indicated company stands fast; if marching.
it is halted ; each of the other companies is conducted toward it
and is halted in proper order in close column.
If the battalion is in line, companies, form mwessi~ely in rear
of the indicated company ; if in column of squads, companies in
rear of the leading company form on the left of it,
I” close column formed from line on the first comgany, the
left guides CO”‘?,‘; formed on the fourth e”m,mny. ri&?,t guides
cover. If formed on the leading company, the guide remnlns as
before the formation. In close line, the guides are halted
nhreast of the guidle of the lending compnny.
The battalion in column closes on the leading company “nly.
(C. I. n. R., NO. 18.)
To Extend the Mass.
284. Being in dose column or in dose line: 1. Extend on Aret
(fourth) comjmny. 2. WARCH.
Being in close line: If nt a halt, the indicated company stands
fast : if marching, it halts ; each of the other compnnies is con-
ducted away from the indicated company and is halted in its
proper order in line Of compunies.
Being in close column, the extension is made on the fourth
company only. If marching, the lending company continues to
march; eompnnies in rem’ nrr halted and successively resume
the mnrch in time to follow at full distance. If at halt, the
leading com+xany marches: coml)nnies in renr successively march
in time to follow at f”,, distance.
Close column is not extended in double time.
085. Being in close column: 1. Right (feft) front into fins,
2. MARCH. Executed as from column of cornponies.
so SCHOOL cm TEE B*TT*LImi.

286. Being in close column: 1. Column of squads, drsf (!ourth)

com,,my, squcrds right (left). 2. MARCH.
me dlesi~nated COInDunl marches in column Of saunds t” the
right. E&h of the &I& rompnnies executes the &me move-
ment in time to follow the greeeding company in column.
as,. Being in dose line: 1. Column of squads, first (fourth)
compmy, forword, 2. MARCH.
The designated compnny nm”eS forward. The other COrnlx-
nirs (halma if in Inarch) srlrressivrly take up the march an,,
follow in C”l”llm.
Route Step and At Ease.
!a&% me battalion marches in route step and ot ease ns pre-
Scribed in the School of the Company. When marching in
column Of companies or platoons, the guides maintnin the trnce
and distonee.
In route rwarches the maior marches at the head of the eel-
umn ; when necessary, the f;le c1osers may be directed to march
at the head and rear Of their compnnies.

AssemMy.
289. The battalion being wholly or pnrtinlly deployed, or the
compnnies beinfi se~~~rnted : 1. Assembk 2. MARCH.
The major ylaren himself w~wsite to or flrsipnates the ele-
ment or point on ,vhich the b:,tt:,lim is to :,ssemble. Com,~:,-
nies ore assembled and marched to the indicnted point. AS the
cum~)mies arrive tbe major or adjutant indicates the formirtiun
to be taken.
 COMBAT PBISCIPLES.
Orders.
800. The following references to orders are applicable to
nttaeli or defense.
291. In extended order, the company is the largest unit t”
execnte ,norenrmts by yresrribed commands or ,“en”s. The
nn,jor, assembling his mptains if mxtic”ble, directs the dispo-
~ition of the bnttnlio” by means of tactical orders. He controls
its suhse~uent nx~vement~ bv such orders or commands as are
SUitable to the oecnsion.
292. In every disposition of the bnttalio” for cambnt the
major’s order should give subordinates suffleient information
of tbe enemy, of the ~mition of supporting and “eigbbori”g
troops, and of the object so”gbt to enable tbel” to eonfm’m
intc,,igent,y to the generat plan.
The order sho”ld the” desi~~nnte the eom~anies wbieb are to
~onstitnte the firing fine ancl those wbicb nre to co”stit”+e the
sypport. In attack, it should dlesignnte the direction or the
objective, the order ““d front of the companies “n the firing
line, and sh”“ld designate the right or left rompnny ns base
compnny. In defense, it should describe the front of ench corn-
pnny and, if necessary, the sector to he obserred by web.
29% When the bnttalio” is “pw”ti”g “looe, the mxjor gro-
“ides for the reconnnissance and pr”twtion of his flanks: if purt
of fl larger force, the nrnjor makes Similar pnmi~ion.s. when
neeessnry, without orders from higher authority. unless such
authority hns specifienlly directed other suitable reconnaissance
and protection.
W4. When the bnttnlion is deployed npon the initintive of
the major, he rvill i”dicnte whether extra amm”“itio” shall
be issued ; if dq,l”yed in p”rs”n”~ of orders of higher nuthor-
ity, the m”.ior will cause the issue of extra nmmnniti”“, ““less
such nutbority hns give” dir&ions to the contrary.
9”467”--174 81
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.

Deployment.
295. The following principles of deployment are npplieablo
to attack or d”fellSe.
296. h premnture deployment inrolves a long, disorganizing
and fatiguing advance of tbe skirmish line, and should be
avoided. d b’reater evil is to be cz,“g,,t by heavy fire when
in dense column or other close order fommntion; henre ad-
vantage should bc tnken of corer in order to retain the battalion
in dose ordrr forrniltion until exposure to heavy hostile tire
may reasonnbl~ be nnticipated.
297. The major regul:itra the depth of the deployment and
the extent and density of the firing line, subject to such restric-
tians ns n senior “My bnve inlposed.
Companies or designated subdivisions and detnchmedts are
conducted by their commanders in such manner as best to ac-
COmplish the mission nssiened to them under the maj”r’s
orders. Compnnies designated for the firing line march inde-
pendently to the plnce “f deployment, form skirmish line, and
take up the advance. They conform. in xenernl. t” the base

298. The commander of n battalion, whether it is operating

nlone or as p”rt of a lllr~er force, sho”ld hold n ,,nrt of his
eommnnd out of the firing line. By the judicious use of this
force the major can exert a” innuence not otherwise possible
over his firing line and can omtrol, within reasonable limits, an
rxtion once begun. So if bia battnlion be assigned to tbr Bring
line tbe major xill cause one, two, or tbrec companies to be
denlosed on the firinr line. retninine the wmnininz vnnmnnies
or company as a sup&t for that 6inc line. The division Of
the battnlion into firin line and support mill depend up&
the front t” be covered and the nilture and anticipated severity
of the nction.
SW. if the hnttnlion be Dnrt of a lnrger command, the num-
ber of companies in the firing line will genernlly be determin.
able from the regimental commnnder’s order: the remainder
constitutes tbe’support. If the battalion is ncting alone, f,br
SuppOrt must be strong enough t” mnintain tbe original Arc
power of t,he firing line, to protect the flanks, and to yerf”rm
the functions of a reserve, mbntevcr be the issue of the action.
See puragrapb 346.

.
 SCIIOCIL OF THE B*TT*LION. 83
300. If the battnlion is overnting alone, the s”pDort “my,
according to circumstunees, bi held in one or two bodies and
placed behind the center, or one or botb flanks of the firing line.
or echeloned beyond a dank. If the battalion is part “f n larger
force, the support is generally held in one body.
301. The distance bern%n tbe tirinz line and the sunwxtine
group or groaps will vary between wi;ie limits: it shot&? be ai
short BS the necessity for protection from heavy losses will per-
mit. When eowr is nvailnble, the SuppOrt should be 3s close
as 50 to 100 yards; when such cover is not available, it should
not be closer than 300 yards. It may be as far as 500 Yards in
rear if good cover is there obtainable and is not obtainable nt
a lesser distance.
502. In exceptional cases, ns in a meeting engagement, it
mny be necessary to place an entire battalion or regiment in the
tiring line at the initial de~l”wn,t, the SuPPort being furniebed
by other troow Such depl”yl”e,lt cnuses the early min~$i”~
of the lar~eer units, thus rendering le:~drrsbin and control ex-
tremely ditlicult. The necessity for sueb deployment will in-
crense vith the ineficiency of the commander and of the serv-
Ice of information.

303. Fire direction and fire control are functions of compnny

and platoon commanders. The major makes the primary ap-
portionment of the target-in defense, by assigning sectors~
of tire; in attack, by assiguing the objective. In the lntter case
each company in the tiring line takes as its target that part of
the general objective which lies in its front.
504. The major should indicate tbe point or time at which
the Iire light is to ““mL Be mxv do this in his older for de-
ployment 6,’ he “my follow the &I”&! line close enough to do so
at the proper time. If it be impracticable for him to do either,
the senior offreer with the firing line, in each battalion, Selects~
the time for opening fire.
Attack.
305. The battalion is the attack unit, whether operating alone
or as put Of ” ,:rrger unit.
306. If his battalion be one of several in the firing line, tbr
major, in executing his part of the attack, Bushes his battalion
84 SCHOOL OF THE B.%TTALIOB.

forwnrd as vigorously as ~nssible within the front, or section,

assigns3 to it. The &Tent degree of independence allowell ta
him lis to details demands, in tmn, the crerciac of good judg-
ment on MS gnrt. Isetter Imd*rr;hip, ,,rtter tr”“pS, on,, more
fnvornble termin enable one bnttnliun to advance mme mpidlg
in tlttnck mar, :,“Ot,,Pr less forlnnnte, ant, such a hnttalion rvi,,
insure the further :l,l\‘tl”ce “f the Others. Tllc kadinp lxatta,ion
should not, hor~ever, become isointed ; isolation may lend to its
dMtlY*CtiO”.
307. The tlepl”s”lent haTag been made, the firing lim? ad-
vnnees without firing. The ~xedominant idea must be to close
with the enemy as SOOIl as pxsihle without ruinous losses. The
lilnitecl SIID,~IY Of nnlnrunitiun :a1111the I1r1Cert:li”tY Of res”D*Jly,
the necessity for securin rr fin? so~m-iority in Order to advnnce
within the shorter ranges, an,, the i*nDossibility “f acc”mplish-
ing this nt i~&ktive ranges. m:he it im~wmtive that tire he not
Opened SIR long as the nc,v;,rrce can be continurll WithOut de-
lnornliaillg IOSSPS. ThC attilck which ,,n,ts to open fire at ex-
1rwne range Corer 1,“CO y~rtls) is not likely eve* to reach its
destination. E”lxy effort ShO”14 w mxk, by IlSi”X rover or in-
ronspicuous form;lti,,“s, or by xcl”a”cin~ the firing line ns u
whole, to nrrive ,l+t,,in 800 ~3lYlS Of the enc*uy before Opening
fire.
SO*. Except when the enemy’s nrtillery is able to effect an
nnuaunl concentrntion Of tire, ita,iire upon deployed infantry
r7inses losses which xre nnimprtnllt when cornpored with those
inflicted by his infantry; hence the nttncking infantry shoultl
proceed to 2 position as described above, and from which an
effective fir<? Pill, be directed agRi”St the hostile Infnntry wit,, a
view to uketnining fire superiority. The effectiveness of the
n”Pmy’s fire must h,? rrd,m?trl 8” ns to permit further advance.
The more eRectiva’the tire to which the enemy is subjected the
leas rlTective ITill he his fire.
309. Occnsiorr;~lly the tire of adjacent bnttnlions, or of infan-
try eInpl”yinE tire Of position. or Of SupI)“rti”i: artillery, Will
Wnnit the further ndvnnce of the entire firing line from this
point, hut it wi,, ~errcmlly be necessnry to ndvnnce by P‘“SheS
Of fractions Of me line.
The fmcfion ,n:,king the rush shuld be as large DS the hostile
fire and the necessity for mnintaining fire s~geriority will
IXT*rlit. Dewndinfc upon circnmstnncrs, the strength of the
fmrtion *nay rnry from n c”*IIpa”~ t” n few nlen.
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 85

The ndvauce is male as rapidly ns wmible without losing

fire superiority. The smaller the fraction mlrich rushes, the
greater the number of rines which continue to iire upon *he
enemy. On the other hnnd, the smalls* the fraction which
rushes the slower will be the progress of the attack.
3 10. Enough rifies mnst continue in nctioo to insure the snc-
cesq Of each rush. Frequently the 6uccessive advances of the
firing line mnst be effected by rnshes of fractions of decreased
siae; thnt is, XhTlnces by rushes ,nny nrst be 1nack by c”,“p”“y,
hter by hdf comptil~p 0r pkmn, and nndly by SHUNS 0r files;
but no subsequent u~r’ortunity to increase the rate of advance,
such ns better COVeP or a ckcreuse of the hostile fire, Should be
oYerl0ohed.
311. \Vhe”ever p”ssibk. the rush is hegun by n nanlr fraetio”
Of the firing line. I” the absence “f e1xI)rcss ,lirrcti”“s *ram the
major, ench mptain of a flank cornpuny detrrmiues when sin
ild”n”Ce by *u&Es Shill, be attempted. A nnnk compnny which
inn”gurateS nn ndvance by r”*bes beeonles the bnse company,
if not ~h%xiy the base. An advance by rustm having beeu
inaugurated on one fbli, the remninder of the tiring line eon-
forms; fractions .wSh S"CCeSSi"elY from mat flunk and halt 011
the line established by the initial rush.
The fractions need not he uniform in size ; each captain indi-
cntes hw his eompilny stm11 r@, hwing due regnra to the
ground an0 the state Of the nre fight.
318. A fraction aboUt to rush is sent forword when the
remainder of the line is firing rigoronsls : otherwise the chief
advantage Of this lnethod of adrilucing is lost.
The length Of me *usi? Will vary from 30 to 80 ynrils, de-
penning “go” me exie?nce Of cover, poositions for nring, ““d the
,,OSm? nre.
513. When the entire firing line of the battalion has ad-
vancer, to the new line. fresh opD”rt”“ities to advance are sou!Jilht
ns bdore.
3 14. Two identical situations will never confront the bnt-
tnlion; hence at drill it is prohibited to arrange the details of
nn advance before the preceding one has been conelmled, or to
employ a nd “P yrcnrrunged rndh<KL”f advnociog by rushes.
3 1.5. The ,najor posts himself 8” as best to direct the me”-
forcing of the firing line from the muport. When 1111or nearly
all of the PIII~~OI‘~ has been nbsorhcd by the tiring he. he joins,
““d takes full charge Uf, tw mter.
 86 SCROOL OF Tm3 BATTALIOB.

318. The reenforeing of the firing line by driblets of a squad

or n few men has no appreciable effect. ‘The tiring line requires
either no reenforcement or a strcmg one. Genernlly one or two
platoons will be sent forward under cover of a heavy fire of the
firing line.
317. To facilitate control ““d to provide intervnls in which
reenforcements may be placed, the eompnnies in the flring.li”e
should be Kent closed in on their centers as they become depleted
by casualties during the advance.
When this is impracticnble. reenforeements must mirlgle with
and thicken the firing line. In battle the latter method will be
the rule rather thn” the exception, and to fnlnilinrize the me”
with such conditions the cmnbat exercises of the battalion
should include both methods of reenforeing. Occasionally, to
provide the “ecessnry ir.tervnls far reenf”rcinF by either of
these methods, the tin”6 line sho”Id be thinned by causing ,“e”
to drop out and simulate losses during the various advances.
Under ordinary conditions the depletion of the firing line for
this purpose will be from one-fifth to one-half of its strength.
318. The mnjor or senior officer in the firing line determines
when bnsonets sbnll be fixed and givt?; the proper co~nmt~nd or
signal. It is repented by all parts of the tiring Me. Ench man
who was in the front rn”k prior to drpioymmt. as soon as be
rec0gnm the COI~I”~ O= sigd, SIIS~~S firing, quickly fines
his bnyunet, arrd ilnnletlintely res”“u?s firing: nfter which the
other men suspend firing, fix bngonets, and i”medintrly res”mr
tiring. The support ah fixes bnyoncts. The c0”certed tiling “1
the bnyo”et by the tiring line xt drill does not simulate battle
conditions nud sh”“ld not be rec,“ir~,. It is essenti”, that there
be “o mnrked pnuse in t,he firing, Bayonets will be fixed gen-
erally before or during the last, or Second last, advunce preceding
the charge.
319. Subject to orders from higher authority, the mujor de
tennines the Doint from which the chnrge is to bc mude. The fir.
ing line having nrrived at that point and being in readiness, the
major enuses the charge to be sounded. ‘The sign”1 is repeated
by the mwieinns of nil pnrts of the line. The company otticrrs
lend the chnrge. The skiR”ishers s~)ri”g forwnr,, sb”“ting, run
with bayonets at charge, “ml close with the e~~crny.
The f”rthCr conduct of the charging troops nil, dq,,end upon
circumstances ; they may halt and engage in bayonet combat or
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTIf$O&
‘8 I,
in plxs”ing fire; they may advnnce n short diStRnB@* Obtain a
field of fire or to drive the enemy from the vicinity, 2*y may
assemble or ~eor.wnize, etc. If the enemy vacates his po&o~
every effort should be made t” oven fire at once on the retreat-
in6 mass, reor~anizotion of the attacking troops being of second-
ary importance to the infliction of fnrtber losses upon the
enemy and to the ineren~e of his confusion. In combat exercises
the major will nssume a situation and terminate the assault
nccordingly.
Defense.
320. In defense, ns in attack, the bnttalion is the tactical
unit best suited to independent assignment. Defensive po@tions
are “S”n*ly divided into sections aId II battalion assig”ed to
each.
321. The major locates such fire, communicating, and cover
trenches and obstacles as are to be c”r,strwted. He assigns
mynie to construct them and details the troops to occupy

322. The major reenforces the firing line in accordance with

the Brinciples npnlicable to, and explained in ~onneetion with,
the nttaek, mnildaining no more rifles in the Orior line than ares
n~essary to prevent the enems’s advnnee.
32.3. The sunyly of ammunition being “s”ally amyle, fire is
opened 88 soon as it is ,,ossible to break ul, the enemy’s forma-
tion. stm his advance. or indict mnterial Ices. but this rule must
be mod&d t,, suit the a,mwnition s,,,~pIy.
324. The major enuses the tiring line and support to Ox
bayonets when an nssnult by the enemy is imminent. Ca~tnins
direct this to be done if t,hw are not in eommnnient,ion with the
major and the masure is deemed Bdvisable.
Fire alone will not stop a determined, sliillfully eonductetl
attack. The defender must have equal tenacity; if be can stay
in his trench or position and cross bnyonetu, be will at least
have neutralized the hostile first line, und the combat will bc
decided by reserves.
326. If ordered or comPelled to withdraw under hostile in-
fantry fire or ill the ~rrsence of hostile infantry, the suypvrt
will be wsted so 8s to cover the retirement of the firing line.
520. When the battalion is operating alone, the support must
be stwng and must be fed spn-inply into the Bring line, es~e-
cially if a eounternttnek Is ~lnnned. Opportunities for counter-
attack should be soub’bt at nil times.
 THE REGI&fENT.

327. Rxmally, the regiment consists of three battalions, but

these re~nlations :lre :crq,licnble t” n re@ment of two or more

L LI’NE (B”3 I” Line) 7

Y)
•a 60

IW
II q O-U-O-~
h6
el30 Bl
II - 1 Plate
5”

battaiims. Special units, fiuch as bnnd mnebine-gun conqnny,

and mounted scouts, have special fonuxtious for their own use.
88
 THE REOIMENT.

Wxw,,ents herein ~xescribe,, are for the batlnliom; s,~~ii,l

“lrits conCorm thereto “n1ess otherwise grescribed or directed.
528. The C”l”,K?l is res,IO”Sible fr,r the theOl’tltiC;I1 illstrllctio,,
and practical traininp of tbe re~imnnt AS n whole. Under his
immediate supervision the training of the units of the regiment
is conducted by their res~ectire commanders.
Y20. The colonel either gilm hi8 com,“mlds or orders orally,
by bwle, or by simnl. or cmmunic~lte~ them by staff oW?rs or
&de&s. -
Erich major giws the a~~propriate commnnds or orders, and,
in close-order morements, cnnsrs his battalion tn execute t,he
neeemnrv “10~ements at his c”mm:~“d “f execution. JaCb
major oidinarily mopes his bnttnliou from one formntion to zn-
other, in ~ulnnm of squads, in the most convenient manner. and.
in Ihe presence of the enemy, in me most direct mBn”er co”-
sistent with cowr.
Con~mauders of *he special units obserre the ~nme prioeiples
n8 to co,n,,m,ds and movements. They take plnees in the new
formntion as directed br the c”lmel; in the nbsenee of Swh
directions they conform as nearly a8 practicable to Plate IV,
mainhinine their rekltiw nasitions with resneet to the dank
or end of the reximent “I, rrbich they are oriahlnlls nested.
3RO. when tik! regiment is frrni-&~, :md durinrr ceremonies.
the lienfen;mt rulonel is ,mstCd 2 IXIC~S to the left of. and 1 mace
3ess advanced than the colonel. In mowment8 subseqmmt to
the formation of the reeinrent and otbrr thnn ceremonies. the
lieutenant COl”lWl i8 on ihe left of tile colond.
331. In whntevrr formatiou the regiment “my be, the bat-
talions re+ain their permment administmtirr designations of
firs,, semd, third batfolio”. Rm conrcnience. they may be desig-
nated, when in line, BJ right, center, or Mt battalion: w*en in
calnum, as leading, cenler. or mv battalion. ‘Iteve designations
apply to the actual positions of the bnttnlions in line or
ColmTln.
362. I~:xcegt nt cercnmnies. or n-hen rendering honors, or
when otherwiw directed, after the reyiment is formetl, the bat-
lalions march and stand of ease during subsequent movements.
 THE REOlmsNT.

CLOSE ORDER.

To Form the Regiment.

533. Unlem otherwise directed, the bnttaiions are posted
from right to left, “P from head to rem, acc”rding to the rank
of the bnttaiion c”nm,imders present, the se”i”r on the right
or at the head. A bnttaliou wb”8e m:r.ior is in command of the
regiment retain* its phlce.
884. Far ordinnry pnrpo~es, the rughent is formed iu co*mn~r
of squads or in colum, of masses.
The ndjntant informs the mnjors whxt the formation is to be.
The battalions nnd s,,wial units having been farmed, he ,,“sts
himself a”d draws mbcr. Adjutant’s ccdl is sounded, or the
adjutant signnls msemble.
If forming in eel”““, Of Sqmld8, th! adjutant posts himSe,*
so a8 to be facing the colmnn when formerl, and 6 ~)i,ces in front
of the phce to be “ccu,,ied by the lending guide of the re@ment ;
if fuming in colllmll Of m;,ssrs, he posts himwlf so as to be
facing the right guides of the column ~ben formd, and 0 paces
in fmnt of the place to be occu~icd by the right guide of tbc
leadini: cammny. Later, be more” so “s best to observ” the
*“lTl~ti”“.
The battalions nre halted, at nttention, in column “f sqwds
or close column, as the case may be, mcce~si~ely from the fr”nt
in their V’OWP order nnd ph,iaces. The band talws its place when
the leadinp bnttalion has bnlted. Other *pen, units take their
pkces in turn mhen the re;m’ battalim has haltm%
‘The majors and the eomm:~nders of the nx~chine~yn cou~pnny
nnd nronnted SCOUTS(or detncbment~ each. when his commmd is
in place, salutes the ndjntnnt and c&uuadds: Af ease; the odju-
tnnt returns the salutes. When all have saluted and the band is
in place, the ndjntant rides to the colonel, reports: Sir, the regi-
ment is formed. and takes his nest. The colorwl draws snber.
The fornration in column ;f squnds may be modified to the
extent demnnded by eircumstnnces. Prior to the *0rmnti0* the
adjutant indicates the point whm‘c the head “f the column is to
rest and the direction in mbieh it is 1” face; he then p”~ts him
self so as best to observe the formntion. At ndjufonls c(I// or
assemble the leading battalion marcb~~ to, and halts at. the
indicated ,,oint. The other bnttnlions take ,I”Siti”“S *ranI Which
they nuly conreniently follow in their proper p,nces.
 THE REOIMEBT.

335. Wr ceremonies, or when directed, the regiment k4

fanned in line or line of mnsse.3.
The adjutant 1)0st8 himself 80 as to be 6 paces to the right
of the right or lending eom~mny of the right battalion when the
regixmnt is formed and facet in the direction in which the line
is to extend. Adjutant’s cnll is sounded; the baud plays.
The adjutant indicates to the ndjntant of the right bnttalion
the point of rest and the direction in which the line is to
extend, and the,, trikes rmt facing the regiment midway be-
tween the post of the eolune, and the e.xlteP of the regiment.
Each of the other battalion adjutants precedes his battalion
to the line and marb~ its ,‘oint of rest.
The battnlions, nrrivinx from the rear. each in line or close
column, as the case mnpbe, ore halted in the line *ucces*ively
from right to left in their proper order md places. Upon hnlt-
ing, each major commandS: 1. Right, 2. DRESS. The battalion
adlutaot *ssist* in a1ienine
I _~ the battalion Blld then takes his
P&t.
The band, arriving from the rear, takes its place in line
when the right battalion has halted: it ceases playing when
the left battalion has helfed. ‘The machine-xun company and
the mounted smuts COP detachment) take their glaces in line
after the center battalion has halted.
The colonel zmd those who acco*ymnlny him take post.
When all ,x,rts of the line have been dressed, and odicers and
~11 other8 have reached their PO&~, the adjutant commnllds:
1. Present, 2. ARAW. Hc then turns about and re,,orts to the
colonel : Sir, the regiment is formed: the colonel directs the ad-
jutant: Teke your pat, Sir, draws sober and brings the regiment
to the order. The adjutant takes his post, ~)asslng to the rights
Of the ColoneL
To Dismiss the Regiment.
386. Reing in nnp formntian: DfSMfS.9 YOUR BATTALIONS.
Each major mnrches his bnttnliou off and dismisses it.
Movements by the Regiment.
.13,. The regiment executes the halt, rests, facings, ste~a
and mrrrchings. mmuol of amm, resumes attention. kneels, lies
down. rises. stacks and fakes arms, RS explained in the Schools
of the Soldier and .swad. wbstituting in the commmds, nihem
necessary, bnttaf;ona for squad.
92 THE RECIXIEBT.

The re@~nt ere(l”tes squ~,dds right (left), squads dCht (left)

about, rwfe step and at ease. ob,iques and resumes the direct
march ;,s es~>l;lined iu the Scb”ol of t~he Co”r,~n”y.
The regiment in col”m,, of flies, tw”S, squads, or platoons,
,ch;mges direction, a”d i” col”mn~Of sq”Nds forms col”mn of
t,wx or tiles and i-e-farms column of twos or squads. as ex-
plained in the School of the Com~lly. In column of comWnies,
it changes direction as explained in the School of the Zlnttulion.
338. When the formation admits of the simultnneous execu-
tion, by battalions, companies, or ~l”toon% of movements we-
scribed in the School of the Company or Kattaliq”, the colonel
may cause such morements to bc executed by ~redxing, where
,,ecessury, botblions (companies. jdtltoons), to the co”imands
prescribed therein.
339. The column of squads is the nsunl col”mn of march: to
shorten the column, if eonditio”s wrmit, a double column Of
squads mlly be used, the companies of each battalion marching
nbrenst in two colunms. Prelinhnry to an engagement, the
regimalt or its “nits will be Diaced in the formation best suited
to its subseuuent tactical emOyme”t.
340. TO amuse my formation, the colonel indicates to the
majors the character of the formation desired, the order of
the battalions, and the paint of rest. Each battalion is con-
ducted by its major, and is placed in its probes order in the
formation, by the most Conrenient means nnd 1‘0”te.
Having halted iu a formation, no m”rements for the ,mr,nse
of correcti”g minor discre@mci~S in ali~“nents, intervals, or
distances are made ““less n,xcinlly directed by the colonel
or necessitated by conditions of cover.
341. TO correct intervals, distances, and +lignments, the
edmel directs one or more of the majors to rectify their bat-
talions. Each major so direct& causes his battalion to correct
its alignment, intervals, and distances, a”d glnees it in its
proper Dosition in the formation.

CCMBAT PRINCIPLES.
342. The regiment is deployed by the colonel’s order to the
eomm.mders of buttnllons and swcia, ““its. The order should
give them inforwation of the ~it”atioll and of the Irowsed
plan of action. In attnck, the order shonld assign to each
battnlim not in reserw? its objective or iine of udvnnce. In
defense, it should assign to each its sector. In either en?+2 it
 THE REC(IMIEBT,

should designate the tl’““~~ for, nod the position of, the reserve
and Irescribe the emplug-ment of the machine guns and mounted
8C”“tS.
Both in attack and defense the order may fix the front to be
covered in the deployment.
Encr”:lchment 111)“~ the proper f”nctionS of subordinates nml
“nnecessar~ details Should be st”di”usly avoided. When the
resinlent dwloqs, the colonel hnbitually ,,laces the band at the
disposal of the ~nrgeoo for employment in caring for the
wounded. CC. I. LI. R., No. 2.)
343. The regiment, when “,,erating al”“” and nttncking.
should undertake an enwlo~ing attack if it does not result in
“Perextc”si”n.
Assuming il regiment of l,mO I’ifles, an extension of more than
1,000 yardls between its extreme flanks when making an envelop-
ing nttncl$ alone is seldom justifiable; when part of n battle
line, n front of 500 yards can rarely be esceedcd.
344. In defense the front occupied when acting alone or
Posted on “LI near the dank of n battle line should seldom exceed
004, yards; when ,,“sted “5 an interior regiment, the front may
be irrcreosed to 800 yards. The front may be somewhat Ionger
than in the attack, since smailer battalion soDports are justi-
finble. When the regiment is “,,erating alone, howover, the regi-
mental reser1-e sh”“ld be as strong in the defense as in the
attaek unless the Banks or” secure.
345. The colonel should nlmny~ hold out n reserve-generally
one battalion; but when the regiment is “yerating alone, it ia
generally advisable to hold out more at first.
348. Wherena the sII,I,,“rt held out in each battalion of the
firing line is intended to thicken the diminishing Wing line at
the prowr times nod sometimes to lengthen it, the reserve held
out in B regiment operating alone i8 used for this pur‘~“se only
ns n lost resort. Its primnry f”llcti”“s are: Ill ntt;,ck, to are-
teet the flanks, to improve fully the advantage following a
victory, or to cover defeat: in defense, to prolong the firing line,
lo effect a counterattack, or 10 corer withdrawal. It is the
colonel’s chief means of influencing an action once begun. It
should be conserved to await the proper moment for its em-
gloyment; the combnt will seldom come to B successful issue
without its employment iti some form.
The reserve of a regiment “wrnting ns part of a lnrge force
becomes n local reserve. It replaces depleted so~)~“rts and in
attack strengthens and protects the firing line in the charge.
 THE BRIGADE.

347. The brigade does not engaage in ws3crihed drills. It

engages i” route marches and battle OP other tnetic:,, exercises.
These are CO”d”Ckd p,,muant t” commnnas “1’ orders form”-
Inted to S”it the conditions of tile proposed nl”ren,ent or exer-
eise, and, in genera,, in accordance with ale principles a,~~,*ieable
to the regiment.
348. A brigade of about 4,lml rifles, 88 part of a genera,
bitttle me, would be deployed on a front “f not “lore Yhan 1,200
yards in attack or 1,600 yards in defense.
Tmen acting alone the distnnee between extreme flnuhn in nn
enveloping attack Should not exceed 2,m yards at the time the
attncking infantry onCn* fire.
When acting ahme, the *Pmt in defense ShO”ld not ereeed
1,600 .Taras.
These limits apply to the origin31 deployment of the brigack
fOP combat and ‘p,res”,,p”sr an enen,y Of equal OP nenr1y eqwo
training and mor*,e. The limits necessitated by the snbsequeot
lxogress Of the combat can not be fowc‘ee”.
a49. 1rnits kup?r than the bripade an? genem,,y conlposed
of all mms. Combined tactics are conaidereed in tire BYeid
service Regnlntions.
 PART II.-COMHAT.

INTRODUCTION.
350. Part II “f these Pegnlations treats Only Of the bask
principles of combat tactics 86 applied to infantry and to the
special units, such as machille guns and mvunted BcO”tS, which
for”, a pnrt Of infantry reginY2nts and b~ttLl*i<>“S.
me combat tactim Of the arms mxnbi”L?d are considered in
Field Service Reguhtions.
351. Modlcr” canlbnt *e”mlnrls the highest OidW Of training,
discipline, leadership, X”d morale on the part Of the infnntry.
Complicated “u”e”rers are impracticable; &cient lwdership
and a determin;>tio” to win by simple and direct methods must
be depended “no” for SIICC~SB.
352, The duties Of infantry BE nnlny and didk”k an in-
fantry mnst be fit to cope with all conditions that may arise.
Mnler” war requires bnt one kind of infantry-good infantry.
353. The i”f”“try must take the otiensire to gni,, dccisirc
resnlts. R”th sides are the&ore likely to nttem,,t it, thou@,
not necessarily at the *am tip or in the same part of n long
battle line.
I” the hmil combnta Which malie up the genera, battle the
better endurance, “sn of gr”““d, fire efficiency, discipline, and
training will win. It is the duty of the infantry to win the
local sn~cewes which enable the commanding general to win the
battle.
354. The infantry rnrlst hare the te”“city to hold every nd-
va”t~~e gained, the hdividunl and collective discipline and skill
needed to mester the enemy’s fire, the AetPrminatio” to Cl”SC
with the enemy in ;~ttnck. and to meet him with the bayonet in
defense. I”fa”t,ry must be trained to bear the heaviest burdens
and l”s8es, both of combnf and march.
96
96 INTRODUCIIOh’.
Guod i”f;,“try ci,,, defeat an enemy .Watly ~“~ep‘iOr i” “““I-
hers. but Iackiig in training. discipline, lezr~del&lip, and morn1e.
355. It is impimsihle to est:~blisl~ fired f”l’“E or to give gen-
era1 instructions thnt will cover all cases. Miters and “a”-
commissioned “fticers m”st be so tr:liu~xl that +hoa PII” nlll~~y
S,,it;lbk "leans and methds to each ci,se ns it arises. Stud7.,
;nnd practice are necrswny to acquire proper facility in this re-
spect. Theoreticnl iostrwtion can not ~.epince prBCtieaI instruc-
tion; the forurer S”[,,,lkS wl‘rect ideas rl”d gives to prxti-
cnl work an interest, purpose, and dcdnite”ess not otherwise
obtniuable.
356. AftI% the “,echn”is”, Of exttwded order drill ll:,u bee”
learned with precision in the compnny, every excreise sbo”ld be.
:,?afar “S pmcticalJie, in t,,e ““tllrc Of a ““l”e”ver (cowbnt exer-
cise) agaiust an imoginory, outlined, or.repre*ented errwily.
~‘“mpnrry extended order drill may be ca”d”cled mitbollt rCf-
erence to n tactical situation, but a combat exercise, wb”W’er
may be the size of the unit e”q,l”yed, should be cO”d”cted under
a” ilSS”“led tactical situnti”“.
367. An effectire “,etb”d of cgndocti”~ :I co”lb2,t cxrrCiSe iS
to ontline the enemy with n few men eg”ippd with flags. The
umpire or inspector ~tntea the sitnation and the commander
lends his troops with due regard to the assumptions made.
changes in the situntion, the re~nlts of reconnaiss”nce, the
character of artillery fire, etc.. are made know” to the co”l-
ma”der mbe” necessary by the ““wire or inspector, wb”, ill
order to observe and influence the cO”d”ct “f the e~erck, E-
mains in rear of the firing line. Prom this position be indicates,
with the aid of “reearmnged signills, the chnrucbzr of We fire
2nd morements iif the hostile infantry. These f3immls arc io-
tended for the me” outlini”g the enemy. These “6” repent the
sienaln: all officers and men engaged in the exerrise ._ nnd in sight
&be~&tlined enemy are thu8 informed “f tba enemy’s action
and the exercise is eonaucted nccordinelv. --
Assistant umpires, abont one for t !RZ”iompany in the firing
linp~ mm n**irt in indicntinz ho?stile fire and m”vement~ and in
ob serrine the conduct of the exercise.
An outlined enemy may be made to attack or d Mend.
stuntions should be sil”,ue UN, natural. rmrh. z or after the
eaereise the umpire or inspedal‘ shouid Cilll llttt?lltiOn t0 ZInY
. imnroner morements or incorrect methods “f ex~“ti”“. H*
w ill prabibit xll moren~ents of ~L’DODSor i”div& MS that wonld

--
 LEbDERSRIP. 97

be im~msible if the enemy wre real. The slnm~~mgrass “f

errnts to be expected on the bi,,tle field can hardly be simulated.
but the umpire or inspector will prerent undue haste nud will
attempt to enforce 3 rensonnbig Shrn rote Of progress.
The fii,“,U exewise PliOllld not be repP:lti’d “TW me sari,,,
ground and under the xme situ:lt,i”u. Snch reDetitiorls lead to
ilie adoption of n tirtvl nmdc of :ttt;,c% or defeuue and develop
“lere drill masters. l+xxl or lre”rr;mgcd systems are pro-
hibited.
LEADERSHIP.
General Considerotians.
358. The art of leadershill consists of nppiying sound tactiml
principles to concrete CBSCSon the battle field.
Self-relinnce, initiative, a~pressivcness, and n conception of
teilmworli are the fnndanx?“tal cll:lraCteriSLiCS Of SllCceSSfUl
leadership.
350. A COPVX? QY,S,, of the situation aud a definite &,,I of
nefion form the soundest bnsis for a ~n~~e~~ful cowbat.
A good plan once ad”,>kd and put into execution &o”,d not
be abandoned unless it bncomes clear that it cm not succeed.
Afterthoughts are dangerous, except as they aid in the execu-
lion of details in ~thc original ph.
30”. C”“lbnts that do “at ,“‘“nii~<~ SUCCESS0,’ 8”“~ real adurn,.
tnge to the general issue should be :,roi,,e,l; they ca”se ,,nneccs
s;,ry lasses, imp;rir the “~“r”le of one’s owl, t,‘““~s, and mis”
t&it Of the enemy.
361. C”r”plicateil mR”C”~-CI‘S al’<> not likely to *“weed in war.
All plans and the methodu ad”,rted for carrying them into
effect must be simple tmd direct.
36% Order aon mK?Pil~” “Iust b,, “,;li”tai”ed within thr units
if SUCCBRSis to be “x,mted.
R63. O,E.cers m~,st sl~nv +hen,‘cIros to be true Icnders. ‘Phev
mmt act in aceordunce with the spirit of their orders nnd m&t
rn,“ire of their t,r”“,is fix strietcst discipline on the field of
battle.
364. The best res,,lts ixrr obinin~u? ‘,,kl lendlcm ,n,ow the
rupncity and traits of those w,,o,r, they eon,,,,and; hence i,,
n,:,hin~ detachments “nits s11”uld not Iw broken I,,,, and n de-
plo~ment that would canse an intermiugling of the larger units
in the firiuf line should be avoided.
9”11ii~ 1-7
9.9
865. Leading is dificolt wile,, troops are deployed. * higIl
degreeOf trt,ining nna discipline ant, the use Of e,useorder for-
llliltions to the f”m& extent possibleare therefore requirea.
360. IU order to lighten tile sercre ~dlysicnlstrain ilmmar-
ame*ronI infmtry servire i” ca”l,lig”, coI,Sti,ntefforts must be
luack to sgare the tr”o,,S “n*ecessi,ry hmlship null fatigue;
but when necessity nrises, tlx iimit of endurance must be ex-
acted.
307. When officers or rue,, bel”llgillg to fig,,ting troops kil”O
their proper phces to carry !xlc*r, or to wre *or, w”u~Klrd dur-
ing me prog*es* of tlIe action, they are guilty “f skulking-. This
<,ffense m”Ft be re,m?ssed Niih the Utmost vigor.
868. The com~hte equipment of the sddier is carried into
l,Ction unless the wenther or the physical condition of the IneIl
renders Such n,Ci,S”*e a severe Ilirrdlship. In ally event, only
the ~,Xk Nil, be hid as&?. The d+Tmninntioll Of this cltues-
tion reStS With the regilllcntnl conmmnnder. The complete
equipment affords to men lying prone conviderable protection
agnimt shrapnel.
300. ‘me post Of the conllllnnder m,lSt be sucll “$3 Will erx1b1e
him to observe the Inx?yess of eeents and to commmlicate his
orders. Subordinate c”mmnnders, in addition, m”St be in
position to transulit me orders Of *“wri”I.s.
Before entering an nctiou the commander should be RS far to
the front as possillie in order that he pa3”rlally InllY *l!e the
situ.?tior,. order the de~loynlent, and begi,, the nction Strictly
in nccordancewith his own wishes.
During LIE action, he must. as R rule, ksilve to me 1ocn1
knders the detailed eonduct of the tiring line, costing himself
either Wit,, his own reserre or in S,Xh n ~WSition that he is iu
constnnt, direct, and ensy comnmnicntio” with it.
h commander takes full and direct charge of his Bring line
Only when the line hiiS absorbed his mllOle cnmmnncl.
when their troops are I.ictorio”s, dl commnnders should press
forward in order to clinch the ndvmtrige gained and to me
their reserves to the tlent advantage.
570. me latitude a,iowet, to <,mers is ill direct ,,ro~mtiOn
to the size Of their eommnnds. Each should see to tk! fe”ePal
exeC”tion of his tnta, leaPing to t,,e wlpel’ Pnbrr4inatru the

1 The sspaeli” ineludes blR”kd, conch”, nnd shelter tent.

 LK4DERSHIP. 99

supervision of details, and interfering only when ndFtakeSare

madethat threnteo to seriousIy prejudice the general plan.
Temmrk.
S’i 1. The compamtivc1ywide fronts of dephpd wits in-
cm3se,the dilikulties of control. Sutxrdintrtes “lust therefOre
be gila gre:rt htitude in the eleculi”” UP,tlleir tasks. TliC
S”Ctx?SB Of the whole depends klrgeiy upon Ilow we,, eacll
subordinateC”“rdi”ilteS lliS N”Tk With the general PlU”.
A glwt responsibility is “cc,w:lrily thrown “I)“” S”b”rdi”Lltcs,
but responsibility stim”lntes tile right kind of an ofiicer.
352. In a given sitnation it is far better to do any intelligent
thing consistent with the agg~ssive execution of the grnerd
plan, til;rn to senrch hesit;,tingly *or tile idea. TlliS is the
tr’ue rule Of conduct *or mburdinntes Wll” are required to act
“PO” tlleir “mu initiative.
A snbordinnte who is reasonably sure aat his intended
action is S”C,l us would be “rderell by the commander. were
me.1atter present nn4 in poSSessi”” Of the facts, bus enorlgll
e”c”“rage”E”t to go nhend c”nflde”tlY. IIt? must possess the
1oyaity to cuTy out the pkLus Of his superior nul the $ecnnesa
to *ecognize and to seize opportunities to iurther the general
**an.
373. Independence must not k!co”le license. I:“gnrdless Of
the number of subordinates who are nmxxrently srl*reme in
their own restricted spheres, tllere is but one hnttle and hut
one snprerne Will to allid, all “lust eonform.
lirery subordinnte “lust tlleref”rP work *or the genel’i,, re-
suit. Ik does au in his power to iusurr cooperation between
the subdivisions under his c”“““n”d. IIf2 tra”SmitS importnnt
lnforn~ntion to adjoining units or to 6uperior‘s in rear and,
mith the assistance Of information received, keeps hi”lse,f nn,,
itis sohordhntes duly postrd as to tllc sit”;rti””
374. When eircmnsttn~crs render it impractifxbio to consult
the authority issuing nu order, olilcera should not hesitate to
KIW from such order when it ia clearly bnsed upon n” incorrect
rim of the sitnation, is impossible of execution, or has bee”
rendered i”lpn,ctic:ilh? “11 ncc”n”t Of Clliirlges Which liare “C-
corred since its promuicatiun. In the npplieatio” of this rule
the resllonsibility for mistakes rest9 upon the subordiuate, but
,“rmil,i”g”ess to as8”“le reS,I”“Sibilitl. on pl’oper “C~‘;lSi”“S is
inriicst,ire Of wen%“Prs.
Snperiore should be wrrfol not to censure au appnrent dis-
oi,cdienre whew the net wns done in the IXover spirit and to
:,rlrance ‘?lv? genernl Pl”“.
476. When the men of two or more uuits intcmirwle in the
firing line, all oflicers and nnw submit nt onto to the senior.
cmcl?rs and pint”“” guides see,< to iill \-ncnucies eanaed by
r;~snal+,ies. Each seizes :x13- opwl.+unity to exercise the fnne-
tiuns consistent With his g1’Bde. cm, nil :icsist in the nminte
Il:,IIce of order and control.
mrry lull in the action RIL”“ld be utilized for as Convlete
restoration of order i” the Rli”Z line :ts the crorlnd or Other
mmditions permit.
Y56. Any Oft&I or ,,oncol,nnissi”“edotliwr who heromrsEPrl-
arat* from his groper unit nnd can not rejoin must nt ouce
,,k,ce ldniseif ;,nd his comnmnd nt the diswsnl of the nearest
tdr,wr commsnder.
‘Anywe having rompkt~d an msiymed task nmst seek to reioiu
his proper command. Failing in this, he should join the near&
troops engaged with the ensxny.
,377. soldiers :!re t;l”dlt tile “wPPSi+)- “f re”lRini”g With
their con~panie8, but those who beconre detnched must join the
~iesrest rompnny and serve with it until the bnttle is over or
rrorgnrdaation is ordered.
Orders.
378. Commands are deployed and enter the comhnt 1,s the
orders of the commnndw to the mdxrdinnte commandam
The initinl combxt orders nf the division are almost invnrinhly
written: those of the brigode are generrUl,y so. The written
order is preferable and is ,,sc~I vhmerrr time permits.
If time r~mmits, subsequent orders are likewise vritten, either
as liPId orders or messngcs.
379. ‘The initial conrh;,t “rdrrs “f rCginlentS 2nd SlnnllPP Il”i,~S
are given w!rtm11y. Fnr this purpo?e the Yubordinntes f”r w,,onr
the orders are intended arc ;asse*nhled, if ~mcticnhlr. nt n plnc”
from which the ni+,,sti”n mrd ~lxr, cnn ho explained.
Snbseqnrnt Orders are rrrtln, or in the form Of verbl, or
written messn~es. T’erbnl mersa~es should not bc mcd ““less
they are short ““d ““mistnkabk?.
 I&WE&SHIP. 101

SW. The initial combat order of my commander or subordi-

nate i8 bamd upon his definite plan for execnting the task con-
fronting him.
Whenever possible the formation of the Dlnn is preceded by
n personal reconunissance of the termin and a careful consid-
eration of all informatiou of the enemy.
381. The combat order gives such information of the enemy
and of neighboring or supparting friendly troops as mill enable
subordinates to u,~derstnnd the situ;,tion.
The general phin of action in stated in brief termn, but
en”“@, of the eo”m,ander’s intentims is divulged to guide the
Subsequent actions of the subordinates.
Clear nnd COnCiSe iuatructions are given 38 to the nction to
be taken in the combat by each part of the eommnnd. In this
mny the commnnder assigns tasks, fronts, objectires, sectors
“P areas, etc., in r?CC”rdanCe with his ~lnn. If tic terms em-
ployed conrey definite ideas and lent-e no loopholes, the conduct
of subordinates mill generally be corresIlo”din~,:ly sntisfz,nctory.
Such miscelhneous matter mhting to specinl troops, trains,
ammunition, and f~ltnre morements of the commander is added
88 concerns the combat itself.
Cod~b:lf orders should grcscribe communication, reconnais-
eance. flank protection, etc., when some special disposition is
desired or when an omimion on the part of B subordinate may
reasonilbly be feared.
382. When issuing orders, a eommande~ should indicate
dearly what is to be done by each subordinate. but not how it
is to be done. He should not encroneb “DO,, the functions of
a subordinate by Drescribinx d&nils of execution ~rdess be ban
good renmn to doubt the ability or judgment of the subordinate,
nnd can not mbstlt”te another.
Although genrrnl in its trrms, an order must be definite and
must bc the expression of a fixed decision. Ambia>ity or
vagueness indicates either vacillation or the innbility to formu-
rate orders.
333. CSUOUY the orders of a commnnder are Intended for.
and are given to, the commanders of tbe next lower units, but
in a” emer~eney n commnnder Should not hesitate to &e orders
dire&y to “ny subordinate. In sneh case he should ,mm~tly
inform the intermcdiote c”mmor&r concerned.
102 C0MB.m EECONNAISSA~CE.
COl7ll7W”iCdiO”.
384. C”mm,,nirnti,,” is mnintainrrl by menn*of staff 00icers,
messengers,relay sgsterns,connectingfdes, visual *igna,s, t&e
gmph, or telephone.
385. The siwa, corps troopfi of the division estllblish lines of
information from dirision to brigade headquarters. The fur-
ther estensio,, of lines of information in combat by signal
troop6 is exeeptionn1.
388. Each regiment, employing its own personnel, is responsi-
ble far the maintenance of ~omm~nieation from the eol”nd
back to the bri,3,ade anA fom’ward to the battalionR For this
purpose the regiment uses tbc various meads which may be
iulnished, it. The &llff m,rl ordlerlies, regimental and battalion,
are practicell in t,re use of these mt!;m9 and in messenger sex-v-
ice. or&?rk?s carry sigml fhlm.
38,. Connection between the liring line and the major or
eolonel is pra~ti~ally limited to the prescribed ilag, arm, and
bugle si~m,s. Other means can only be suy~lemental. Corn-
pany musicians carry company flags and are practiced. in sig-
naling.
388. The artillery genernlly rommunicntcs with the flrinb
line by menns of its own stnff ofBeers or tbrou~b a” a~31t who
accompanies some unit in or near the front. The infnntu
keepY him i,,f”mEl, as t” the sitnntion and aemls him nny
renmnable assistance. when the infantry is dependent “ImB
the artillery far iire support, pxfect eoor$inntiun through this
representiltive is of great importance.

COMBAT R,ECONNAISSANCE.
889. Combat rcconnoissance is of vital impoortnnce 2nd must
not be ne&ctod. ny prover ~,re,iminary rwo,l”ais~‘~~nce, deploy-
ments on wrong lines, or in a wrong direction, and BurpritES
may generally be preventea.
890. Troop* deployed am3 under 0re ear, not Cha”!z iront
and thus they suffer greatly when eniiladed. Troops in close
order formation may *u&r heavy losses in a short time if sub-
jected to hostile iire. In both formations troops must be WC+
tected by proper recounaisaance anll wnmiug.
 COX’BBT BECONx*ISS*NCE.

891. The difBcUltJ- cd rc~!omiaiSsnriw inrrrases in proportion

to the mea~nre~ adv~tcd by the e”emy to ~cree” himself.
The strength of the reconnoitering Party is determilled by the
character of the information desired and the nature of the
hostile screen. I” exq~tio~~;rl wses rls much “s ” b;~ttalio” may
be necesmry in order tu break tbrougb Ihe hostile wree” and
enable the ~omma”der or OIGWP in cbnrge to reconnoiter in
,>n,Tnn
A large reconnoitering party is conducted so as to open the
way for 3nlilll patrols, to smve :ns :I Slip(mrting force or rallying
point for them, and to rereix and tr;~nsrnit information. Such
~“rties maintniu sigrlnl communication with the main body if
wxcticable.
892. Each separate column InOiing forward to deploy must
reeoimoiter to its front and 0a”k and keep in t”“Ch with ad-
jvining C”,llrn”~. The extent Of me reco*,“aiRallce to ttle tlnnlr
depends upon the isolation of the ~01”m”s.
393. Before na nttwk n remmniwnnce most be made to de-
termine the menry’n position, the location of his tla”k8, the
character Of the termin, the nature Of tbr hostile field works,
etc., in order to prevent premature deploloyment and the result-
ing fxtigue and loss Of time.
It will freqnently be “ecessnrg to send formxrd a thin &ir.-
misb line in order to induce the enemy to open fire ““d revcal
his p06ithn.
894. It mill freqmntl~ be im,msihlc to obtain satfsfactory
information until after the action hns hegun. The delay that
may be warmnted for the ~“r~“se of reco”“nissn”ce de,,e”ds
upon the natme of the attack xrrd the “eeessity for promDt”ess.
For cxsm~k, in n meeting engwement, and sometimes i” B
Italding xttnek, the re~onnaissnll~e ,imy have to he hasty and
superfhnl, whereas In an attnck ngainst an enemy carefully
Dwx med for d&me there will generally bc both time and
neomity for th”rO”gb reconnaissance.
3D5. I” defunse, rec”“lliiis8ilrlce mnst be kept up t” determine
the enemy’s line of adrance, to ascertain his di9positio”*, to
..,,. _.~ ..- ~, ~lj~.
prevent his reconPfl~Q~fl~-*~ a**
Patrols or pnrt ies posted to prrrent llnati,e reC”““nis5anCe
sbonld r+iere the ma: i” body of the “ewss~ity of betraying its
Ixmiti”” by 0rinr on m,nll htiulies of the PII~IIIY.
390. Iieco”“nissa”ce CO”ti”“es tlir”“g:1I”“t t!k actiou.
104 FIRE SUPErlIORITY.

A tiring or nkirmish line rnn take cnrr of its front, hut its
Ranks are especially ,~“,“era,,,e to “loder” fK*nrws. The l”orn1
effect of Banking fire is ns great as the p1WhY.l etfect. Hence,
combat 1)atrols to give w:qming or corering cletaebments to give
mxurity are imfis~~e~ssable on exposd flanks. This is equally
true in nttnck or defense.
39,. The fact that cavnlry pntr”ls are ,monn to he ,mtrd
in a certain direction does not relieve infmtry commanders of
the renponsihility for reconnaissance and security.
TO be surprised by au enemy at short range is an un~rdun-
Jlbk oemse.
398. The conrnrnndcr of n battnlion on I flank of a general
me inwrinbly provides fm +,,a “ePcssary reCO”“niSSa”re and
security on that tian!i nnlrss higher authority hm speci6cally
ordered it. In nny went, he sends out combat patrols as
needed.
Where his battalion is on a 0nnk of one section of the line
:md a considerable intend lies between his battalion and the
next section, be makes similar ~rovisian.
398. Battalion conmmndws in tile first line establish ,mtrola
to obwm? and report the progrem or conduet of adjoining
troops when these can not be SCUII.

FIRE SUPERIORITY.

PURPOSE
ANDNATURE.
400. In a decifiire battle *wcess dcqxnds On gaining and
mnintaining fire snper‘imity. Every effort must he made tn k’nln
it enrly and then to keep it.
*ttneking troops must first gain fire superiority in order to
rench the hostile position. Orer open ground irttuek is possible
only when the :,ttilciiiw force bns n decided fire superiority.
With such superiority the nttnrk is not only nos$ible, but SW-
ress is probable and ,vitbo,,t rniuuus I”sscs.
nefendinr +,TOOOScnn nrevcut n ehnree only when they can
“I aster the enemv’~ 0m ind inflict heu6 loss& upon him
401. TO obtain fire mp?riority it is ~~ewssary to p~Iuce n
heavy 7whnne of nccnrnte fire. Every incrense in the ~effectire
ness of the iire mcttns a corresponding decrease in the effective.
ness Of the enemy'* me.
 FIRE SUPEFmmITY. 105

The rolnme and nccnmc~ of fire will denend

_ nnon
. several
eonsiderutions:
(a) The number of rifles employed. On a given front the
greatest volume Of fire is gr”dnc”d by n tiring line hzL”ing o*,y
sntlieieut interv:,lY betwer” ,,~a, to ~,emlit the free “se of Weir
rifles. The n~:~ximnm dmsits~ of a frinr line is therefore nho”t
one “xl” per yard Of front.
Cb) The rote Of fire nfkts its ro1ume; nn excessile rate
redoees its accuracy.
Cc) The character of the target influences both rolurnr nnd
accnmsy. 1.ar.o~~ dimensions, greater visibility, nnd shorter
mnge increase the rate of fire; greater density incmwa the
eff&Tt.
(d) Training and discipline have an impmtant bearing on the
Pate or rolurue of fire, but their wxatest i”d”e”ce is “DO”
SiCC!“r;iCJ’.
The firing dEek?ncy of troorrs is reduced hy fatigue and ad-
verse psychological iifluenees.
(C) fire direction and Ecnfro, inwmre colieetive accuracy.
The importance of tire direciion increnses mpidly with the
range. control exerts a powerful intlucnce nt all mnges.
FIRE DlRECTlDN AND CDNTRDL.

Dpening Fire.

402. Beyond efkctire ranges important resn1ts can be err-

petted only when the target is large and distinct and much
a”mmitir 1^ --1
L”“~-ran :gc dre is permissible irr mrsuit 0” accmmt of the
“lam-effect of any 0re nuder the CirC”“lSta”CeS. *t other
times finch fire is of dmbtful value.
408. I” “ltxk, IhU desire 1” open flue wile” 1osses are first
felt mnst be rerxessed. Considerations of time, tam&, mm”-
nition. and morale wake it ilullerntive that the nttnck withhold
if- firi and press forvrard to :I first 0ring position clove to the
enemy. The nttncker~s target will be smaller and fainter than
the one he presents to the enemy.
404. In defense, nmre mmunition is avnilnble, rnnges are
more easily determined, and the enemy “sunlly presents a larser
target. The defender mny therefore “ye” fire and eqc.3 results
106 FlaE SUPERIOBITY.

at longer ranges than the attncker, and pnrticularly if the de-

fcllders intend a delaying nctiun wkly.
If the ellenl~ llils x ~,O\verflll artillery, it will often ix? best for
tile defending infmtry lo withhold its fire nnti, the ene,uy offers
a SpLwzially fnvornhle target. Vig”rous Rlld we,,-directed bllrsts
of fire are then em,,loyed. ‘rbe troow should therefore be
piven I,* much aPtieCii,l ,lPOtCction RS time and nlennY Permit,
;mrl :,t ill, nFrePd signal expuse themselres as nl”Cb as neeessnry
llild OrEn fire.
‘Lotr. I,, UnrxprctmL Cl”%? enrounters il great advnntwc ac-
trues to the side which first owns rapid and accurate fire with
battle sight.
“se of Ground.

408. The pOsitiOn Of thE firers nIllEt afford n SllitBble fldd

Of fire.
The ground should Kermit constant observation of the enemy,
a,&,$ ennble the men to secure some cover when not nctunlly
~rdo,,s whcme tar& is for the moment hidden by unfavorable
&w,und, either move forward to better !gound or seek to exK”te
er”Ss fre on another target
407. The likelihood of a tarfct being bit de~nds to II great
extent “non its visibility. By skillful USC of !To”nd, a firing
line may reduce KS visibility Fitho”t loss Of fire *ower. my
lines are wrticulnrly to be nroided.
Choice ot Target.

408. The target chosen should be the hostile troolrs mast

d,,“~em”s to the firers. These will u6ually be the nearest bos-
tile infantry. When no tnrget is S,leciallg dangerous, that one
should be chosen which ,mn~ise~ the most hits.
409. Frequent changes of klrget imwir the flre efkct. Fan-
don, changes to small, unimyortnnt targets inr~~,ir fire discipline
and sceo”qlish nothing. Attention should be con13~~I to the
main tar@ until snbstantii,, reason for change is :,,qm’e”t.
410. An “~,mrt,l”ity to dP,i\-er R:,nking flrc, es~,ecinlly ngxinst
:;rtillery.pratected in front b”T shields, is an evnmple wzwxlnt-
ing change Of tnrget atId FlMUid nmer be Orer‘loOBed. SUCb rlre
demoralizes the troops subjected to it, even if the losses in-
 FIRE SUPEFmmITY. 10,

flicted arc S”,rill. ,n this InRnllcr a relatively SrnsLll number Of

rifles Cilll produce imp”Ptmt results.

The Range.
411. Beyond close rawe, the correct setting of the rear sight
is of primary import?nce, provided the troops ire trained and
wel, in band. The necessity for correct sight setting iucreases~
rapidly with the mn~e. Its im,~“r+an~e decreasc~ S,R the q”alit,
Of the troops decrease, for tbc error in sigllt setting, excq1t nos.
sibly at very long ranges, becomes “nimgorta”t when compared
with the error in holdhg and aiming.
412. In attack, distances must “s”nlly be estimated and car-
reetions made “9 errors are observed. Mechnnicnl range finders
and ranging “alleys are ~racticabie at times.
In defeuse, it is @x,erally ~mcticable to mens”re more ace”-
rate& the distnncea to Yisible objects and to keep B record oft
them for future “Se.
Distribution ot Fire and Twget.
4 13. The purpose of fire wwriority 18 to get hits whenever
possible, but nt all events to keeg down the enemy’s tire and
render It hnrmless. To accomplish this the target must be cov-
ered with fire throughout its whole extent. Troo~pn who are not,
fired upon will fire with nearly peace-time acc”mcy.
The target is roughly divided and u part is assigned to ekeh
unit. No part of the txget is “eglected. In nttack, by B system
of orerlapping in assigning targets to platoons, the entire hostile
line can be kept under fire even during LL rush.
Observation.
414. The correctness of the sight setting and the distribution
of fire “WI the target car, be ~erifled only by card”1 observa-
tion of the target, the ndjacat ground, and the e&ct upon the
enemy.
415. Observntion “nl:~ can determine wbetber the tire fight
1s being properly conducted. If the enemy% fire is losing in
nce~racy and effect, the observer renlizes that his side is gaining
superiority. If the enemy’s tire remnim or becomes effective
and persistent, he realizes that corrective measures are neees-
sary to increase either ~ohme or accuracy, or both.
108 FIRE SUPERIORITY

Discipline.

416. Discipline makes good direction Rlld COntrOl DOI(Si?ie

and is the distinguishing runrk of trnined trO”DS.
417. The discipline necessary in the firbig line will b” nbsent
“nles~ otficrrs and noncommissioned “ttiee~~ can mnk” *ML’
Will known to the men. In the company, tbeK!f”re, c”““n”lllc~~
*ion must h” ,ry Simple Signals which, in the roar of mnske*rY,
will attract the attention nnd convey the correct IUenniW.
Expenditure of Ammunition.
418. 1n nttaek the supply is more limited than ia defense.
Better judgment must be exercised in expenditure. Ordinarilp.
tr”“pS i,, the firing liD0 of :,n attack can not expect to bare
that day mm nmmuuition than they carv into me combaf.
except sueb additions as come from the distribution of ~mlll~nl-
tie,, of dead and won,,ded and the sur,~lus brought by rein-
forcenlents.
419. When a certnin tire effect is required, the necesary
ammunition must be expended without hesitation. Several
hours of firing mny be necessnry to gain tire sUperi”ritS’. TI’W
economy can ho pvcticed only by closing “IL the enemy befoya
first owning tire nnd thereafter sus,mding fire when there 1s
““thing to shoot nt.
S”pparti”g Artilh~.

420. Artillery tire is the prhcipal aid to the infantry in gain-

ing nnd keepiug tire superiority, not only by it8 hits, but by the
morn, otTect it ,n’odueea on the enw~.
421. In attack, artillery assists the forward morement of the
infxntry. It keeps down the fire of the hostile artillery and
meks to neutralize the hostile infantry by inflicting losses won
it. destroying its morale, driving it t” couer, and preventing it
frown using its weapons effectirely.
111 defense, it ignares the hostile nrtillery wbe~ the enemy’s
,att;uzlc reaches a decisire stew and assists in checking the nt-
tack, joining its tire power to that of the drfendinp infantry.
422. Troops should be nrcustomed to being fired OYW by
friendly artillery and imm’essed with the fact that the artillery
should continue firing upon the enemy until the last ““aAble
 DEPZOYXENT. 109

moment. The few cnmalties remking from shrapnel borsting

*ho** nre trifling com~nred with *bow ?hRt wollld result from
*be iorre:xsed etTec*irencss of *be enemy’s infantry tire we*e the
friendly artillery to ceme fiting.
Cnnnnlties indicted by sumo~+i”p a*tilk?*y are not probable
““tit the optr*sing infnrrtry linw are tells thn” 20” pwd~ apart.
428. When the distance between the hostile i”fa”t*y lines
becomes PO short ns to ,vude* furtber “SC of friendly a*tille*y
inadrisable, the comm:mde* of the infmrtly ti*iug liw, “si”p a
u*eco”ce*ted simnl,’ i”fo*ms the 3*tilie*y commnnder. The
lntter umnlly increases *be rancc in order to impede the
strengthening of the enemy’s forfmost line.

Fim of Position.

424. Infantry is mid to execute tire of rlosition rbe” it is

posted so as to assist an nttnek by tiring “ICPI the Irends. or off
the flank, of the attacking troolm n”d in not itself to ennpage in
the ndrancr; or when, in defame, it is ~imilurly posted to aug.
ment the fir12 of the main firing line.
Machine guns set-w n like pu*r~ose.
In R decisive action, fire of position should be employed when.
ever the terrain permits n”d *ese*re infantry is available.

DEPLOYMENT.

425. T~OOPB are “ulssed rnwxwatory to deployment when

the nature of their drpilogment cm not be foremen a* it is
desirnble to shorten the co,“m” 01‘ to clear the *“ad. Otherwise,
in the deployment of large commands, mbetber i” m;t*eb eol-
unm, in bivouac, a* nmssed. n”d whetbc* forming for attack
or for defense, they are o*dbm*ily fi*st fondled into a li”e of
columns to facilitate the extension of the front Drier to de
playing.
The rough lint or lines of colmnns thus formed ennble ~*OOI)S
to take nilvantage of the terr:~in in ndr:,“cing and Sho*te” the
time occupied in fomrinp *be firing line.
420. In deploying the dirisio” cneh brigade is a~sig,,ed n
d&mite task a* objcctiw. 0” rcxeipt of his orders, the brignde
1 Tvilh n 4-foot Whlk B”d red *eSimental signnl flag.
 DEPLOYXIEBT.

commander conducts his brigade in column or in line of regi-

mcnts until it is advisable thut it be broken into slllaller
cohmns. ne then issues his order,,zmigning to ench regiment
its task, if gmcticnble. lu il si mihlr n,tmner the regimental
commanders lead theil. r~eiments forward in coiumu. UT in line
Of eolllmns, until thr ? tiliw arrires for iswinE the re&V3hll
order. It is seidom ndrisable to break “,I the battalion before
issuing orders for its de ploymnt.
A*<
_-.. mch
-.. suborditx~te cor~~mder, after receiving his order
for the act.v.., ion rhn,,id
--._.. ... . . . -. ~~~
~nrcw<ln his commnnd as f.ar 8s vossible.
in “rdcr to reconnoit cr the grou”d personally, and shokd We-
Dare to issue his orders “r”lwtlY.
488. Each commnrrde~ of a column dire& the new 3sary
rc!c”nnf&%ance to frm+ and Hnnli: hu this 111(1~115and bR a
judtcioun choice of 61:ound he guards against surprise.
489. The “remntll re f”r,“ation of the firing me causes “n-
necessary Ggue and 10as of time, and may res”lt in a faUlty
dirbction
direction being taken ‘TL‘OOPSOnceonce de,,l”yed Inah” even minor
chmges of direction with ditticulty, and this didiculty increases
with the length of t,--1e ““L’.~ a-:.‘- IIUC.
<:..-
430. In the large P‘ units, when the original deployment is
found to be in the wrong direction, it will usually be nec”SsArg
to deploy the reserve on the Co.-.? rt front and withdrn!” and
assemble tbc ! “IXL ^~~~_ llI,V.
II~~~
431. To Lrain decisive results. it will genernlly be necessary
to u*e all the troops nt some star2 of the combr&. R”t il 0 the
beginntng, while the situntinn
tbe situation is uncertain care should be
taken not to engage too largP :n _..I~~~~~~~~ “PONl -tion of he command. On
the other hand, there is nc , _ereater errall thnn to emPloy too
few and to saeriflee them by dribleta
432. When it is intended to fight to a decision, fire s”wri-
ority is essential. To gilin this, tWC, tlli ngs am necessnry: A
hrarm
__I.I ,?ro
.._ 2nd -..- n ‘~PP -.. ,x4l directed’ and controlled. Ruth of
these me best obtained when the firing line is ns dense as prae
ticnble. while leaving the men room for the free “se Of their
rifle.
If the men are to” widely se,xwated, directi”” and control
are very difBieu,t, often impossible, and the intensity of fire is
*light in pmportion to the front occupied.
438. In an attack or stubborn defense the firing Iin” should
have n density of one man per yard of front “ccupiel.
 DEPLOYXEBT. 111

Where the tactical situntiou demands the holding of a liue

too long to be “ccuj~ied througboot xt this density, it is gen-
erally better to deploy eompmies or gk~toons nt one man per
yard, learing gaps in the line brtmeeo them, than to distribute
the men uniformly nt incrcnsed intervnls.
484. A rehtively thin tiring line may be employed when
merely covering the morements of other forces; when on the
defrnsire sg:,inst poor tro<,,m; when the final nctiorr to be taken
has not yet been determined; and, in general, when fire superi-
ority iR not nece*s;,ry.
435. The length Of the Bring line that the whole force may
u”Pl”Y de,xr”ds “pan the density of me me and the s*,ength
in ma- required b.” the situation.
Swports nnd riserves constitute the strength in rear.
In a decisire nttnck they should be nt least strong enough to
replace a heavy loss in the original firing line xndmd to increase
the chllr~inl:
charging line to a densitv
density of at lenfit least one and on+hn,f
one-half men
per yard and still hare tr”o,ls in rear for protection nd fox
and .
the Other! purposes mmtioned ahoE.
436. In the original deployment the stmngth of the reserve
held out by each conroxander com,rises from one-sixth to t,vO-
thirds of his unit, depending utlon the nature of the service
enpccted of me reserve.
a small force in a cowring or delaying action requires very
little strength in retm, vhile a large force fighting a de&ire
battle requires unlch. ‘Therefore, depending upon circumstnnees,
the original denloyment, inclllding the Gtrength in mu!, may
VBI’Y from 1 to 10 men ,,er yard. Against an enemy poorly dis-
ciplined and trained, or lacking in morale, a thinner deployment
is ,X?rmimib,e.
437. The density of the whole deD,oyment increases with the
size of the eommnnd, bemuse the larger the command the
g-renter the necessity for reserves. Thus, n battalion acting
alone “my attack wiih tw” me” per yard of front, but a regi-
mcnt, ,,‘ith three bnttillions, nlny only double the front of the
one battalion.
43% By the assignment of division8 or larger units to ,mrts
of a line of bottle 6evera1 miles long, 3 Series of semi-independent
battle, or loci!, combut, districts are crcated.
The geuem, deployment for n long line of battle c”ml)rising
several battle districts is not directly considered in these regula-
112 xcTBCI(.

tiom. The deployments trcnted of herein are those of the infan-

try within such district&
The density of deployment in these districts may vary greatly,
~dependlirrg upon the nctirity exrwtrd in each. Within tlle~e
battle district*. 36 well its in smaller forces acting alone, parts
of the line temporarily of less im~ortmce may be held wenkly.
in order to ecowmize ts”“,n md to have more nt the decisive
point.
439. The front that a unit may owu~y when de,,l”y”d de
liends also “,,on wh”ther its t,iln,<s nr” secured. If both flanks
RN swnrrd bv other troorm the unit mav increase its front
“mtei’inm bY reducinp it; I%em! or su,;ports. If OlllY one
tknh is io s&red, the frwt wily still be svmewhat i”crc=3d.
but t,he exposed flmk must bc gmrded by !iosting the SllliDOrts
or reserve tow?lr< 1 L1-1 II--*-
LLUL 1111,111.
Nilt”ra1 “bstilc les that secure the flanks hare macticnlly the
8ame affect upon deployment.
440. Exc‘q,t when USS~,DII”I, SWSU~~,I”~~S 01’ resprve, re&“e”t~
in the brignde, Iratkulions in the regixuent, and corupanies iu the
bnttniion arc, whrn nmrticnblc. de,,,oved side bv side.
44 1. I” t,K! Cle”,“s,“e”t. bnttnll”““s estnLl1isir the firing me,
each f”rniShing its okn swwrt.
In en& uuii larger th;rn the battalion a reserre is held Out,
Its strength dqwwline ,I”,,” ?il-c,,“,stan~“s. In eenernl. the
reserve is emplo> ied bv the commander to meet or ik,ir”v~ eon-
ditions brought about”by the action of the firing liner It must
not be t”” weak or to” Wit w. It must be posted where the
eonmrnnder believes it will be “ceded for decisive action, or
where he desires to Ibrinr about such nction.
-~ -~ ~~~jl ~~~
When neeessar~.
put* Of it n?““i~ >rco or ,,rolong the til’i”,rr line

ATTACK.
442. An attack is bound to succeed if fire superiority is
mined and w’qwly used.
To gain this sn,,eriority gmxally requires that the attack
em,O”y moro rides than the dffeme; this in turn rne~UX? a longer
line, us both sides will probably hold n StPonC firing line.
443. With large forces, B direct frontal nttnclr piv”s the
attilccker little opportunity to hi,,g more rides t” bear. How-
ever, if the enauy is unduly extendrd, a frani*, attack may give
very decisire results.
 ATT!LCil. 113

444. Oming to the diflicultp of control znd the danger of the

guts being defented in detail, wide turning movements are seb
d”“l siiolvable meept in kmge forces.
444. If the attack can be so direct& tmt, while the front
is covered, sumthor fraction of the c”nmxlnd strikes a flank
mote or less “blic$x?ly (lx” emeloping attack) the admntages
gained nre a longer line and more rifles in action; also n co*-
verging fire opposed to thk enonly’s direrginn fire.
440. An envelo~“,~“t of both Uanks sbonld never be attempted
without a very decided suw?ri”rily in nnmb”rs.
447. The onwloging attack vill nemly nlways resnlt Iomlly
in n frontal ntt;xk, for it will be met by the enemy’s reserve.
The a,lva”tR~e Of en~el”*lne”t lies in the lower concentric line,
with its ~rq,“ndernnee of rifles and its c”urer&~.q Ore.
448. Coo~emtion between the frontal and envel”~in~ nttacks
is essential to SUCC~SR Ilotb should be pushed rigomusly and
simultaneously, and ordinnrily b”th sbo”ld m”w simultoneonsly
to the dmme: but at the fnlll StaCe of the attack C”mmi”“Y
rnn~ sometii~ei ,mmant one in charging while the other s”,v”L.~B
it with fire.
The enrelommnt of a Bnnlr is brmxht about with diT3iiculty
when made by troops alrsndy deployed in another directi””
or by their mserves. The t\m~ attacks should be deployed nt B
suitable rlistnnee arm% with the lines of attack eonvergin: in
*ear Of me hostile Tx)sition. The troops t,,l\t llx to nvl,ie the
enveloping attnck should deploy in the proper direction nt the
start and should be ~ireu orders wbieh enable them t” ~&in
their noint “f deDl”Ymwt in tilt m”St direct nrld nmctical

The enveloping ntiack is generallymadethe stronger, es-

necilllly in nmnll forces.
DEPLOYMENT FOR ATTACX.
449. Where “*en terrain ebp”SeS troops to hostile armerJl
iire it “lay h” neccsswy (” “Jake the de~loynrent 2 rnikS or
“l”X from the h”s+i,e ,mition.
The foreground shoulcl be teml)“mrily “ml,,ied hp covering
troops. If the encmy omq,ies the f”l’eler”“na with detnrhments,
the cmeriny tr”“,n mmt drive them buck.
450. To enable large forces t” gilin gr”ll”d towmd the enemy,
It may sometimes be ehenper au.3 quiclier in the rnd to more we,,
G”d1ii~-,:L4
 114 BTTACR.

forward anri to denlog tit night. In snch case the al?% in Which
the d”~,,oy,uent ia to be made ehuuld, if Practicable, be oceu,,ied
by covering troops before dlnrk.
The dejiloyment mill be mode with freat ditficulty unless the
ground has been sludirrl by daylight. The de~,loyment @n8
little unless it establishes the firinr line well witbin effective
range of me enemy;s lunin position.‘ (See Night O,Emti”ns.,
431. Each miit assigned a task derhoys when on its direction
line, or opposite its objective, mid when it has no longer SUB-
dent rowr for advancing in close ardor. In the f~rinx line,
intends of 25 to 60 ~nrds shooid be maintained as long as
,msible beiween bottaliuns. In ibe larger units it may be nec-
vssitry to indicnte on the map the direction or objective, but to
battalion commnnders it shouid be yointed ““t on the ~ro,,nd.
452. The re~crvc is liq,t near enough to the firing line to be
on hand nt the decisive stage. It is wsted with reference to
the attack, or to that ~,art “f the attacking line, from ,~hic,, the
greater results are expected ; it is also charged with Bnnk pro-
tection, but should be kept intacl.
Suwxts are considered in garagmphs 225 to 223, inclusive,
and 238 to 302, inclusive.

ADYANCINO THE ATTACK.

45% The tiring line “lust “rdinnrily advance n long distance.
before it is justified in opening fire. It can not combat the
euemg’s artillery, and it is at n disadvantage if it combats the
defender’s long-range rifle tire. Henee it ignores both and, by
taking full advantage of cover nnd of the discipline of the
troom. advances to n first firinr msition at the shortest rmeeI~
Dossible.
Formntions for crossing this zone with Ihe minimum loss are
considered in naragrnphs 212 to 220, inchsire. These and “tber
methods of crossinfi such zones should be studied and pmctieed.
45s. The best ~rotrction agaimt lam while ndvaneing is to
escape the enemy’s view.
455. Each bntttllion finds its own firing ~“eition, conforming
to the general advance ns long ns grncticnble and taking nd-
vantnm of the more advanced mdti”u of an adjacent bnttalion
in order to gain ground.
The pmition from mhirh the attnclr ngens fire is further eon-
. sidered in yaragrnphs 364 t” 303, incI”sive.
 *TT*CK. 116
cb
4.56. It will frequently become nwessnry~ &r infantr? maring
to the nttnclr to pass through deployed art ~3.y. T,r,s should
be done so us to interfere as little as Ixissible ,
fire, xrrd never so iis to cause tl!nt fire to cease ent +%!! ‘g$
as pmcticablc, ndmn!nce should b” txkcn of interr. s
line, if sly. An understanding betwccil artillery nud in%+;
r”“““““ders sho”ld be bad, SO ns to effect the m”veme,,t to he
best ndvxntnge.
457. In ndrancing the nttnck, adr;rnccd elements of the firing
line or detachments in front of it should not olr”n fire excice~~t
in defense or to clear the forecroond of the enemy. Fire a,,
the hostile main position 6hou1d not be opened until all or neerly
all of the firing line CLUI .joiu in the fire.
TXE ,=,RE ATTACK.
458. at the first firinx position the ntfack reeks to gain fire
superiority. This may necessitate a steads. nccurate fire for R
lone time. The object is to subdne tbz ehemyk fire and keep
it subdued N) that the attacking troo~ls may xdrance from this
mint to a favoreble nlnee near the enemy from mhirh the
charge “rxy be made. -Henc”. fin the :&;& h;<,&;-s-s,;%:
Cient rifles must be Ire@ conC,,,t,y in action to keer, do,& the
e”WW’S fire; this determines the size of the fraction rushing.
4.59. To advance ,.,it,mW fire s,n,~ri”rit~ neninat II a.+,~.
mined defense would result in such losses as to bring the at-
tack to n &end&ill or to make the a,,parent success barren of
results.
460. Diminution of the enemy’s fire and a pronounced lass in
effectiveness are the surest signs that fire superiority has been
gained and that a part of the firing line can ndv:mce.
461. The mm must be impressed with the fact that. havine
made a considerable advance under fire and ha&p been
checked, it is suicidnl to turn back In daylight.
If they can advxnce no farther, they must intrench and bold
on until the fall of darkness or a favorable turn in the situation
dfTc4”“S~
Intrenching is resorted to “nly when necessary. Troops who
have intrenched themselves under Bre are moved forwrrd again
with difIiculty.
482. Supllorts and reserves occupying i~~t~encbments vacated
by the firing line should imrrove them. but they mnst not be
held back or diverted from their true missions on this aeeount.
:I6 *TT*CK.

408. Poragmphs 3CO to 31i, inclusive, deal rmrc iu detail

With me eonduct Of the iire attack.

THE CHARGE.

464. Fire SllPeriority hrnt,s dOrOn the enemy’s tire, destroys

his resistance and morale, and nx~bles the nttaeking troops to
close on hill,, but an :act,,n, or ttm?;,,ened occupntion Of his posi.
tion is nuedw1 to drive him out and defunt him.
The ps~-ctmlogicill moment for the charge ciln not be deter-
mined fur in ndmnee. ‘The tactical instinct of the re~pmsibk
oBiicer m”st decide.
465: The d&xders, if suhj~~gnteil by the fire atti~clr, win
frew?rrtlJ Pare before tlie charge begins. On tllc other hmld,
it may he necessnry to cany the fire ilt~tack close to the pu’sition
ma f”ll”rn it up with a short d;lSh and n baplet combat.
Hence me distnnce over which the charge may be made mil,
VBIJ betweun wide limits. It rnny be *mm 25 to 400 yards.
The charge should he made nt the earliest moment that
promises s,,cceGs ; Otherwise the fun advmtape Of victory Will
be lost.
466. The conlmnnder of the nttncking line should indicate
his approval, or gire the order, before the charge is made.
Subordinate cornmandelers, “6unlly batfalion commanderrs, whose
troop8 are ready to dlargc signal that fact to the commander.
It may be neces83ry for them to malt until other battaliona or
other parts of the line are ready or until the necessnry reserves
arrive.
At the signnl for the chnrge the firing line and nenr-by sup-
~otis and reserves r”sh forwnrd. Spe ~nrafri,~bs 318 and 319.
me ctlargc is made Simu1tnne011sly, if pmibk, by a,, the
units paartieip7lting therein. but, once committed to the nssnult,
battalions should be ~usbed with the utmost vigor and no re-
str:rint plaed on the ardor of chug-iug troops by an attemgt to
,uaintain alignment.
467. Before orderhe the chxrze the commander sho”ld see
that enough troops are 011 hand to make it n SIICC~BS. IKE;,,
reserves ,joining the firing line in tilne t” pmticipate in the
chnr~e 61~ it a Ytroug impetus. Too d&se n EI~YS should be
ZlV”idti.
 ATTACK. ,117

488. The line should be strengthened by prolongAion, if prac-

ticilble, ilna remaining troops kept in formntion for future use:
but rstber iban tbi~t the ntt~k should ml, the last formed
.hody wiil he sent in, unless it is rery aggarent that it can do no
g00cl.
460. To nrrive in the hostile position mith a rei-y compact
firing m ana a few fclrmea s~pport3 is mifiekht for a victory,
but an nrlaitionnl force kept ~~11 in band for pursuit is of inesti-
mable wlue.
470. h premnture charge by a Dart of tbe line should he
avoided, but if begun, the other parts of the me shuia join at
once if there is any nn3sI)c.t of success. maer excegtionill
conditions D pnrt bf the line may be compelled to cbnrge with-
out a”th”rity from the rear. ~h.2 intenti0n t0 do SO shoda
be dgnaka to the rem.
471. Confidence in their abUts to use the bayonet si”es the
assaulting troops the promise Of success.
472. If the enemy bns left the nosition when the Chug-ing
troops reach it, the latter sbould~ onen n ranid fire upn the
retreating enemy, if be is in sight. It is not advisable far the
mixed and disordered llnits t0 follow him. except to advance
,to,arxvonble firing ysition or to cover the reorganization of

4 73. The nearest formed bodies nccomynn~ing or following

the charge are sent instnntly in pursuit. Under corer of these
troops order is restored in the charging line. If the engturea
position is part “f a genera, line or is an arl1.ancti post, it
should be intrenched nna occupied nt once.
The exhnustion of officers and men muit not CBUS~ the neglect
of Inensures to meet a C!ounterattnclt.
474. If the attack receives n temgorary setback and it is
intended to strengthen ana continue it, oficers will make every
effort to stop the renrmnra mownrent aad Wiil reestnblisb the
Rring line in a covered position as close a8 pos&ble to tbo
enemy.
476. If the attack must he nbnndoned, the rearward move-
ment sh0dd c0ntinUe with promptness dil the troops reach B
feature of the terrain thnt facilitates the ti~sk of checking and
reorganiaing them. The point Selected should be so fnr ‘to the
i-ear as to wevent interference by the enemy before the troons
WC ready to resist. The withdrawal of the. attacking troops
 118 ATTACK

should be cowrcd by the artillery and by reserres, if my are

SlTZlil~bl~.
See Xigbt Oliemtions.
PURSUIT.
478. To reap the fall fruits of rictory n vigorous gormit
must be made. The natural indination to be sntisfied with a
mlCCCSSf,,, charge nmst he “Ter<!“me. me enemy mnst be a,-
lowed no more time to reorgnnizc than is ,msitircly nnavoidable.
477. The part of tb” rcsarre tb:,t is still formed “P is best
under control is sent forward in ~w-~~it and rigornusiy attacks
the enemy’s main body or corering ~letilcbnlrnts.~hererer found.
The artillery delivers a L-envy fire “,,“I, the retrenting enemy;
the disordered atta~ki”~ tr”“1is soc”re the ~“sition. nro”l,,t,y
re-form, and become a new reserre.
478. 1e the enptorea position is a section “f the genera, line,
the breach should be hewily aecu~ied, made wider, nod strongly
sawed by arming on all reserres in the aieinity.
479. After the pursuit from the immediate battle field, PUP
suit by parallel roads is es~eeially &&ire where large eom-
mnnds are cancerned.
480. Artillery ma cavalry nre I-cry ef&ctire in pursuit.
A TTACX or= FclRTIFICAT,clNS.

481. Rem’ modiffcntions ent,er into the problem of attncking

fortbications. Such as are to he considered relate chiefly to the
greater time and hhor of aava”eing, the m”r” frequent o8e “f
darkness nnd the use “f bnnd Sremdes to nugment the fire.
482. If the enemy is Str”“gly f0mka alla time uemt8, it
my be advisable to wait ma a~~rancb the ebnrging Boint under
cover Of dBrkness. The nccr53snry reP”llnnisSnnCe ana armnge-
ments shmld he made before dark. If the charge is not to be
made at one”, the troops intrench the advanced position, wing
sand bags if nrcessnrp. Before daylight the fOreground ShO,,,d
be cleared of obstacles.
483. If the distance is short ma other conditions are favor-
able, the ehnrw may be me& without fire p,re,,arotion. If
made, it should be launched with spirit and Suddenness nt t,he
break of day. (See NiCht Operations.)
484. m siege Opewions tr00ns BOO USU~IIY advanced t0 the
charging paint by samin& This method, however, ~resugaoses
 DEFENSE. 119

that an early victory is not necessary or that it is clearly

inadvisable t” nttemnt more direct methods.
XOLDlNG ATTACX.

485. The holding nttxck must be vigorous enough to hold

the enemy in ,,ositio” and must lirese,,t a frout strong en”“@,
to conceal the secondary niltwc of the attack.
The holdinz attack need hnve comgaratively little strength
in rear, but conceals the fact by a Bring line nat distinguisb-
able from that of a decisive nttaek.
486. SuPPOrts a”d reserves are kent at short distances.
Their strength is 1”~s if the object is merely to hula the enemy
fast tbnn if the object is, XI addition, l” compel him to “~2 up
Pesewes.
487. Holding attacks nhich may Inter develop into de&i””
attacks should be c?rres~onding,y strong in rear.
488. All feint sttneks Should eml~loy dense firing lines. Their
weukuess is iu rear alid is concealed.

DEFENSE.
POSITIONS AND INTRENCHMENTS.

489. The first requirement of a good Dosition is B clear Bela

of Are ana Piew to tbe front ana exgosed dxnks t” B aistane”
Of 600 to 800 yards or more. The length of front shauld be
suitable to the size of the commnud and the flanks should be
secure. The position should have lateral communication ana
cover for s”,,ports and reserves. It should be one which the
enemy can not avoid, but must attack or give up his mission.
A position having all these ndvantnges will rarely, if ever, be
found. The “ne should be taken which conforms closest to the
descrir,tion.
490. The natural cover of the yosition should be fully util-
ized. In :rddition, it should be strengthened by Beldw”rks ana
obstacles.
The best protection is afforded by deep, nnrow, ineonspicu-
aus trenches. If little time is available, as much z18 practicnhle
must he done. That the fieldworks may not be needed should
not cause their COnYtrUctiOU to be omitte.d, and the fact that
 123 DEFENSE.

they have bee" constructed SllOUld not i"nne"co the action Of a

c"mma"der, if conditions are f"""d to be "tiler man ex,rec!cted.
481. When time and troops are available the pre$nmtio”~
inclwjc the neccs~ary comnunicntiue and cover trenches, head
cover, bombproofs, etc. The fire trenches should be well SUD-
plied with nmmunition.
The s”pp”rts are p1ncea close at hand 1” COV‘ZPtrenelles when
“ntw;\l cover is not nrailnble.
492. Dummy trenches frequent1y cause the hostile artille*y
to waste time and ammunition and to divert its Bre.
49s. me location, extent, prolm, garrison, etc., Of fle,dm”rks
8~ nniters to bc decided by the iufoutry commanders. Omxrs
must be able to choose ground nnd properly intrench it. (See
Intrenchments.)
494. I” conlbnt exercises, when it is impracticable to co”-
*truct the tPe”ches nggroprinte to the exercise, their! trnce “lay
be outlined by bnyonets, sticks, or other markers, and the re-
sponsible otlicers required to indicate the profile selected,
method and time of construction, garrisons, etc.
DEPLOYMENT FOR DEFENSE.

495. The density of the whole deployment depends “,,o” the

exp,ected sererit~ of the nction, the clmracter of the e”mp, the
ronmion Of the flnnlts, the field of fire, the terrain, n”d the
available artificial or natural grotectio” for the troops.
498. If exposed, the firing line should be as dense in defense
88 in attack. If the tiring line is well intrenched and has a
good field of fire, it may be made thinner.
Weaker supports “re ,mmissiblr. For the 6mne number of
tr”“,,s the front owll~ied 0” the defensive “my therefore be
lower than on the offensive, the battalions ,~lnci”g more com-
panies in the firing line.
497. If it is intended only to delny the memy, 3 fairly strong
deployment is SlHiicient, b”t if decisire results nre desired, a
ehsnge t,o the offensire must be eo”te”qmted and the corre-
Sgonding strength in Pear prorided. This drength ia in the
reseme, which shodd be “s laree ns the dernuods of the firing
line and support.3 permit. Even in a gnssive defense tl~e re.
serve should be as strong as in the attack, unless the Banks “rc
rxotected bg other mean.%
 DEFENSE. 121

498. Supporttli are Iwsted as c1”se to the firing line as ,,r~cti-

cable and reinforce the htter ncordin~ to the rrinciyks ex-
plained in the attack. When mturnl cover is not sutiicient for
the purpose, communicating and c”ver trenches are constructed.
If time does not Kermit their construction, it is better to begin
the action with a wry dense firing line and no immediate sup.
ports than to have B”PI)“rts greatly ergosed in rear.
499. The re8er”e fillould he yosled 8” as to be entirely free
to act as R whole, according to the developments. The distance
from firing line to reserve is generally gPeltl?* than in the at-
tack. By reason of such a location Ihe reserve is best able t”
meet a hostile e”velo,hg attack; it has a better ~“sition from
which to make a counter attack; it is in a better position to
cover n withdrawal and yermit X” orderly retreat,
The distnnce from firing line to reserve increases with the
size of the resene.
600. When the situation is no longer in doubt, the Cserve
should be held in rear of the flank which is mast in danger or
offers the best apportunity for counterattack. Usually the same
flnnk best suits bat,, ,,ur~~oscs.
501. In excePtiona cases, on broad fronts, it may be neces~.
saly to detach a Imrt of the reserve to protect the “DQOGite
Bank. This detachment should be the smallest consistent with
its pnrely protective mission.
502. The commander assigns to subordinates the front to be
occupied by them. These, in turn, subdivide the front among
their next lower units in the firing line.
503. An extended position is so divided into sections that
each has, if practicable, B field of fire naturally made distinct
by the terrain.
Unfavorable and unimaortnnt ground will ordinarily cause
gSpS to exist in the line.
504. The size of the unit occupying each section depends
upon the latter’s natural strength, front, and impin-tmce. If
practicable, battalions should be kept intact and assigned as
““its to sections or parts of sections.
505. Where important dead space lies in front of one section
an adjoining sectiun shuld be iustrt~ted to CO\W it with fird
The” necessnry, or mncbine wns should be concealed for the
like nur~ose.
500. Adrnnced posts. or any other for,,, of un,~ecessary dis-
Persian, shuld be avoided.
 122 DEFENSE.

507. Unless the di~cuity of moving the troops into the posi-
tion be great, most of the troops of the firing line are held in
rear of it until the infantry attack begins. The wsition itself
is occupied by n mmll garrison only, with the necessuy out.
guards or rntrols in front.
508. Fire al”“8 can not be depended upon to stop the attack.
The troops must be determined to resort to the bayonet, if
neeessnry.
599. If a night apck or close approach by tbc enemy is
ex~?~tetl, ti-““IIS in r? ,VQXII’ed ~,“siti”n shonld strengtbeu the
outwards and firine line and constrmt as n,,,ner”,,s and ef-
fective obstacles as ,,ossib,e. Supports and local reserves Sb”“ld
move close to tbo firing line and &a”~, with the firinn line
keep bayonets fired. If practicable, the front sh”~,d be %umi:
nated, preferably from the Ranks of the section.
510. Only short rage fir” is of any ~a,ue in resisting night
attacks. The baymet is the chief re’eliance. (See Kight Opza-
*ions.,
COUNTERATTACK.
6 11. The namive defense should be ~L(s”med “nly when eir-
eumstances force it. Only the offensive wins.
512. An active defense se”ks n favorable decision. A favor-
able decision em not be expected without counterattack.
513. A passive defense in z Bosition whose flanks are not
Brotected by nnturnl obstacles is generally out of the question.
5 14. Where the defense is assumed with a view to making a
counterattack, the tr”“~)B for the counterattack should be held
in reserve until the time arrives for such attack. The defensive
line should be beid ip 21s few troops ns possible in order that
the force for the offensive may be as large as nossible.
The force for the counterattack should be held echeloned iu
rear of the flank which offers it the greatest advantage for the
Ilroposed attack.
615. The counterattack should be made vigorously and at
the groper time. It will usually be made:
By lannebing the reserve against the enemy’s flank when his
attack is in full progress. This is the most effective form of
counterattack.
Straight to the front by the firing line nnd sngpotis after
repulsing the enemy’s attack aud demoralizing him With g”r-
suing fire.
 MEETING ENCAOE~ENTL 123

Or, by the troops in rear of the firing line when the enemy
has reachEd the &?mMire *osition nna is in diS”KlW.
516. mnor counterattacks are sw,“?ti*,cs necessary in order
to driw the enemy from imliortant poSitions gained by him.

DELAYING ACTION.
5 17. when a pmitim is t:,kn rnwe1y to achy the enemr ana
to withdraw before b%oming closely engagea, the imDor‘t3nl
eonsiaeramns are:
The enemy shonla be forced to deploy early. The lwa Of fire
should therefore be good at aist;,ncrs from 500 to 1,200 yards
or mare: n goad field of fire at eme mngr is not *ecessar9.
The grouna in renr Of the pmitim shoula fllVO1. the with-
dmwnl Of the firing line by screening the troops *ml” the ene-
my’s view ana fire as soon 89 the pOSition is vacated.
518. A thin firing line “Sing much Bnlnlnni~on Will generalIT
gmr the ~nrpose. Supports are neeaca chiefly to w&2& the

‘The reserve should be nested well in rear to assist in the

withdrawal of the firing GE.
519. Artillery is eepeLlly Yal”Dble 10 I, delaying force.

MEETIKG ENGAGEMENTS.
.
520. Meeting engagements are characterized by the *cecSSitJ
*or hasty rccannaissnnce. UT the nh”OSt total absence Of lv20”-
naissmce; by the necessity for rancid deployment. frequently
under fire; nna nsunlly hy the nhsence Of tPe”CheS or other
artificial cover.
bver. These conditions
eonaitions give further advantages to the
“ffc.“‘.i..”
o&mire.
621.
621. The
The wholewhole situation
situation will usually
will usually indicate
indicate beforehand
beforehand
the
the proper
proper genernl
genernl n&ion
n&ion to be
to be taken
taken on on meeting
meeting the the enemy.
enemy.
582.
582. Little
Littie fresh
fresh information
information Can he
can he erpectea.
expected. The bolaness.
The bokhxss.
initiative,
initiative. and determination of the commander must he relied
“W”.
523. A meeting engtagrment af?oords an ideal opportunity to,
the eommar~Ier rvho has intuition and quick gecisiun and who
is willing to take long chances. His opponent ia likely to be
overcautious.
 124 MEETING ENSAGEMENTS.

624. The amount of illformntion that the conmnnder is war-

ranted in awaiting before taking final action depends entirely
ngon his mission. One situntion mny demnnd a blind “tta~k:
another may dema”d r:,,,id, ,i:,rtinl de~loynrent for attack, but
cnreful and time-consuming reconnni~~nne~ before the attack is
launched.
525. A great advantage XCCI‘,,PS t” the side which cnn de,,,oy
the faster. The ndvautage of a close-order formation, favoring
rapid deployment, beconws n,ore ~muouneed with the size of the
force.
528. The first trmm to deploy mill be nble to attack with
longer tiring li*eS and weaker suppxts than nre required in
the ordinary ca6e. nut if the enemy snceeeds in deploying a
strong defensive line, the nttaclt m”St be strengthened nccala-
in& before it is wasted.
527. If the 6it”ati”n warra”ts the advance, thelending troops
8eek to de~lloy faster tbnn the enemy, to reach his flanks, check
his de~layment, and get informntian. I” any ere”t, they seek
to cover the de~losment of their OIP” tr”oDs in rear-especially
the artillery-and to seize inl~ortant ground.
628. The conunandcr of n lorlg ~01”nm which meets the
enemy Sho”ld be with the ndvnnce guard to receive informn-
tion promptly and to reconnoiter. If he decides to fight, the
ndrnnee gunrd must hold the enemy while the commander
form”lates 3. ~1”” of action, iss”es the “ecem~ry orders, and
deplo~‘~ the nmin body. JIcnntinle, the col”mn should be clos-
ing up, tither in mars or to form line of columns. 60 that the
de~~loloyment, when determined “,I”“, may be made more ,xomgtly.
529. The netion uf the adnmx guard, prior to the rcceigt of
,orders, depends “pm the situntim. Whether to attack deter-
minedly or only “R 3 feint, or to “6s”“~ the defensive, depends
won the sfren~tb of the adrnnce gnnrd, the terrain, the char-
acter of the hostile force a~lcountered, and the mission and in-
tentions of the comm:mder of the whole.
530. If the enemy is heforchnnd or more aggremive, or if the
advance mnrd is too Merck, it may be necessary to nut de
ments of the main bcdg into nclim as fat as they arrive, i”
order to check him. This method sh”“ld be “voided; it pe-
rent8 the formation and exemtion of n definite Dunn and corn.
pels gieremeal action. The best results are obtnined when the
main body is used “s B whole.
 WITlDrLAWAL PBOM ACTION. 125

WITHDRAWAL FROM ACTION.

/!531. The withdrnanl “f n defeated force can generally be
effected only at a heavy cost. When it is no longer possible t”
give the action a fav”rnble tnrn and the necessity for witb-
drawn1 arises, erery effort nmst be made to &ce distance and
a rear gnard between the enany and the defeated troops.
532. Artillery gives especially rnlunble assistance in the
withdmwrrl. The long-range fire of machine guns shonld als”
be emlrloyed: Cuvnlry assists the withdrawn, by charging the
pursuing troops or by taking flank paitions and using fire
action.
633. If an intact reserve remains it should be plnccd in a
covering position, preferably “n a fbmlt, t” check the ~nxsuit
and thus enable the defeated troops to withdraw beyond reach’
of hostile fire.
The corering ,x,sitim of the reserre should be at *“me dis-
tance from the main action, but cl”se enough to bring the with-
drawinp tr”“T)s qllielrly under the Protection of its fire. It
should hare n cool1 field of fire at effeet~ive and long ranges and
should facilitate its OK” safe hnd timely withdrawn,.
634. If the general line is divided, by terrnin or by “rgania:~.
tion, into two or more parts, the firing line of the ~nrt in the
lenst danger from pwsuit should be withdrawn first. A C”II-
ti”“““~ tiring line, mh”se I)arts are depzndent upon “ne another
for tire support. should be withdrawn ns a whole, retiring by
echelon nt the beginning of the withdrawal. Every effort mnst
be made t,o restore the organizations, regain control, and form
e”lnm” of march BS SO”” as the tl‘““B?. are beyond the reneh of
hostile fire.
AS fast BS p,xaibl” witbont delnying the~mnreb, companies,
nnd the Inrger “nits should be re-formed, so that the commnnd
will again be weil in bard.
535. The eommnnder of the whole, hxving given orders for
withdrawal, sh”uld PO t” the rear. select n rendem”u~ Doint, and
devote himself t” the reorgnnimtion “f his ~“mmnnd.
The rendezvous point is selectid with remrd to the natural
channels “f m”venlent a~~l‘miul:ltelv straixht t” the i-ear. It
should be distant from thr battlc lirld nnd should facilitate tbe
gathering and 'protection of the command.
 SUMMARY.
536. 1. Avoid combats that offer no chance of Yictory or
other valuable results.
2. Make every effort for the SUCCESSof the general &xu and
avoid swctaculur plays that have no bearing on the genernl
r~Sl7lt
3. llnve a definite plan and c~i‘ry it out vigorously. DO not
vncillate.
4. Do not attempt complicnted maneuvers.
6. Keep the cmmand in hand; amid undue extension and
disclersion.
6. Study the ground and direct the advance in such a wily
as to fake advantage of all nvnilable cover and thereby
diminish losses.
7. Kever deploy until the purpose and the proper direction are
known.
8. Deploy enough men for the immediate task in hand; hold
out the rest and avoid undue haste in committing them to the
action.
9. F’lnnks must be protected either by resewes, fmti8cationa,
or the terrain.
10. In il decisive action, gain and keep fire sugeriority.
11. Keep up rfxonnaissance.
12. Use the reserve, but not until needed or a very farmable
opportunity for its use nreuents itself. Keep some reserve 88
long 88 gractieabI,e.
13. Do not hesitate to sacrifice the command if tile rmult is
worth the cost.
14. Spare the command all unnecemn-y bardship and exertion.
 M.4CXlUE GUNS.
6.77. Machine guns must be considered 89 weapons of emer-
&%ncy. Their cffectireness combined with their mobility ren-
ders them of great due at critical, though in*requent, periods
Of nn engagement.
538. When operating ngainst infantry only, they can be used
to n Srent extent throughout the combat as circomstnnces may
indicate, but they are quickly rendered ~omerless by eEcient
field artillery and will “r”m”t,v draw artimrv tire WhP”P~.p,
they own. Eence their “5~ in engagements” between lnree
comnmnds must be for short periods 2nd at times when the&
great effectiveness will be most vnlnabl~~
539. Machine guns should be nttnched to the advance guard.
In ?eeting en!@geme”ts they will be of great value in assisting
then’ own advance, or in checking the advance of the enemy,
and mill have consider;tble time to operate before hostile art&
lery fire can silence them.
Care must be taken not to leave them to” long in action.
540. They are ml”able to n rear yard which seeks to check
a vigorous ~ursnit or to gain time.
541. In attack, if fire of position is ,,rncticab,e, they are of
great ~ulue. In this case the should not be “gened by the
machine guns until the nttaek is well advanced. Bt a critical
period in the nttnck, such fire, if suddenly and unexpectedly
o~,ened, will Crently assist the advancing line. The fire must be
as heaYy as Dossible and must be continued until masked by
friendly troops or until the hostile artillery finds the machine
&T”IM.
542. IR the defense, machine guns should be used in the
same general manner as described above for the attack. Con-
cealment and patient waiting for critical moments and excep
tfona, “~yortunities are the sgecin, ehnrncteristics of the ma.
chine-gun service in decisive actions
543. *S Dart Of the resen’r, machine guna have spccid im-
~ortance. If they nre with the troogs told off to ,,r”tect the
flnnks, and if they are well placed, they will often produce de-
128 KLSCELL*BEO”S.

cisive results against a hostile turning movement. They nre

especially qualified to COTW a withdrawal “P mnke a captured
position secure.
544. Machine guns sbouid not be assigm?d to the firing me of
an attack. They should be so glaeed that fire directed upon
them is not likely to fall upon the firing line.
545. A skirmish line cm not advance by walking or running
when hostile mnchim guns ham the corrwt range and are
ready to fire. Machine-gun fire is not specialiy efktive ngainst
tr”“11.3 lying on the ground or crawlin&
640. When oppxed by machine gllns and without artillery
to destroy them, infantry itself must silence them before it can
advance.
An infantry command that must depend upon itself for pro-
tection against machine gum should comxntrate a ,;rrge number
Of rifles on cacll pun in turn and until it has ~ilCUCcd it.

AMMUh’lTlON SUPPLY.
547. The method of su~,~iy of nmmoniti”“. to the combat
trains is ex,,lained in Field Service Ke~ulntions.
54% The combat train is th” immedint” reserve su,,p,y “f
the battnlion, and the major is res~lonsible for its groger use.
He mill tnkc measures to insure the maintenance of the me-
.
scribed allowance at all times.
In the absence of instructions, he mill cana the trnln to
mnreh immediately in rear of his battnlim, and, upon sepo-
mting from it to enter xn engagement, will muse the ammuni-
tion tbereln to be issued. When emgtied, he will direct that
the wqwns yroceed to the prowr rendezvous $0 be refilled.
Ordinarily n rendezrous is appointed for each brigade and the
necessary number of wngom sent formard to it from the mmn-
nition column.
549. When refilled, the combat wagons will rejoin their bat-
talions, or, if the latter be en~nged, will join or establish
eommu”icntion with the regimeuta, reserve.
550. C”m,my c”nnnm,ders are res~ousible that the belts of
the men in their c”mgnnies RR? lregt lilied at al, times, exe@
when the amnlunition is being “wended in action. In the
firing line the ammunition of the dead nnd wounded should be
secured whenewr wactieable.
 xm2ELL*mEOOS. 129

551. hmmnnition in the bandoleers will ordinxrily be ex-

pended first. Thirty rou”d~ in the right ~ockct section of the
belt will be held ns a reserve, to be expended only when
ordered by n” officer.
552. When neceswiary to resup*ly the tiring lioe, olumunition
will bc sent forwnrd with reenforeements, ~eneralb from the
regimentnl wserre.
Men will never be smt hack from the firing line for ammu-
nitiou. Men 8e”t formard mith nnmnnition remain with the
Bring line.
553. A6 soon 8s possible after an cngagcment the belts of the
me” nud the combat W~YO”S zn’e resupplied to their normnl
Capacities. Ammunition which ran not be reloaded on combat
wngans will be piled up in a converrie”t place and left under
guard.
MOUUTED SCOUTS.

554. The mounted scouts should be thoroughly trnined in

patrolling and rec”““aissa”ce. They are used for communi-
cation with neighboring troops, for patrolling off the route of
march, for march ontwsts, outpost ,xxtro18, eombat patrol&
r~onnnissanec ahead of c”1”“,“6, etc. Their further use is,
in general. conlined to escort and messenger duty. They s,,o”,d
Wf’ee’y “Sed for all these yurposes, but for these p”r,,oses
"....,.
5.55. When infantry is acting alone, or when the cavalry of
a mixed comm;~~d lus been sent to a distance, the monnterl
scouts are of special importnnce to coveri”g detachments and
should be used to make the reconnaissance which would other-
Tat3 fall to CaraIry.
558. in reconnnissnnce, SCOUTSshould be used in preference
to other troops as much as ,,ossible. When not needed for
mounted duty, they should be employed for “wessary dis-
mounted gntrolling.
557. Battalion staff officers sho”ld be speeinlly trained in
patrolling no4 re~onn~issame work in order that they may be
available when a mounted or?icer’s rntrol is requited.
NIGHY OPERATIONS.
558. By employing night operati”“% troog8 make use of the
cover of darkness to minimize losses from hoStile fire or to
 MISCELLABEOUS.

escape observation. Night operations may also be necessary for

the purpose of ~aininz time. Control is ditticnlt and confusion
iB frenuently urkvoid~ble.
It nrar be neces~nry to take advantage of dar!aRss in order
to assault from a point gained during the day, or to apyroacb n
paint from which n davlirbt ~~” AL BSPRII~~
- ..-_.. irj to
._ _, be made, or to ef&t
both the a,,,x”ach and the assault.
669. Otfensire and defensive night operations should’ be
UMcticed frequently in order that troops may learn t” co~w
ground in the dark nnd arrive at n destination quietly and in
good order, and in order to train otiicw8 in the necessary prep-
aration and reconnaissance.
Only simple and well-appointed formations should be em-
Troops should be thoroughly trained in the necessary details-
e. g., night patrolling, night marching, and communication at
night.
600. The ground t” be trawr‘sed Pho”ld be studied by dny-
‘L&“L 11”“. 11 ,mvxhxDk?, ci night. It
^,, ,..., _1 L-
DY”UlU “C
^I^^..>
ClEartu
.n
“I
hostile detachments before dark, and, if practicable, should be
“ccu,,ied by covering troops.
I~. Orders must be formulated with great care and clearnea~
wacn nnn mm be given a definite ~~~~ obje&va“--^ ““A dirdinn, and
^.... .~~~./.
t:nrr 11111w “0 CICr,.lc.2n . m “.lnln anIli‘.in”
~~.~. ---- II _.-“.-.I-- .” ‘..“IY c”l..ll”l, urrieen units.
Whenever contact with the enemy is anticipated, n distinctive
badge_^. should
_ be war 1 L-~ -”
uy au.
aal. I’reliaration8 must be made wit” wrwy. wnen me
movement is started, and not until then, the oei~eers and men
should be acquainted with the general design, the composition
of the whole force, and sba111d be xiren such additional informa-
tion 88 will insure cooperntion and eliminate mistakes.
During the marenrent every precaution must be taken to keep
Secret the fact that tr”“,M are abroad.
Unfriendly guide8 mnst frcqllently be impressed. These
should be secured against esca,,“, outcry, or deception.
Fire action should be avoided In offeasive operations. It)
generul, ,>ieces sha ,,,,I not be ,,,ndcd. ilIe” I ,111st be trained to
rely “,I”” the bayonet and to use it aggressively.
562. Lang night, mxr~hrs should be msde “nly over well-
defined routes. March disci(,,ine must be rigidly enforced. The
troops 6bould be marched in as compact n forrwation as pmr-
tieable, with the usual covering detachments. Advance and rear
 MISCELIANEOUS.

gonrd distances should be greatly reduced. They are shortest

when the mission is an offensive one. The eonnectin~ 61~ are

563. A night sdvnnce made with a view to mnking an attack

by dny usmlly terminates with the hasty construction of in-
trenchments in the dark. Rwh an advance should be timed 60
as to allow an hour or more of darkness for intrenchinr.
An ndrnnce that is to terminate in an nssault nt the:break of
day should be timed so that the troops will not arrive long
before the nssnult is to be made; otherwise the advantage of
mrtial surmise will be lmt and the enmv ” will be allowed to
ienforce the threatened gmnt.
564. The night attack is ordinarily confined to mmll forces,
or to minor engagements in a general battle, or to seizure of
~positions occupied by covering or advanced detachments. Deck-
sire results are not often obtained.
Poorly discipmed and untrained troops aI?2 umx for night
attacks or for night operations demanding the exercise of skill

Troops attacking nt night can advance close to the enemy in

compact formntiom and without suffering loss from hostile ar-
tillery or infantry fire. The defender is ignorant of the strength
or dir&inn of the attldL
A ~flwx ,Thi ch makes a ~~igorous bayonet charge in the dark
Will often t,1rc tw a much lnreer force into disorder.
685. Recommissnnce sbo;ld be made to nseertain the rm4tion
and strength of the enemy and to study the terrain to be
traversed. Oficers who are to pnrticipate in the attack should
eO”d”ct tilts reco*lntlissBnce. Reconnnis*ance at night is ape-
cinllg valuable. .Pentures that are distiomishnble at night
sbo”ld be mrefnlly noted, and their difitiuxes from tbe enemy,
from the starting point‘af the troops, md from other important
points should be made !aown.
Prepsrations should bore in view.as complete n surprise 88
possible. An attack once begun must be cnrrird to its conclu-
sion, even if the surExise is not as complete as was *lanned or
anticipated.
500. The time of night at which the attack should be made
depends upon tbe objwt sought. If n decisive attack is in-
tended, it mill generally yield the best results if made just be-
fore daylight. If the object is merely to gain nn intrenched
position for further operations, un earlier hour is mcessary in
132 HISCELL*NEOUS.

order that the position gained may be intrenched under COreP of

d~lk”~S&
-KS
-I.. T ‘PI,-
_-_ fnvmntinn
_” .-..... “.. fnr
-. attack must be simple. It should be
Capfnlln &7PHd and ‘he troops verioed at a. *tie distnnee
AZi~e
Pm &Gii~Y YiGz att;lcking troops should be forlued in
compact lines and with strong supports at short dirtances. The
merre should be far emugb in reilr to avoid being drawn into
the nction until me commander so desires. Baymets are fiEd,
pieces are uot loaded.
Dnrkness onuses Ore to be mild and ineff&ive. The attack-
ing troops Rhould n1alT,, Steadily on the enemy Withlit firing,
but ~bould be pre,~~red and determined to fight ri~oronsly with
the bayonet.
In ndrnncing t” the attack the aim should be to get as close
88 possible to the enemy before being discovered, then to trust
to the bnyonct.
If the assnult is successful, ln-eparntions must be made at
0Lwe to repel R CO”ntemttaCk.
568. On the defense, prepinxtions to resist night attacks
;ly;;, be made by daylight whenever such attacks a” to be

Obstacles placed in front of B defensive wsition are espffially

“nluable to the defense at night. Many forms of obstacles
which would give an attacker little concern in the dnytime be-
come serious hindrances at night.
After dark the foreground should be illuminated whenever
practicable nnd strong patrols should be pushed to the fmnt.
When it is learned that the enemy is appronching. the trenches
are lilkd and me .u*ports more3 Close to the firing line.
Supports fix bnponets, but do not load. Wbenerer practicable
and necesmr~ they should be used fo’: co”nteratt%cBs, nrefer-
ably a&ydust a hostile flank.
The defender should own tire ~8 soon as results may be ex-
p&d This fire mny awrt or postpone the bnyonet combat.
and it warm all summorting troops. It is not likely that fire
alone can Stop the attack. The defender m”St be resolved to
O&t with the bayonet.
Ordinarilv Bre will not be eE&ive at ran&w exceeding 50
yards. 1
A white rag nraund the muzzle of the rifle will m8i8t In
slgbting the piece wbeh the front sight is not viaibk.
See paragrnphs 450, 482, 483, 509, 510.
 MISCELLANEOOS. 133

IUFAAJTRY AGAINST l+$JVLRY.

569. A earalry charge can ~ccom~lishYittTpBgain*t infantry.

even in inferior numbers, unless the latter are Sir%’ ised, become
pnn‘estricken, run away, or can not use their r,tT %
570. * charge from the front is easily clleeked $6 a .well-
directed and sustained Bre. ‘I,
If the charge is directed ngainst the tknk of the tiring Ii&
the supports, reserves, or machine guns mm8 should stol) it. IfJf this
disposition is tmaractic%ble,
tm,nwtic,xble, I
part of the line must meet the
charge by n timely change of front. If the Bank eom~~ny, or
companies, in the firing line execute plakwns rig*t, the successive
tlring lines cm ordinarily break a chnrge against the flank. If
the cavalry
cavdrv line passes
nasses through
thrmsh the firing
firins line,
line. the latter will
be little damaged if the men retain their gresenee of mind.
They should be on the watch for succeeding ‘wnlry line8 and
lenve those that have passed through to friendly troops in resr.
571. Men stauding are in the best position to meet a charge,
but other considerations may compel them to meet it lying
prone.
57% In a mP1Ee, the infantryman with his bayonet has at
lenst an ew” chance with the envalrymnn, but the main de
pendenee of infantry is ride fire. Any formation is suitable
that permits the free use of the necessary number of rifles.
Ordinarily there will be no time to change or set nights. Fire
at will at battle sight should be “sexl, whatever the range may
be. It will usually be unwise to oven fire at long ranges.
573. An’ infantry column that encounters cavalry should
da,Iw nt once. If attacked from the head OP rear of tBe
~dumn, and if time is pressing, it may form a su~cesslon of
skirmish lines. Infantry, by deploying 50 or 100 yards in rear
of an obstacle, may check c~vahy and hold it under fire beyond
effective pistol range.
In any sitmtion, to try to escape the issue by rum&g is
the worst and most dangerous course the infantry can adopt.
574. In attacking dismounted cavalry, infantry Sho”ld elme
rnoidlv Snd endeavor to prevent remo,,ntine. 1nfSnt.r~ which
adopt; this COU~FX will~dot be seriously checked by del&ing
eavnhy.
Every effort should be made to locate and open fire on the
led horses.

-
134 MISCELLANEOUS.

INFANTRY AGAlNST ARTILLERY.

576. A frontal xttnck ag:li”st artillery: hns little chance of

suCceeding unless it can be started from COYW at compaaratfvely
short range. Beyond short range, the frontal fire of infantry
has little effect against the artillery personnel beenuse of their
pr&&i.rn .s ahialAm
yy.~,“y_
Mach!he guns, because their eonb of fire is more com~ct, will
ha”e greater el?ect, but on the other hand they will have fewer
opportunities and they are limited to fire attack only.
AS a rule, one’s own artillery is the best weap~” against
hostile ?*+~---
A.l.l.CI.,.

576. Artillery attacked in flank by Infaantry a” be severely

damaged. Oblique or flank fire will begin to hare decisive
effect when delivered at effective range born a pint to one
side of the artiUers+a line of tire and distant from it bP about
half the range. A&illery 18 better protected on the side of the
caisson.
577. Quns out of ammunition, but Otherwise secure against
infantry flttack, m”y be immobilized by fire which will prevent
their withdrawal, or by locating and driving off their lfrubers.
Or they may be kept o”t of action bs We which will prevent the
receipt of ammunition.
518. Artillery when limbered is helpless against infantry
fire. If caught at e,tTectiverange while coming into “ction or
~v~le hmbenng; artxllery, can be severely punished by infantry

I” attacking artillery that is trying to escape, the Wheel

homes are the best targets.
AMILLER,’ SWPORTS.

579. The pnrposc of the artillery s”,,port 1s to gunrd the

artillerr acainst s”i-“rise or attack.
Artil&on the m&b or in action is ordinarily so placed “9
to be amply protected by the infantry. Infantry alwnps pro-
tects artillery in its neizhborbood.
580. The detail of n ~“pport is “ot necesanry exeqlt when
the artillery 1s separated from the main body or oce”pies a
position in which its C;l”kx are not protected.
The detail of a spedal support will be avoided whenever
possible,
 YIISCELLAx3Ova. 1%

581. The folmaticm Of an Rrtilkry snpport depends upon

efrcumstnnees. On the march it mny often be necessary to pro-
vide ndrance, flank, and mm protection. The country must be
thoroughly reconnoitered by patrok within long rifle mnge.
68% rn action, the formation and location Of the suQport
must be such ns to gain and gire timely information of the
enemy’s apyroacll nnd to offer ilctllal resisttlnce to me enemy
beyond effective rifle range of the artillery’s flanks. It Bbo”ld
not be close enough to the nrtillwy to suffer from fire directed
at the artillery. In mo*t cmle.7 a position somewhat to the
flank and rear best fultills’these conditions.
68% The support commander is cbnrgcd only with the prcb
t&ion of the artillery. The tactical emnlogment of each am
rests with it8 commander. The two should cooperate.

IUTRENCHMENTS.
wnte V.)
584. Ordioorily, infantry intrenches itself wheaewr it ia
comr~h?d to halt for a considerable time in the ~resenee of the
enemy.
infantry charged with a resisting mission should intrench
whenever there is any likelihood that the cover constructed
will be of use.
585. Except in permanent fortifications or in fortifications
prepared long in advance, the infantry plans and conntructs the
field works thnt it will occupy.
When performing their duties in this connection Miieers
Shoold bear in mind that ,,ro,ile and conStr”ction are sim,,Ie
matters compnrd with location and con-&t tactical use.
586. Intrenchments enable the commander to hold a position
Wtb the last possible number of men and to prolong his line
or incre*se his reserve.
Tboy are cormtrocted with a view to giving cover which will
diminish Iosses, but they mmt not be 60 built or @aced as to
interfere with the free use of the ride. Fire effect is the Brst
consideration.
587. IYE trnce of n fire trench or oft, system of fire trenches
depends n~aon the ground and the progosed density of the entire
firing line. The trenches are laid out in company lengths, if
possible.
136 lc~SCELLANEOW

Adjoining trenches ~bould nfford e*eh athor mutunl support.

The flnnks and im,,ort:,nt gap* in the line sb”“ld be protected
by fire trenches echeloned in rear . ,llh. ‘=:- *’
Y,,
588. To locate the tr*ce, lie a:m the ground at intervals and
select tbe.best tleld of fire consistent with the requirements of
ttla sitnation.
A profile should be selected which will permit the tire to
*weep the foreground, require the minimum of labor and time,
and Kermit the best concealment. NO fixed tune can be pre-
*cribed. T!he tyw must be selected with due regard t” the
terrain, the enemy, time, tool*, materials, soil, etc.
580. Hasty cww. With the intrenching tool, t*““p* can
quickly throw up a low pnrapet about 3 feet thick which will
furnish considerable cover against ride fire, but *c*rc*ly any
ngainnt shrapnel. Such corer is f*eQ”ently Of. Yal”e to an
attack that is temtxxarilg unable to continue. In time, nnd
Darticularlv at nizht. it ma” be develooed into a de*” tire or
eovertren&. ” ”
590. ,=ire trenches should be ~laeed and constructed so as to
gire a good field of fire and to give the booys protection behind
a wrticul wsll, preferably with MOP bead or orerbead cover.
They should be conce*M or inconspicuous in order to avoid
artillery fire or to decrease it* accurwy. They should have
n*tunO or *rtitlcinl communication with their 8uppxt*, but in
estublishing the trace thi* is n secondary consideration.
The simplest form of fire trench is deep and n*rr”w and
bns * flat, concealed paraP&. (Fig. 1.) In ordinary soil, and
on a basis of two reliefs and tasks of 5 feet, it can be con-
strueted in about two hours with intrenching tools.
This trench affords fnir cover for tro”p* subjected to fire, but
not actually firing. When it i* probable that time rpill permit
elaboration, the simple trench should be planned with a view
to dev*loDiug it ultimately Into a more compkte form. (Figs.
2 and 3.) Device* should be ndded to increase the *ec”rity of
the trench and the comfort of the men.
Where the exeavntd earth is easily removed, s. fire trench
without parnpet nlsy be the one best suited to the soil and
other conditions affecting the choice of profile. (Fig. 4.) The
enemy’s infantry, a* well 89 bia artillery, will generally have
great difficulty in seeing this type of trench.
In very dfE’k”lt *oil, if the time is short, it mny be necessar~t
to dig 8 wider, shallower trench with a higher parapet.
fiji
Fip 2.
Plate ”

i
I
 153 MISGELL*NEOUS.

Head cover, notches, and loon holes are of value to troops

when firing, but many forms we*ken and disclose the locstion
of the parapet. Filled snndbnrs kept in the trench when the
men are not firing may be thrown “n the par&net to form
notches or ,oo@~ole~ when the tr”“Ds in the trench ore,, tire
and concealment of the trenrb is 11” longer neeessarx or possible.
Hy the use of abservntiou *tations the msximum rest and se-
cnrity is afforded the troops. Stations am best located in the
an@es of traverses “I’ at the end of the treneb.
801. Where the nature of the position mukes it ndvianble to
con*truct traverses st regular intervals it i8 generally best to
construct a section of trench for each squad, with traverses be-
tween squads. (Fig. 5.)
BW2. Cover trenches are @need 8s clo8ely as practicable to
their respectire m-2 trenches Wheie nnturn1 COPa is not
arailnble, eaeb fire trench should hnve artificial e”~er in rear
for its support--either a cover trench of its own or one in com-
mon, with an adjoining fire trench.
The cover trench is simple and rectangular in profile. Con-
cenlment is indisoensable. It in een*r*llv conrealed bv the
Contour Of the g;ound or by natural feaiures, but to~&a
against hostile searching tire overhead cover i* frequent&
sdvisable.
Cover treuches should be made as comfortable as ~)o*sib,e.
It will often be advisable to make them extensive enough to
Drovvide cooking and r”stinz facilities for the~I~~ z*rrison* of the
~~~
correswnding fire trenches:
593. Communicafing trenches are frequently neeessery in or-
der to eonneet fire trenches with their corresponding co~cr
trenches nbcre natural, covered eomn~unicntion is imprxti-
cable. Thuy nre generally rectnngulnr in profll”, deep, and nar-
I’OF. The,” HE? trnrerscd or aignrgged to ewca~c enfilade.
Iteturns or pockets shonld be provided for use as Intrines,
St”r*ro”m*, dressing stations, passing points for troops, etc.
Cover from “bsermtion while ,,nsaing throngh the trench
msy insure *k*in*t loss a* effectively as material cov3 from
the enfmly’s tire.
Communicating ways, naturally or nrtifieinlly screened from
the enemy’s view, sometimes provide s”fBci*nt cover for the
passage of troops.
594. Dummy trenches frequently draw the enemy’* attention
and fire and thus protect the true fire trench.
 MmxLL4NEOUS. 139

Any type in soiiablr which presents to the enemy the appear-

BnCe of n true trench ilu,1er*ect*y conce:tled.
5R.5. When it is uncertai~~ whetbcr ti~ue will ~mmit the corn-
gletion of 811 the work planned, mark should proceed with due
regzrd to the order Of iml)oexm! “f me sewr81 operations.
0rdimril.v the order of importance will be:
1. Clearinq foreground to impme the tie,* Of fire and eon-
Structio” of fire trench.
2. HexI or orer,,efd cover: concenl”wnt.
3. Pbieing ObStaSle* nnl3 recording ranges.
4. cover trenches *or S”“mxtS and local reserves.
5. Camm”nicati”g trencliea
6. Widening and deepening of trenches; interior conven-
iences.
See ~nra~ra,~h 508.
MINOR WARFARE.

586. Minor wsrfare embrnees both remlar and irremlnr

operations.
Regular opxntions consist of minor actions involving small
bodies of trained and oixanized tnxqs on both sides.
The tnetics emgloyed are 10 general those prescribed for the
smaller ““itR.
607. Irregnlar OPerationR consist of actions agBi*st unor-
ganized or mutially ormnized forces, nctlng in inC@kndent or
semi-indeperrdent bodies. such bodies have little or on,g erudz
training and are under nominn, :,*,d hose leadership and con-
trol. They assemble, rOi,m about, and disperse nt Will. The,
endeavor to win by 6tezlth or by force of s,,rm-ior munbers,
-emplosillg ambarcades, sudden dashes or rushes, nm3 hand-to-
hand ,irbtinc.
Troois qleroting ilg~in~t mch an enemy nsuallg do m in
mmll nnits, such NS glatoons, detachnmlts, or com,m”ies, nnil
the tactics employed nnmt, be xlapted to meet the requirements
Of the Sit~MtiOn. FM,,Elltly the cnerny’s own methods may be
emu10Fxi (0 ;,dv~,ntaec.
In genera,, mcb o~i&ntioos should not be undertaken hastily;
l?“wy Ixe,lamtion Sh”“ld be made to strike mddenlg aId to
inflict the maximum ~nuisbmmt.
SRS. In general. the Jprvice of infolnlation will be insntE-
eient ; adeqwte rec~nn~i~~ance mill rarely be pr~cticnble.
140 MISCELL4NEOUS.
March and bivouac foorn~tions must be such as to admit oi
rapid d~phyma~t alId fire amn in any diwi~n.
699. In the own country, where surprise is not probable,
troops may be marched in column of squads preceded, withi”
sight, by a squad as a” ndvxnce wrty.
000. In clam country, where surprise is gossible, the troops
must be held in a close formation. The “6e of flank ,,atro18 be
comes dimeult. Occxsionnlly. an atlrance party-mrer less thnn
a sq”nd--mny be sent out. In genera,, howere*, WCh a garty
BcC”“lilliSheS mm, since 311 enemy intent on surprise will pr-
mit it to pas6 “““roierted “ud will fall won the main body.
Under snch conditions, eo~~cinlly when the road or trail is
nnnvw, +be rolumn of twos or files is n convenient formation.
the otliieers placing them~ell-es in the column 80 as to divide it
into nenr,r Equal parts. If rushed from a fm”B, such a C”,“rn,,
will be in readiness to face and tire toward either or both
flank, the rim!a be& 4x,& to back: if rosbed from the front,
the head of the ml,,“,” ,,,a~ be denlosed, the rest of the column
closing up to support it “Iid to ptyotcct its flanks and rear. In
any went, the me” should be taught to take some form of a
closed back-to-back formation.
601. The column may afte” be broke” into tvo or m”re
approximately equal detachments ~eremk3d on the march by
distimces of 50 t” 100 yards. AS R rule the detachments should
not consist of MS than 25 men each. With this arrangement
of the colnm”, it will rarely be possible for an enemy to close
simultaneously with all of the detachments, one or more being
left ““engaged all.3 ““dw co”trol to ~“,up~ort those engaged or
to inflict severe punishment upon the enemy when he is repulsed.
802. The site for cnn”~, or blrounc should be m&cted with
special reference to economical and effective protection against
~~,,r,,rise. Double se”ti”cls are ,mrted o” the avenues of ap-
poach and the troops *lee9 in readiness for instant action.
When pmctimble, trow8 sbonld he instrUcted in advauce 89 to
what they are to do in cnse of attack at night.
693. Night operations “re frequently advisable. With the
small forces emrdoyed, control is not diEColt. Irregular troop8
rarely ,xoride proper camp protectio”, and they may frequently
be snr,riserl and severely punished by a &nv,mly conducted
night lunrdl nnd uttK%
 IdISCEILANEOtlS. 141

PATROLS.

804. Tbr following ,‘amgra,,bs on patrols are placed hew

for conrwimnce. They rehte in ,rarticnlar to the condurt of
the “ntro, and its leader. and a”“,~ to “atrols emuloved i” cover-
ing hetnrhments as n.ell’ns in &Gbnt ieconnnis&&.
606. A patrol is n dPtnrbme”t sent ““t from a command to
gain informntion of the conntrp or of the euemy, or to prevent
the enemy from gaining infomntiorr. In special cases patrols
may be give” missions other than these.
806. The eommnnder must hare clearly in “Cnd the pur~~ose
for which the patrol ia to be wed in order that be mny deter-
mine its [rroper strength. select its leader. and give the latter
proper instructions.
In genernl, a patrol should be se”t ““t for one definite purpose
only.
807. The strength of a patrol raries from tvo or tbrw men
to n com~)my. It should be strong enough to aeeomp,li& ite
purpose, and no stronger.
If the purpose is to goin information only, n small pntrol is
better than a large one. ‘The former co”ceals itself more readily
and ,,,“ve8 less &,s,,ic”ously. BM’ observin,q from sonle point
in ~,lnin view of the eomm;ind or POT‘risitiw or recunnoitering
between outeunrds two me” are s”fTc‘e”t.
If mess,& are to be sent back, the “at1‘01 must be stro”z
enangb to funish the nrobable “nmb~r of messen~~s with”“?
reducing the patrol to ,esa than two men. If hostile patrO*S
are likely to be met and I”“& be drive” off, the wtrol m”6t bo
strong.
In friendly tenRon’. R weaker nntrol may be “se-3 than would
be used for ?be corresponding I)II~DOSB in tiostile territory.
00% The chmacter of the leader 8eketed for the Vatrol de-
,,e”ds “I,“” tbe im,~ortance of the rvorlt in band.
For “atrollin~ between the cro”“8 or nlonc the Hnes of 81,
ontposi, or for ihe simpler ~2ltroln sent out from a cowring de-
tachment, the avemge soldier will be B cornDetent leader.
000. Fo* il patrol sent out to gain information, 01’ for n dis-
tant pntral sent oot from it coverinp detachment, the leader
must be s~,eeia,ly selected. He must be able to cover lnrge
are(ls with few me”; be “mst be able to estimate tbe strength
Of h”Rtfle forces, to report intelligently as to their disrwsitians,
to read indications, and to judge as to the importance of the
i42 MISCELL*NEOUs.

information gnined. IX” must Domess endnmnra, coumge, and

good judgment.
His instructions should be full and clear. He must be made
to understand exactly wlrilt is required of him, where to PO aud
when to return. 1% should be given such ir~formatiou of tbe
enemy and ~“““tr’y as may be of \.nlue to him. He should be
informed as to the general locntion of his own forces, I)twtic”-
larly of those with whom he rrlay co*ne in eontaet. If possible,
he sbonld be @x-en n mnp of the country be is to traverse. und
in many cases his route may be swcifiti.
Besides his arms and ammunition, the Patrol leader should
have a CO~IXLSS, a match, n p3x?il, a note book, and, when pmc-
tiesble, field message blanks and a mag of the country.
The ,mtrol le:,der assen,bleS the men detailed for the patrol.
He inspects their cm~s and ammuniti”n and satisfies himself
that they are in suitiible condition for the duty. He sees that
none has any pawrs, mn~,s, etc., that would be of ,x,ue to the
enemy if cam,ml. He sees that their acc”uterme”ts do not
glisten or rattle when they more. He then *“pats his instrue-
tions to the ~)~trol and ns~ures himself tbnt every man under-
stands them. He explains the ~ignnls to be used and satisfies
himself that they are understood. Ile desi%nntes n man to txke
his plnce should be be disabled.
010. The formation and movements of the ,,ntr”l must be
regulated 80 as to render probnble tbc csen,,e of nt lenst one man
should the patrol e~,co”nter B su~m‘or fore”. The formati””
will depend upon the nntnre of the mind traversed and the
cover aE”rded. The lender must ado,,t the formation and
measures best suited to t,be acconrglisbment of his object.
In genernl, it should have tbe formlntion “f a main b& with
adrance, rear, and tlanli Puards, tbougb each be represented only
bp a single man.
611. The dishnce~ se~arnting the members of the pntro,
vary according to the gronnd. If too close together, they see no
more than one man; if too widely sewrated they are likely to
be lost to tbhe contml of the leader.
With h piltrol “f four OP tire men the distances may vary from
25 to 50 yards; with a larpx w~trol they may be as great as
1”” yard&
at times a column of tiles, s~qmat~YI by the aistmces pw
scribed, is n satisfactory formation.
 MISCL ---_.--
MISCELL*NEGIJS. -“. 143

812. The c,,un+ry ,,,uRI: be enrefuliy observed as the patrol

advnnces. In passing ,,rer B hill, the country beyond should
first be observed by one man; houscs, i”cIo~ures, etc., abould be
a,,~roaehed in x similar manner or avoided eutirely ; wxd9
should generally be reconnoitered in a thin skirmish line.
8 13. me The streneth
strength and eOY”lJSi+io”
c~~pmition Of
of hostile troops must be
obserred. If they c”” not be eo”“ted, their strength may be
estimated by the length of time a COlnmn Con*“me* in passing
n given point, 01‘ by the are:, covered if in camp.
Pntrol lenders should Buow, if practicnble, the uniforms,
guidons, etc., of the euenry, as it will nssist in determining the
class of troops seen whc” no otbcr “~3”s for doiog 80 zre
available.
Insignia from the enemy’s ““iforms, picked up by patMa,
often convey raluable hformntion by indicnting what troops
are in the vicinity.
8 14. Patrols avoid Bghting, except in self-defense or in order
to prevent the enemy’s n~tr”1~ from gaining ~ulunble informn-
tion, or mhm ncxess;try in order to accomplish their mission.
I” snch cases, n Dntrol ShO”ld light resol”tely even though
Inferior in “nmbers.
6 16. Informntian gained by patrols ia geuerally of “0 value
“nle6s received in time to be of “se to the commander. Patrol
leaders m”st therefore send back i,,form;,tio” of iqorfance as
800~ 618 it is gained ““lees the patrol itself is to return at once.
6 10. If written, me8sage8 should state the glnee, date, hour,
ana minute of t,,eir dB,WCh. The in*orulntion colltainad in
l,hen, should he clellrly nnd concialy expressed. They should
be sited by the p:,trol lender.
The nnthorized message book &o”ld be used nnd the form
therein adhered to.
G 17. If t,he mrssa~e be nn 01‘81 one, the ~)atroI leader shoold
require the IIICSS~~US~ to repe;lt it before ~tartiw back. I”
pencml, a” or:,, *nessi,g~l shouid -corer bnt one puint Except
whe,, there is little chance of error i” transmission, messages
sbo”!d be writterr.
G1B. ‘When in friendly territory and not very far from
friendly troops, one ,l,eS~engeP is snmcient Unless the moss;rge
ia ?ery important. IO hostile tel’ritory, either two mm sbo”ld
zo togetbrx or the message should be Sent in duplicate by
different routes.
144 MISCELLAimOW,

6319. Whether the Information gained is of smlcient imwr.

tauce to be re,~“rted at ““ce or l”ay “wait tllu retnr” of the
patrol is a question which must be decided in e;xh case. I”
ease of rensonable doubt, it is genuernll) better to se”d the re-
Port m’“mWy. If the wtrol leader 11”s reeeivzd lno,,er instruc-
ti”us before starting ““t ““d ha6 the req,,isite nbility t” lend a
patrol, he ca” generally decide such qncstims satisfactorily as
they arise.
GZO. Iufautry ,,ntro,s are generally used for work within Z
miles of snpwrting troops, but crises arise where they m”6t go
to ~reiiter distB”ce%
621. Patrols composed of “,o,“,ted SCOUTSnre conducted like
cavalry p;rtrols xrd should bc traiucd in ;~cord:rnce with the
Cavalry Drill Itegolxtions.
For distant patrolling, a mouuted patrol mder n” officer
should be “ecd.
622. For controlling the movements of the patrol. the le”der
should, whe” “wessary, mxke “se of the a,‘“, si’“;,Is ~mscribed
In these re~uletions.
On ace”““t of the short distances seDarnti”g them, “rdinnrg
comr”u”icnti”n betweeu ,,,elubers Of the llatrul is best &e&d
quietly by word of mouth
Whe” a member of a ,,atro, is sent to n dis+n”t ,mint. corn-
municntion may be effected by mea”8 of slm~le, grenrranged
L;*g”a1s.
When yractic~ble, the nutrol kader “my communicate with
the main body by mea”8 of visual sigmliug.
 PART III.-MARCHES AND CAMPS.

MARCHES.
TRAINING AND DISCIPLINE.
623. Marching constitutes the principal occupation of troops
In campaign and is one of the henviest callees of 108% Thie
loss may be materially reduced by proper traiuing and by the
WOPW conduct of the march.
624. The training of infantry should consist of systematic
physical exercise8 to develop the general physique nnd of
actnal marching to accustom men to the fatigue of bearing
am8 and equi~~~~ent.
Before mobilimtion troops should be kent in good physical
condition and 80 ,xncticed ae to teach them tborougbly the
princirtles of marching. At the first 0Dportunity after mobilisa-
tie” the men should be hardened to cover long dietances without
I”.%.
626. With new or untrained troogs, the process of hardening
the men to this work must be gradual. Immediately after be.
ing mustered into the service the physical exercises and mareh-
ing ehonld be begun. ‘Pen-minute periods of vigorous setting-
WI exercises should be giwn three times a day to loosen and
develop the muscles. One march should be made each day
with full equipment, beginning vith a dietnnce of 2 or 3 miles
and increasing the’ distance daily a8 the troops become hard-
ened, until a full day’s march under full etluipment may be
mnde without exhaustion.
626. A long march should not be made with untrnined
troops. If z long distance must be covered in a few days, the
5rst march should be short, the length being increased each
succeecling day.
627. Special attention should be mid to the ffttlng of shoes
and the care of feet. Shoes should not be too wide or too
!mCi”-ii-,,, 146
short. Sores and blisters “n the feet should be promptly
dressed during halts. At the “nil of the “larch feet should be
hatbed and dressed; the socks and, if practicnble, the 8boes
should be chnnm%
828. The drinking of wa1:er “n the march should be avoided
The thirst sh”“14 be thorongbly ~oenehed before starting “11
the mzmcb and after arrival in camp. On the mnrch tbe use
of writer should, in gmeri,l, be contined to g:,rgling the m”uth
3”d thront or to an “ccnsio”al *Inn11 drink at nmst.
GZ9. Eree~d for urgent r”asm~s, marches ~bould mt begln
before an burir after daylight, bnt if the distance to be cov-
ered necessitstes either breaking cnm~ before daylight or mak-
ing camp after dark, it is better to do the former.
Night marching should be avoided nben possible.
630. A halt of 16 minutes should be made after the first half
or three-qmrtws “f an hour of marching; thereafter a halt
of 10 mi”utes is made in eacl, hour. The number and length
of halts may be vnried, nccording to the weather, the ron@tion
of the roads, and the equipment mrried by the men. When the
day’s march is long a halt of an hour should be made at nom
and the nien nllowed to eat.
63 1. The rate of mnrch is regulated by the commander of the
leading c”m~~ai?y of encb regiment, or, if the battalions be Sean-
rated by greater than normnl distances, by the commander of
the leading eompnny of encb battnlion. II” ~bould maintain a
uniform rate, m~infhmxwl by tbc movements of trows or
mounted men in front of him.
The position of eom~~onies in the battalion and of battalions
in the regiment is “rdinnrilg changed daily s” that each in turn
lends.
632. The mnrching ellicicncy of an orgmimti”n is jndged
by the amonnt “f stmgxling and ekmgntion and the condition
of the men at the end “f the march.
An officer of ex!h compnxiy mnrches in its rear t” prevent
undue clungntion and stragglhlg.
When necessary for a mm to fall out on acconnt of sickness,
he should be giren n ~errnit to do so. This is presented to the
surgeon, who will admit him io the ambulance, have him wxtt
for the trains, or follow and rejoin his compnny nt the first halt.
633. Special attention sliould be pnid to the rate “f march.
It is greater for trained tllnrr for untrnined tr”“w; for small
commands than for large “nes; for lightly burdened thnu for
 ie*RmES. 14,

heavily burdened troops. It is frenter during cool than during

hot weather. With trained troops, in conmnnds of a regiment
“I’ less, mnrchini: over nvernge roads, the mte should be from
2P to 3 mites per hour. With lm,qer comnm~ds carrying full
equipment, the rate wilt be from 2 to 26 miles ner hour.
634. The mnrehing cagneity of trained infantry in small
commnnds is from 2” to 25 miles ,,er day. This distance mill
decrease as the size of the commnnd increases. B-or n corn-
ptcte division thr distance can seldom exceed 12: miles per day
““less the dlivision calnps in cotu”ln.
6.35. In targr commands the marching cnpncity Of troops is
!zreatty reduced by faulty march orders and poor march disci-
pline.
The march order should contain such instructions. as will en-
able the troops to take their crower places in col”mn I)romptly.
Delay or confusion in doing so shoulcl he investigated. On the
other band, orgnniention commondrrs sbo”ld be required to
time their movements so that the troops will not be formed
sooner than necesssry.
The halts and star-b of the units of R col”m” should he regu-
tated by the watch nnd be simultnneous.
Closing up during a halt, or elmn!zing gait to fain or lose
distance should be prohibited.
(0. I. D. R., Nos. 2 and 1%)
PROTECTlO,, OF THE MARCH.
Gent-m, Consider0tion.s.
6X3. A cot”“,” “1, the nmrch in the vicinity of the enemy is
covered by detaehmcnts called “advance ~“ards,” “rear guards,”
or “flank g~~wds.” The object of these cowring detachments is
to facilitate the advance of the main body and to protect it
from snrprisc or observation.
They facilitntr the ndvtuce of the main body bJi gromptlg
driving off small bodies of the enemy wh, se& t,, harass or
delay it; by removing obstwles from the tine of ndvnnce, by
repairing roads, bridges, etc., thus ennblin,o the main body to
advance unintaxruptedty in convenient numzt~ing foorm~tions.
They protect the main body by preventinS the rnen,~ from
firing into it when in dose formation: by holding the enemy and
ennbling the main body t” de,,loy before coming under effec,:ive
tire; by preventing its size and conditions from being observed
.
by the enemy; and, in retreat, by gaining time for it to make it6
escape or to reorgxnize its forces.
837. Tactical units should not be broken In making details
for covering detnchments.
038. The march order of the whole command sh&ld ex@.i”
the situation, and, nmong other things, detail the commander
nnd troons for ench coaerin~ detnchment. It should sgecify the
;&&c-t;=ie-tilt& ind the-distance to be mnintai”ed between
the main body and its covering detncbments., It should order
such reconnaissance as the commander specially desires to have
made.
The order of the commander of B covering detncbment should
clearly explnin the situation to subordinstcs, Sssign the troops
to the SubdivisionS, prescribe their distances, and order such
special rwonnais~nnee as may be deemed nec”Ssary in the hB-
ginning.
An advance or flank‘guard commander marches well to the
front and. from time to time, orders Such addition cut reconnuis-
sance or inakes such changes in his dispoSitionS as the circum-
stances of the CDS? demand.
Advance Guards.
839. An advance guard is a detachment of the main body
which precedes and covers it on the mnrch
640. The Sdrauce guard commander is reSp”nsihle for it8
formation and condo& He should bear in mind that its PUP
pose is to facilitate nnd protect the march of the main body.
Its 0~1 security must be effected by proper dispositions and
reconnaissnnce, not by tlnlld or co”ti”“s advance. It m”St
advance at normal gait and search nggressiveiy for information
of the enemy. Its action when the enemy SttemDtS to block it
with B large force deyends UI)OII the Situation and plans of the
commander Of the tr""PS.
‘~a,. The s+rencth of the advance guard varies ?=“I” “ne-
twentieth to one-third of the main body. dwending upon the
size of the main body and the service expected of the advance
guard.
‘342. The formation of the Sdrnnce gunrd must be ~“cb that
the enemy mill be met first by n patrol. then in turn by one or
more larger detachments. each eapahte of balding the enemy
until the next in rear has time to deploy before c”ming under
ez%ctive fire.
643. Generally Sn nd~ance guard consisting of n battalion or
more is divided primarily into the re8ewe and- the support.
When the advane” guard consists of less than a battalion, the
reserve is generally omitted.
644. In an advnnc6 euard consisting of two battalions or
less. the reserve nnd s$m”rt. if both are used, ~re~a,xxooxi-
matety equal; in larger adrance guards, the reerve is aaproxi-
mntely two-thirds of the whole detachment.
In an advance guard consisting of one battalion, the machina
guns, if any, form lxxt of the resen%. In an ndvancc guard
consisting of two or more hattnlions. the machine guns form
part, Of tile S”Pp”l%
645. The su~,mrt smds forward an sduance party. The crd-
nwce party, in tom, sends a patrol, called B point, still farther
to the front. Patrols are sent ““t to the flanks when nec”ssrr~.
When the dist”nce between pnrts of the advance gusrd or t&
nature of the country is such as to make direct axmnunieation
dii%cult. connecting tiles mnreh b&we”” the subdivisions to
keep up communiention. Each element of the column sends the
necessary connecting tiles to its front.
848. A battalion acting as an advance guard should be
formed about “8 follows: The P~SBWB. two com,,anies; the wp-
port, two companies; the odvnnce psrfy, three to eight squads
(about R bulf earnanny), deyending “,?“n the strength of the
~omnmies and the rpconn~issance to be made: the ,,oint. n non-
~“mmi~~t”“ed “f”cer and three or four men. Or’ the ~reserw
may he omitted. In such cnse the advance narty will consist
of one eonlpnny preceded by n strong point. The remaining
commnies form the sunmxt.
(347. The distances &&nting the parts of an advance guard
vary according to the mission of the whole force, the stze of
the advance guard; the m-oximity and cb”raCt”r of the enemy.
the nature of the country, etc. They increase ns the strength
of tho main body incre:lses: tbcy are less when operating in
rotting, broken country thnn in oven country: when in I)ursuit
of n defeated enemy than ngninSt “n aggressive foe; when
operating ngninst enrntry than when against infantry.
If there be n mounted noint. it 6bould “recede the Aiamnnntti
point bp 250 to 600 yards. The admn&‘garty may be stronger
when there is n mounted point in front. The infantry main.
t;,inS its gait withOUt r~f"r""ce t" the monnted point, the lnt.
ter regutntiu~ Its uu,rch on the former. (c. 1. I). II., NO. 2.)
8411. To ntior,, protection to au infantry co,,,mu, the co”ntry
must be obserwd on each side of the road ns far as the terrain
150 ?xIARCEES.
affords positions
uositions for eKectire ride fire won unon the column. If the
country that it is necessary to observe he “pen to riem from
the road, reconnoissonce is not necessary.
048. The advance guard is resFxMble for the neeessilry
reconnaissance of the country an both sides of the line of mmeb.
Special reconnaissance may be directed by the commauder of
the troops, or cavalry may be reconnoitering at considerable dis-
tances to the front and flanks. but this does not reliwe the ad-
vnn~e guard from the duty of local reconnaismnce.
050. This reconnaissance is etTeeted by ptrols sat out by
the leading subdivisions of the advance guard. In a large ad-
wmce guard the su,wort commander orders the necessary re-
e”““aisYa”ce.
Patrols should be sent to the flanks when necesssry to re
eonnoiter a specified loentity and should rejoin the c”lumn and
their proger subdivision BR soon as practicable. When the ad-
vance party is strong enough, the I)atro1s should he Sent out
from it. When depMccd by the patrols sent out, the advance
party should be reenforced during a halt by men &at forward
from the support. If it be im~mcticahle to send wtro1s from
the advnnce Party, they will be sent from the BuI)I)“rt.
Where the country is genernlly open to view, but loe”lities in
it might eoneeal an enemy of wme size, recom:~isSRnCe is nec-
essary. Where the road is er~osed to fire and the view is I’“-
stricted. a patrol should be sent to examine the country in the
direction from which danrer threatens. The abject may be ac.
complished by sending patrols to observe from p’ominent points.
When the ground I)ermits and the necessity exists, lmtrols may
be sent to march abreast of the co,,mm a,, distances which WP-
mit them to see important~fentures not visible from the road.
Mounted scouts or eavnlry, n-hen av+ilable, sb”“ld he used for
Bank &r”ls.
851. Cases may nrise where the best menns of covering the
head and flanks of the column will be by a line of skirmishers
extending for sever”1 hundred yards to both sides of the rood,
and deployed at interrals of from 10 to 50 yards. A c”l”~n
mny thus protect itself w&en pnssing through country covered
with bigb corn or similar vegetation. In such ca6e, the PW+
tntio,, forms a natural protection from ride tire beyond very
short ranges.
652. Fixed r”les for tbe strewth, formation, or conduct of
advance guards can not be given. Each case must be treated
to meet conditions as they exist. That mlution is generally the
 M*ECHES. 161

best which, with the fewest men and unbroken units, amply
protects the column nnd facilitates the advance.
Rear Gunrds.
653. A PB(IP guard is B detachment detailed to arotect the
main body from attack in mu. In it retre:,t, it checks pursuit
and embles the “rain body to increase the distance between it
and the enemy and to rc-furm if disor@udzed.
The general formation is Wilt of *n advance guard reversed.
654. Its commander *hould take admutage of every favor-
able “martunity to delay the ~,ursu”rs by ohstrueting the road
or by taking up specially f*rorable positions from whtch to
force the enemy to de,,loy. In this latter ci~s* care must be
taken not to become so c1osely *“gaged ns to render withdrawal
“nnecessarity dimcult. ‘The ,,osition taken should be selected
With reference to ens” of witbdramal and ability to bring the
enemy under tire at long range.
055. In large comumnds artillery and cavalry form a very
important part of the rear gunrd.
,=h,nk Guards.
656. A flank guard is a detachment detniled to cover the fank
of a column marching wxst,, or *cross the front of, an enemy.
It may be plnced in position to protect the ~)ass*ge, or it mi~y be
so mm&cd as to corer th” w~ssage.
637. The object of the flank fwrd is to hold the enemy ii
check long e”ougb to enable the main body to pnss, or, like the
advance guard, to amble the main body to deploy.
Like all other detachments, it sbonid be no larger than i*
necessary, and should not be detaikd exce,,t mben its ar?tecti”n
is required.
868. When n flrrnk guard consists of a regiment or less, its
distance from the main b”dy 8b”uld nut exceed a mile and a
half. Practicnble communication numt exist between it and
the main body.
0.59. The flank gu:ird is marched ns n setnrate command;
that is, with advmce or rear gunds or bot,h. as circumstances
denmnd, and with patr”liing on the exposed tlmk.
000. At times -it may be uecessuy for a” ndvance-guard
commander to send out large reconnoiteriug parties which tern-
pntrity assume the clumcter :~rrd dllties of a flank puard.
Such mu-ties sbo”ld he give” swcific orders as to when and
where they are to rejoin the column.
 CAMPS.
SANITATION.

861. If the area of the arailable ground is suilleient and

guitahle, the camp of the battalion or regbnent should conform
to the plates published in the I:ield Service Regulntions. Under
F3,mmrfavorable conditions, the brigade may camp in column 01’
in line of eolunms. In the htler formation the interral betwee*
pegbmnts should he about 50 yards. When the cxw site ha8
,, restricted area, intervals and dist~nees are reduced.
Under serrice conditions, camp sites that will permit the en-
~am~ment of regiments and bricndcs as nbovc indiw,ted will
not often he available and re~?ll~rity must be sacrificed.
~362. In large commands the halt order sho”ld assign camp
sltee to the next smaller commands. and tbe commanders of the
latter sho”ld loate their resrxctive commands to the best ad-
vantage on the area assigned them.
The s&?etion of Cornp sites.

66% In campa,aign, tactical necessity may leave littlc choice

in the selection of camp sites, but under any conditions the re-
quirements of sanit@ion should be given ever? consideration
consistent with the tilctical situation.
864. Great care should be exercised in selecting sites. In
genernl. the fallowing principles g-overn :
The site ~,,ou1,, be convenient to nu abundant supply 0” pure
water.
Good roads should lend to the earn,,. Interior camm”nk~-
tion throughout the camp Shmlld be easy. h earnIl near a maio
road is undesirable on account of dust and noise.
Wood, grass, forage, and supplies should be at band or easils
obtainable.
152
 The ground should accommodate the command without erowd-
inp and without comwllini: the troops of one unit to naes
through the eanq of another.
The site should be sufficiently high and rolling to drain off
8t”rm water readily, and, if the season be hot, to eatcb the
breeze. In cold weather it sho”ld preferably have a southern
eX~“s”l‘e, with woods to the north to break the cold winds. In
Wnrm weather an eastern exposure, with the site moderately
shaded by trees, i= riaoi*“hla
.I YII....Y.I.

The site shoul Id be dry. For this reason porous ~1, covered
with stout turf and underlaid by a sandy or gravelly snbsoil, 18
best. A site on cbw soil. or where the ~ro”nd water ~nnn,.ches
the surfafaee, is da”& coid, and “nb&iti&,i,~~ ‘,‘----- -==-----
Alluvial SOilS, mmhy ground, and ground near the base of
bills. or near thick woods or dense ve&tation, are ““desirable
a.8 enmp sites on necount of damgness Ravines and deyressions
awe likely to be ““duly warm and to have inautllcient or ““de-
sirable a,r CUri-e”ts.
Proximity to marsbe~ or stagnant water is undesirable o”
account of the dampness, mosq”itoes, and the diseases which
the latter transmit. The high banks of lakes or large streams
Often make desirable cam” sites.
Dry beds of streams should be avoided; they are subject to
8”dden freshet.
665. The oceuBation of old cama site8 18 dangerous, since
these are often permeated by elements of disease which persist
for considerable periods. Camp sites must be changed promptly
when there is evidence of soil pollution or when epidemic dis-
ease threatens, but the need for frwuent changes on this ne-
count may be B reflection on the sanitary administration of the
caml).
A change of cnmp site is often desirable In order to secure :I
chanxe of snrroundings and to abandon areas which have be-
come dusty and c”t “1).
Water Supply.
608. Immdiat6ly on making camp a guard should be placed
over the water sup,,lp. If the water be obtained from a stream,
places should be desiglmted for drawiw water (1) for drinking
and cooMug, (2) for watering ~“imaka, (3) for bathing and
washing clothing. The first nnmrd should be drawn fatihesb
up the stream ; the others, in the order named, d”wnstr”UXL
If the ntream be sm”11, the water supply may be increased by
building a dam. Small sgring8 may be dug out and each lined
with a gnbion. or B barrel or box with both ends removed, or
with stones, the space between the lining and the earth being,
rilkd with puddled clay. A rim of clay Should be built to keel,
out surface drainage. The fame method may be used near
8wanps. strenms, or Inkes to increase or clarify the water
SUPPlY.
867. Water that 1s not kmm to be DUE‘” should be boiled
20 minutes; it should then be cooled and aerated by being
nonred rmeatedlv from one clean container to another, or it
&my be pukied h$ approved amar‘ntm sumlied for the ~uraose.
668. Arran&wnents should be made for men to draw mater
from the authorized reee,,tades by means of a s&“t or other
similar arrangement. The dipping of water from the receptn-
&a, or the us” of a common drinking cup, should be prohibited.

Xifchens.

669. camp kettles can be Ilung 0” a S”pp”rt consisting of a

green pole lying in the crotches of two upright posts of the same
chsmeter.
A “arrow trench for the fire, about 1 foot deer,, dug under the
pole, not only protects the fire from the wind but saves fuel. A
still greater eeouomy of fuel can be effected by digging n similnr
trench in the direction “f the wind an<1 slightly mm-ONW than
the diameter of the kettles. T,,c Betdes are then placed on the
trench and the space betwe”” tbo kettles tilled in with stones,
clay, etc., leaving the the running beneath th” kettles. The
draft can he improrrd by building a chimney of stones, clay,
etc., at the leewnrd end of the flue.
Four such trenches radiating from B common cmtrnl chimney
will give on” flue for me whatever may be the direction of the
wind:
A slight clone “f the flue, from the cbimne~ down, provides
for drainage and improves the draft.
670. The lack of ““rtabl” ovens can be met by ovens con-
structed of stone and covered with ea)l‘tb to h&r retail1 the
beat. If no &“ne is available, “n em& barrel, with on” head
out, is laid on its side, covered with wet clay to B depth of 6 or
more inches and then with il layer of dry earth equally tbkt
A flue is constructed with the clay above the closed end of the
barn?,. which is then burned out with a hot fire. This leaves n
baked’clay coyering for the oven.
A recess cm be similarly constructed with boards or wen
brushwood, supported on D horizontal wale resting on upright
posts, covered and burnt out ns in the case of the barrel.
When clay hanks are available, on ““en may be excavated
therein and used nt once.
To bake in such ovens, first heat them and then close flues and
ends.
67 1. Food must be protected from flies, dust, and sun. Fa-
c,,,t,es must be provided for cleaning and scalding the mess
equipment of the men. Kitchens and the ground around them
must be kept scrupu,ous,y &an.
672. Solid refuse should be gronwtly burned, either in the
kitchen fire or in an improvised crematory.
673. In temporary camps, if the soil is porons, liquid refuse
from the kitchens may be strained through gunny sacking into
seepage pits dug near the kitchen. Flies must not have access
to these pits Boards or poles, covered with brush or ~~“8s
and a layer of earth may be used for this pnr~ose. The
strainers should “160 be protected from flies. Pits of this kind,
dug in dnyey soil, will not ouernte suecessfu,,y. All pits should
be tilled with earth before marching.
Oiaposd of Exemts.

674. Immediately on arriving in camp sinks should be dug.

This is n matter of fundamental snnitary impartonce, since the
most serious epidemics of camp diseases are s,xead from human
excrete.
One sink is usonlly provided for each company and one for the
“ffl~ers “f each battalion. Those for the “le” are inrari:,b,y
located on the side of camp opposite the kitchens. A11 sinks
shoold be so p,aced tbnt they can not pollute the water SIIJID,~
Dr camp site as a result of draimge or overflow. To insure
tbls, their location and their distmlce from cnm~ may be varied.
R’hen camp is made for B single night, shallow trenches, 12
inches dew and 15 to 18 inches wide, which the men mav
struddle, will ~udice,
 In more permanent carws, the trenches should be about 2 feet
wide, 6 feet deep, and 15 feet long. They should be provided
with seats md back rests made of poles, and should be screened
by brush or old tent fly.%
675. In cold weather the contents of sinks should be covered
owe daily with quicklime, ashes, or dry earth. When filled
to within 2 feet of the top, sinks should be discontinued and
fillpn in.
Open pits are dangerous during the flp season. However’, the
dnnger mily be greatly reduced by covering the excreta With
earth or by a thorough daily burning of the entire mea of the
trench. Combostible swee,li”gs “P stmw, saturated with Oil,
may be used for this purpose.
In Ry season, trenches nmy be closed with seats covered down
to the ground with muslin and supplied with self-closing 1168.
Urinnl troughs, made of muslin and coated mith oil or goint,
should diLY!hnrge into the treochex.
678. I” Dermnnent camps special sanitary facilities for the
disposal of excreta mill ordinarily be: Brovided
If necessx~y, urinal tubs may be pli xed in the compnny streets
at night and removed at reveille. Their location stiould
plainly marked and thoroughly and frequently diainfwt~rl.
657. When troops bivouac for the ni&t the necessitv for
extensive sanitary precautions is not great,: however, shal 10,”
sink trenches should be dug to prevent general pollution of the
vicinity. If the cooking be collectire, shallow kitchen si "BS
Shmddbe dug. If the cookirrg be individual, the men shonli I be
reqnir~l to build their tires on the leeword flank of the CLmw
or bi”““aC.
Before marching, “11 trenches should bc filled in.
PROTECTIO” OF CAMP OR BIVOUAC.

Oeneral Considemtions.

078. The outpost is a col~erine detachment detailed to secure

the camp or biroune against sorprise and to prevent an xttark
npon it before the troops ran rxep4re to resist.
6 78. The size and disposition of the outpost will dlepend upon
many eircun~stances, such as the size of the whole comwmd. the
proximity of the enenv and the situation with reswct to him,
the nature of the terrain. etc.
 lxms. 157

A anitable strength may vary from a very small frnetion to

one-third of me whole force. For a Single eomgany in bi”O”aw
a few sentinels and patrols will sutfice; for a huge command n
more eh3llorate O”tDOGt systenr must be grovided. It should be
no stron.@r than is consistent with reasonnble secur‘lty‘.
The most economical protection is furnished by SeeDing claw
eontnct with the enemy by means of OUtpOSt ~iltmls. in con-
junction with resisting.detnchments on the avenuee.of approach.
The O”tLKxt sbonld be coml,ased Of COnmete orm”izati”“s.
880. In a brigade or smaller force on the march toward the
enemy, the outpmt is generally formed from the advance guard.
and is relieved the following day when tile new ndvB”ce g”ard
. C~DSS~Sthe line of outgunrds. In a retreat, the detail for out-
post duty is genernuy mwle from the main body. The new ant-
gost becomes the rear guard the following dny.
881. When, as in large forces, a” advance and rear guard
performs snch dnty for serernl clnys, the outpost, during thin
period, is fnmisbed by the advance or rear guards.
When tile eOmma”d is small aud stntionnry for severa, clays,
the outpost is relieved daily. In large commnnds, the outpost
will. as n rule, be reliered at intenda of seversl days.
682. The positions held by the subdivisions of the outpost
should generally be grepared for defense, but conditions may
render this unnecessary.
Troops on ontgm4t keey concealed as much 88 i8 consistent
with the proper performance of their duties; eswcially do they
avoid appearing on the sky line.
outyost troop9 do not render honors.
LlistrAution of outpost Troops.

683. The outpost will generally be divided into three parts.

These, ih order from the main body, are the resewe. the line oi
w~mwts. and the line of outwards.
‘kie &tnnces Sepamting ibese lxirts, and their distsnee from
the main body, will depend upon the object sought, the nature
of the terrain, and the size of the eomm;,nd. Thwr can be no
uniformity in the distnnce between mmm-ts and reserve, nor
between ontgnnrds and s”p,mrts, eye” in the same o”t,,ost. Thr
a”e”lleS Ff amnmch ““d the imp”rtil”t featnres Of the terrain
will largely control their exact positiom.
168 CB?dPS.

The cwtl)o~t of n small force should ordinariiy hold the enenw

beyond effectire ride range of the main body until the latter em
deploy. F”P the same yurpose the outnost of a large force
6h”“kl hold me elkmy beyond nPtiilePy range.
084. The resewe constitntes the “min body of the o”tWBt
and is held nt mme central point from which it can readily
support the froaps in front or hold LI m/lying position on which
they may retire. The reserre L”ay be Omitted When the outpost
COnsiSts of less tIEIn two colnpanics.
The reserm2 may com~n%e onefourth to two-thirds of the
strength Of the O”tpixt.
685. The supports constitote n line of s”pporti”g and resisf-
ing detacinnents, wrging in size *mm 3 half CO”qla”y to a ’
battalion. ‘They furnish the line of outguords.
The 8”ppmts are numbered CO”sec”tiYely from right to left.
‘They are placed at the nmre im~rtant paints on the outpost
line, nsnnllg in the line on which resistance is to bc mnde in
ease of attack.
686. A6 a general mk, rcml~ exercise the greatest influence
on the location of supports, and a mwmrt will generally be
placed on or near n rend. The section which it is to cover
shanld be clearly defined by nxxn.5 of tangible lines on the
ground and should be such that the summrt is eentraliy located
therein.
687. The outguards constitute the line of small detachments
rlumest to the front 2nd nearest to me enemy. H-or convenience
they are chssifled ns pickets, sentry squads, and cassock posts.
They are numbered consecutively from right to left in each
G”pl,“rt.
088. A picket iu a group consisting of two or more squads,
ordinarily not exceeding hnlf n ~ompuny, posted in the line of
O”tgwilrdS to cover n given s?ctor. It furnishes patrols and one
or more sentiuels! double senlinels, sentry squids, ur cossnck
psts for ohervatmn.
Pickets are Dlaced at the more important goints in the line
Of Olltg”ardS, such 89 road forks. me strength of each depends
“pm the number of small groups required to obserre properly
its sector.
889. A sentry squad is a squad post4 in observation at an
indicated point. It posts R donble sentinel in observation, the
remaining men resting near by ;wd furnishing the reliefs Of
sentinels. In MEX cmes it may bc required to furnish R patrol.
 CAIsfPS. 1.59

__~. .4. E”.“Pk

ken. . ..___.. -... _.-...... “f fonr. -.-.
nnat onnaial~a rtw”~ .Tt ._
iE -..
nn ohsewn-
..~~~~~.
tion group similar to a sentry squad, but emaloys a single
sentinel.
1391. At night, it will sometimes be advisable to place 8ome
of the outguards or their sentinels in a potiition different from
that which they occupy in the dnptime. In such case the ground
should be carefully studied before dark and the change made
at dusk. ITomerer, a change in the position of the outwnrd
will be exee,,tiun;,l.
BBZ. Sentinels are genw~lly used singly in daytime, but nt
night double ~entinek will be required in moot cases. Sentinels
furnished by cossnck posts or sentry squads are kept near their
man,,. Those furnished br. _,,ickets mas be as far as 100 yards
i&a+.
Every sentinel should be able to communicate readily With
the body to which he belo”&%
603. Sentinel nmtfi are numbered conseeutivelff from right
to left in each oukuard. Sent,rv sounds and cos&k IX)& fir-
nisbed by tickets are counted nb se&i”el D&s.
804. Instead of “sing o”tg”ards along the entire front of
observation, Part of this front nlay be ewered by ~atw,s only.
These should be used to corer such sections of the front as can
be crossed bs the enemy only with ditlicultv and over which he
is not likely-to attempt-a c&sing After d&c.
In dngligbt much of the local pntrolling may be dispensed
with if the country can be s&n from the posts of the sentinels.
Rowerer. “ntrois should freauentl~ be ~llshe.3 mell to the front
unlem tlk‘groond in that dikti& is eke~tiotional~y open.
095. Patl-OlS “P Se”ti”elS must be the first troops which the
enemy meets, and each body in rear must have time to wwxwe
for the blow. These bodies cause ns much delay as possible
without sacrificing themselves, and gradually retire to the line
where the o*Lpost is to make its resistmce.
696. Patrols n,“st be used ,o kc,, UP connection between the
parts of the ontpost except when. dnriog daylight, certain frac-
tions or groups are nnmally visible. After dark this connee
tion most bc “l;,i”,ai”ed thl.““ghO”t the mtwst exwpt whew
the lerger subdivisions arc provided with w-ire conrmnnicntion.
607. In addition to ordinnry outguards, the outpost com-
mander may detail from tk reserve one UT ulore detached wsts
to wwr roads or areas not in the general line assigned to the
8”pports
160 CdHPS.
In like manner the commander of the whole force may order
detached posts to be sent from tbe main body to ewer imlIortant
roads ur localities not included in the outpost line.
‘The number and stre,,gth of detached uosts are reduced to
the absolute needs of the situation.
Establishing the Outpost.

898. The outwmt is posted as quickly 8s possible 80 that

the troops cm the sooner obtain rest. Until the leading outpost
troops are able to BSSWW their duties, temporary protection,
known a8 the mclrch outpost. is furnished by the nearest avail-
able troops.
699. The halt order of the commander, besides giving the
necessary information and assknirlg camp Bites to the parts of
the commnnd, details the troops to constitute the outpost, a&
signs R commander therefor, desi!gnates the general line to be
occupied, and. when practicable, points out the Imsition to be
held in case of attack.
700. The outpost commander, upon receipt of this order,
shollld issue the outpost order with the Ienst practicable delay.
In large commands it may often be necessary to give the order
from the niap, ,,ut usually the outpost commander will ha”e to
make so”lE paiminary Peco”“ai*sn”ce, “UkSS Ire InaS a* RCCII-
rate and detailed map.
The order gires such awilable information of the sitnatlon as
is necessary to the compkte and pro,~~’ guidance of subordi-
antes; designates the troops to constitute the supports; 88signs
their location and the sector each is to cover; provides for the
necessary detached psts : indicntes any spechl reconnaissance
that is to be made: orders the location and disposition of the
reserve; disposes of the train if same is ordered to join the
ontwst; and informs subordinates where information will be
sent.
501. Generally it is preferable for the ontwst commander to
give verbal orders to his suggort commnnders from some loo11-
ity which ov~rhk* ‘the tewain. The time nnd locality should
be WJ selected that the support commanders mng join their
commands and conduct them to their w~sitions without causing
“nneces88ry delay to their tro”,x. The reserre commnnder
should, if possible, receive his orders at the saw2 time ns the
 WDp”rt commandrrs. s”b”rdi”ntes to whom he gives ordew
se”nmtelY should be inforllled of me location of other “arts Of
tbi outpost.
I” huge ““tp”sts, written orders ilre frenuently most eon-
Omient.
After issuing the initial orders, the outpost commander in-
w~ects the outpo&, orders the necessary changes or additions,
and sends his superior a report of his dispositions.
702. The msewe ia marched to its post by its commander,
who then sends out such detncb”le”ts as hare bee,, ordered and
places the rest in camp or birouac, “rer rrhich at least one
sentinel should be ~“sted. Connection must he maintained with
the main body, the sumoorts sod nearby detncbed posts.
703. The supports march to their posts, ming the necessary
eorering det:,chments when in ndraixe of the march ““t~ost.
A ~nmort commander~s order should fully er~,ain the situation
to subordinates, or to the entire c”mm:md, if it be small. It
should detail the troops for the different ““t~unrds sod, when
neee.ssnry. d&m the sector each is to cover. It should provide
the necessary sentinels at the Post of the s”mor‘t, the I)atr”,s
to be sent therefrom. and should arrange for the necesmly in-
trenching. Connection should be maintained with adjoining
sumorts and with the outguards furnished by the support.
704. In posting his connn~nd the *u~pxt commander must
neck to eo~er his sector in such manner that the enemy can not
reach, in dangerous numbers and unobserved, the aosition of
the s”~)p”rt or pas8 by it within the sector intrusted to the
mmotit. On the other hand, he m”st economize nvx, on ohser-
vation nod patrol duty, for these duties are unusually fatiguing.
He must practice the greatest economy of men eomi~tent with
the requirements of ~rncticnl security.
705. AB soon x8 the ,ms?ing.of the s”~),,“rt is completed, its
commander c”ref”lly im,,M‘ts the dimxmitiom and corrects de.
f&s, if any, and reports the disposition of his support, includ-
ing the patrolling ordered, to the ““t~)“st commnnder. This rr+
sort i8 wzferahly made by means of a sketch.
700. Each outpord is mnrched by its commander to ita
assimed station, and, es~ecinllp in the! cnse of R picket, is cov-
ered hy the “ecesmr,y ,,a+r”llinf to Drerent sor,,rise.
Having re:arhed the ,>“siti”n. the comnlander &qlains the
situation to his men and establishes reliefs for each sentinel.
9”Plo’-li-1,
162 c*bms.

ma, if possible, for each patrol to be furnished. Beside3 these

sentinels and patrols, a picket must hare a sentinel at its gout.
The conmanaer then po8ts the sentinels ana points out to
them the prh~ipal feitt~res, SLICK BS towns, roads, nIla streams,
ana give9 their nnmes. Iie gives the direction alla bmi0n “f
the enemy, if kmvn, alla of adjoining ports of the OU~DOS~.
He gires to patrd~ the snux! information and the necessary
orders na to their routes and the frequency with which the
same shall be covered. Each untrol should go over its route
once before dark.
707. Every picket should maintain connection by pntrols
with 0utgunras on its right ana left. Each commander will
take precaution to c011ced his 0utsuara and will generally
strengthen his position by intrenehing.
I'ART IV.-CEREMONIES AND INSPEC-
TIONS.

CEREMONIES.
&nerd Rules for Ceremonies.
108. The order in which the troops of the various arms are
nrrungea for CePem”nieS is prescribed by Army Reglllations.
When forming *or CerefnOnieS the comgxnies Of the battalion
ana the bimtam~ Of the regilnm ar~ posted from right to left
in me ana from head to rem in mhmn. in the order o* rank
of their respective commanders yrcsent in the formation, the
senior on the right or at me ma.
the COU)~XU~~~ faces the c0~nl~nna ; snb0md.te commanders
face to the front.
,09. At the c”mmn”a present (111tn8, given by the colonel, the
lieutenant colonel ma the colonel’s staff salnte; the major’s
stat? salute nt the mnjor’s eommnnd. Ewh stuff returns to the
SBI‘P~~ OP order Cohen the command 0~3~ (1~m8 is given by its
chief.
no. At the ossembl~ for a ceremony companies are formed
on their 0w pmaes ma inf~m~~uy ins~wt~3.
At adjutant’s cdl, except far ceremonies involving n single
battnhn, each bnttamn is formed on it8 own Dt,mae, repxts
me meed, ana the battalion gresented to the major. At the
sccona sounding of adjutant’s call the regiment is formed.
REVIEWS.
cenerld Rdes.
711. The ndjutnni posts men or otherwise mnrks the points
where the co,““m changes direction in such n13nner that its
Rnnk in trussing mill be about 12 prices from t.he reviewing
“nicer.
ThC Dost Of me revieWi”g omcer, usnn,,g opposite the center
of the line, is indiented by n mnrker.
ofliee~ of the s:me OP higher graae, ana distinguished per-
sunager; iwitea to irccm”pn”y me rwiewing omer, pktee them-
16.3
 164 CEREHONIEL

S&W on his left: their stnffs nnd orderlies place themselves

respectivdy 0~ the kft 0f the staff and oraedies of the I‘W~W
ing alficer ; all others who necomgnny the reviewing ofieer place
themselves on the left of his staff, their 0radies in renr. a
stnff oflicer is designated to es(fonrt distinguished personrrgeb
nnd to intlieate to.them their aro~er pxitions.
71%. While rising ~:ir”““,, the truops, the reviewing omce,
mny direct his staff, flag, and orderlies to remain at the post
of the reviewing *Ricer, or that only his nersonnl st*ff and fIna
shall ileeom~any him; in either rase the commamding officer
alone nccompnnies the reviewing *dicer. If the reviewing *dicer
is accmn~aniea by his entire stnff, the stuff ofiicers of the corn-
nlnnaer ~1~02 themwe 0~ the mht of the stuff of the I‘~v~w-
The revie\vi”g *Ricer and others at the reviewing stnna salute
the odor as it gasses ; when ~nssing around the troops, the rc-
viewins omer una those nccouumnvinc him sshte the color
when &5ing in front of it.
The rwiewing atlicer returns the salute of the commandine
omcer of the troops only. Those who accompany the reviewing
omcer a* not salute. (0. I. U,= ZL,
n ‘,“a.
I’^” y* u,‘s
“-2 u.,* ’
,133. I” passlug in revie, v. enCh stnE salutes with its com-
manaer. (0. 1. I>. ix, No*. e ana 4.1
714. After snluting the rwiewing otlicer, the commanding
*firer “f the b”““S turns Out “I- the e”,“““,~ tnliea noat on the
right of the reviewing oficer, an4 returns saber: the members
of his s&E accompanying him take post an the right of the
reviewing omcer’s stolr and return saber. When the renr de-
ment of his commnnd has pussea, without changing his position.
the com*nnnding *dicer of the troops snlutes the reviewing
oflicer; he and the nmnbers of his staff aecompnnying him then
draw suber ana rejoin his commnnd. The commrmding oklicer
of the troops and the members of his staff are the only ones
who turn out of the column.
(0. I. D. R., wo. IO.)
715. If the pa30~ re~im~g the CO~~EU~ is not m0untea,
the c0mnnainfi offleer md his sL;clf on tumin~. out of the
eohmn nfter passing the reviewinc *Ricer dismount wxmra-
tory to taking post. I” such Case, the sn,utr Of the co”lm5ina.
ing dicer, prior to rejoining his command, is madr wit,h the
hma befme mmnti~g.
718. \wr?* the ran,< of t,re rwiewing oincm entit,r? bin? to
the honor, each regimrntal color snluies at the e~m,w,r~l present

-
 CEREMOFTIES

arn~s. given or repeated by the major of the battalion with

Which it is posted; and again in passing in review.
717. The band of au orgnnization plays while the reviewing
*dicer is passing in front of xnd in rear of the orgardzation.
Each band. immediately after passing the reviewing odieer.
turns out of the column, t?~tes post in front of and fncinz him,
continues to play until its regiment has passed, then ceases
playing and foII011.s in rear of its regiment; the band of the
followini: reximent commences to ~,ay as SO”” as the ,,reeed,n~
bnna has ee:ts”a.
Whil” marching in review but on” band in each brigade play8
at a time, and but one band at B time when within 100 pies
of the reviewing officer.
718. If the rank of the reviewing odicer entitles him to the
honor, the band plays the prescribed notional air or the ma
music sounds to the color, march, ftourishes, or ruffles when arms
we presented. When passing in re”iew at the moment the
re~imentn, color salutes, the m”sicia”~ halted in front of the
reviewing officer, sound to the co/or, march. flourishes, or ruk%s.
(0. I. I). R., No. 6.)
,I% The formation for review may be modified to suit the
ground, and the present awn8 and the ride around the line by
the reviewing officer may be dispensed with.
720. If the nest of the reviewing odicer is 00 the left of the
column, the troops march in review with the guide left; the
commanding officer nnd his staff turn out of the coL,,mn to the
left: taBLug post as prescribed above, but to the left of the
revmving *dicer: in saluting, the captains give the command:
1. Eyes. 2. LEFT.
7Zl. Except in the review of a single battalion, the troops
pass in review in quick time only.
722. In revlew~ of briyndes or luger commands, eaeb bat-
talton, after the rear hns passed the reviewing oflicer 50 paces,
takes the double time for 100 yards in order not to interfere
with the mnrch of the column in r”“r; if necesswy, it then
turns out of the ~olu~nn nnd returns to e,uq, by the most prae-
ticnble route: the lending bnttnlion of each regiment is followed
by the other ,mits of the regiment.
123. In B brignde or lnrper review a regimentnl commonaer
may cause his regiment to stnnd ot ease. rest, or stack ohms and
+cd/ out ana rewme attention, so as not to interfere with the
ceremony.
724. When a* organizntion is to be rrvi*werl before an in-
spector junior in rnnk to the connnnnding ofliccr. the cummnnd-
166 CEREMONIES.

ing ofiicer rec?iives the rwiew and is nccompnnied by the i”-

sIK’ctor, wto takes post on his left.
Rnftolion Rwiw.
786. The battalion having bee” formed in line, the major
faces to the front; the re”ie\\‘ing affk!er moves n few paces
towar* the major and halts; the major turns. about and corn
mnnds: 1. Present, 2. IRMS. nnd again turns “bout and salutw
The reviewing “dicer wt”r”s the s”l”te ; the major turns about,
brinm the buttnlio” to order arms, and again twns to the front.
The reviewing 00i~er npproaches to about 6 pzces frnm the
major, the latter salutes, txkes post on his right, and :ICCOI”-
punks him around the buttnlion. The band phgS. The review
ing officer proceeds to the right of the hand, passes in frmt of
the captnins to the left of the line and retwns to the right,
wssing in rem of the file closers and the band.
On arriving again at the right of the line, the major salutes.
halts, and when the reviewing off~er und staff bme nnssed
moms directly to his post in fret of the battalion, *“ox it, and
commands: 1. Pass in review, 2. Squads right, 3. MARCH.
At the first command the band changes direction if necessary,

At the third commnnd, give” when the bilnd has chnn~ed

direction, the battalion moves off, the bnnd playing; without
comma”d from the major the eoL”m” changes direction at the
point.5 indicated, and column of e”m~a”ie~ nt full distance is
formed successiveIy to the left at the seemd change of dire
tie”: the maim +nl<w his post 30 paces in front of the band
immczlintely after the i ;econd ehnnrre: the band havina “nssed
the reviewi”~ ofker, turns to the left o”t of the eol”“;n; takes
Past in front of a”,, fncing the reviewi”~ oflicer, nnd rrmnins
there until the review tennimtes.
The major and stntr ml”te, turn the bend as in e)~s right.
and look toward the re~iewine n”ice,’ when the maim is R
p:,ces from him; they return t” the carry and turn tik be”4
and eyes to the front when the major 11”s gassed 0 pnees
beyond hi”,.
Without facing about, each enptnin or specinl unit commander,
except the drum “la jar, mmma”ds : 1. Eyes, in time to add,
2. RIGHT. when nt 6 pilces from the reviewing omer, and eom-
mands FROfU when at 6 paces beyand hi”,. At the ca,“ma”d
eyes the company odicers nrmed with the saber erec”tr the first
~0tio~ Of present saber; at the C”n”n”“d right 811 turn bead
 CEREiXONIES. 167

and ews to the right, the eornpnny officers complete present

saber and the noncommissioned officers armed with the saber
~~eeute the first motion of ~*“wnt saber; at the command
front all turn bend and eyes to the front, and otkers nnd non-
commissiorled officers armed with the saber *es”me the carry
Saber; withoUt Z,*ms in bnnd tbc first motion of the hnnd
Salute is made at the commrmd right and the second motion
not made uuti1 the c”mm;md tront.
Noncon~mis~ioned stat? oficers, noncommissioned officers in
eommnd of subdivisions, and the dlrum mnjor salute, turn the
head and eyes, *et”*” to the frwt, *cs”me the c;,**y o* d*op the
hand, xt the points prescribed for the major. Officers and dls-
mounted noncommissioned o,i,~e*s in command of S”bdivisi,,“s
with a*ms in band render the rifle or saber salute. Guides
;;?yfyd with the step, tmee, and direction do not execute eyes
If the reviewing office* is entitkd to a salute from the colors,
the regimental Color snlutes den at G prices from him, “m, is
,raised when nt 6 ,x,ces beyond him.
The ma.ior, having saMed, ti&es post on the right of the
reviewing “firer, retUrns s;,be* and remains the,y until the *ear
of the bnttalion has ~>~ssedl, then salutes, draws saber, and *e-
joins his bxttxlion. Tbe band ceases to play when the eo,“mn
has completed its second change of direction after passing the
*e”tewi”g ofmer.
cc. I. n. n., NOS. G and IO.)
726. When the battalion arrives at its original position in
column, the major commands : 1. Double time, 2. MARCH.
The band plays in double time.
The bnttnlio” passes in review as before, except that in donble
time the command eyes Gght is omitted and there is no sn,“tinS
excwt by the major when be leaves the reviewing omcer.
The review te*mi,“otes when the rear eompa”y has gassed
the *ev,ewine officer; the bnnd the” ceases to play and ““less
otberwk directed by the major, returns to the position it oecu-
Pird. brfore “lnrchiug in review, or is dismissed; the major
re~oms the hnttalion and brings it to quick time. The bnttnlion
then executes s”ch movements as the reviewing officer may
hnvc diwcted, o* is marcbctl to its parude S*o,,“d and dismissed.
iarching past in donb,e time may, in the discretion of the
reviewing oflicer, be omitted; the review terminates when the
mxjor rejoins his battalion.
727. At bnttntion rwie~v the major and his staff may be dis-
mounted in the discretion of the cornm:mding ofncer.
 168 CERE%OXI’ES.

Regimental f?ev;*w.
728. The regiment is formed in linP or in line of masses.
In line the review proceeds as iu the battalion, substituting
“ colonel ” for “ major ” and “ regimeut ” for “ battalion.”
To march the regiment in review, the ealonel commands:
PASS IN REVIEW, The bnud changes direction, if necessary, and
halts. Each major then commands: 1. Squads right, 2. MARCH.
The band marches at the command of the major of the lend-
ing battalion.
At the Second change of direction each mnj”r tdkes &nst 20
paces in frunt of his lending C”~BIIII~.
The rear of the column having passed the reviewing “dicer,
the battalions, unless otherwise directed, are marched to their
parades and dismissed.
In line of mnmes, when the reviewing “dicer ha8 passed around
the re&,ent, the colonel commands: PASS IN REYIEW. ~,,e
band changes direction if n”cessary, and halts. The major of
the right battalion then commands: 1. Column of squads. ht
complmy. squads right, 2. MIRCX. At the third command the
band and the leading eom~any of the right battalion m”ve “tp.
Each company and battalion in reai- moves off in time to follow
at it8 aroper distance.
729. The review of a 8m11811body of troops composed of
different arms is conducted on the ~rinci~lles laid down for the
regiment. The trw,,s of each arm are formed nnd marched
according to the drill regulations for that arm.
Review of Large Cornmoods.
739. A command consisting of one regiment. or less, and
detachments of other 8rm8 is formed for review as ordered by
the commanding “tticer. The ~rincipbs of regimental z-e&w
will be observed whenever Bracticable.
731. In the review of a brigade “r &rger command the
present mm8 and the ride uround the line by the reviewing
odiccr are omitted. The tr”“DS form and march in the order
prescribed by the commanding officer.
PARrlDES.
General Roles.
782. If dismounted, the “dicer receiving the parade, and his
staff, stand at parade rest, with arms folded, while the band IS

-
 CEBE?dOrnIES. 169

Sounding off: they resume xttention with the adjutant. If

monnted, they remain at attention.
739. At the commute report, given by a battalion adjutant.
the captains in succession from the right salute nnd report:
A (or other) comglmy, present or accounted for: or, A (or other)
company, (so many) officers or enlisted men absent, and resume
the order saber; at the same comwnnd give” by the regimrntnl
adjutant, the majors similarly report their battalions.
Rottdlion Parade.
794. At adjutant’s call the bnttalion is formed in line but
not presented. Lieutenants take their posts in front of the
center of their respective platoons at the captain’s command
for dressing his company on the line. The majpr takes post at
n convenient .distance in front of the center and facing the
battalion.
The adjutant, from his post in front of the center of the
battalion, after commanding: 1. Guides, 2. POSTS, adds: 1.
Parade, 2. REST; the battalion executes parade rest. The adju-
tant directs the band: SOUND OFF.
The band, playing in quick time. passes in front of the line of
ofTleers to the left of the line nnd back to its post on the right,
when it ceases rdaying. At evening parade, when the band
mases plo;ying, retreat is sounded by the field music and, follow-
ing the last note and while the dng is being lowered, the band
plays the Star Spongied Rlmner.
Just before the last note of retreat, the adjutant c”mes to
attention, and, ns the last note ends, commands: 1. Battalion,
2. ATTENTION. 3. Present, 4. ARMS, and salutes, retaining that
position until the last note of the National Anthem. He then
turns about and reports: Sir, the parade is formed. The major
directs the adjutant: Take yaw post, Sir. The adjutant m”yes
at n trot (if dismounted, in quick time), passes by the maj”r’s
right, and takes his post.
The major draws saber and commands: 1. Order, 2. ARMS,
nnd adds such exercises in the manual “I arms xs he may de-
sire. Odicers, noncommissioned oficers commanding companies
or armed with the saber, and the color guard, having once exe.
euted order arms, remntn in that Dositlon during the exercises
in the mnnual.
The Iuajor then dire& the adjutant; Receive the repvta, Sir.
The adjutant, passing by the mnjor’s right, advances at a trot
(if dismounted, in quick time) toward the ce”ter of tbc line,
 17c CEBEPONIES

halts midway between it and the major, and conmnnds:

RTP”I)T.
The reports remired, the ndjutnnt turns about, and reports:
Sir. cd/ om present or accounted few; or Sir. (so many) others or
enlisted men me absent, iwlucliog in the list of sbseutecs those
fro”3 the baud and field music rqi”,‘ted to him by the drum
major pi-ior to the pamdr.
The major directs: Publish the orders, Sir.
TIE adjotnnt turns about and commanda: Attention to orders:
he then reads the orders, 2nd commands : 1. O,?icers, 2. CENTER.
3. MARCH.
At the command center, the eompxny oF~“r8 carry Faber and
fx!P to the center. At the c”mmand mor~ch, mey cI”se to the
center and fwe to the front: the ndjutnnt turns abou$ ;md takes
his post.
The oWcers having closed ;md faced to the front. the senior
e”m”~,nds: 1. Forwnrd. 2. MARC”. TIE o&em ndmnee, the
band playirif; the left “flier of tbe center or right center C~I-
pally is the guide, and nmr~bes on the major; the adicers ar”
balted at 0 ~aees fronl tb” major by the senior who eom”land8:
1. Officers. 2. HALT. They h:,,t a,~,, ‘sn!,,te, returning to the
cxrry snber vith the mn jar. The mnjm the” gires such instru~
ti”nS ns he deelw, necess;lry, c,rrd ewmxands: 1. Oficers.
2. POSTS, 3. IWARCH.
Ait the c”I”ma”d post*, c”,,l,,n,,y ofiil2ers f& about.
At the eon~roaud march, they step oft with guide ns before,
and the senior conmnnds: 1. D~eers, 2. RALT, so ns to halt 3
~ace8 froln the liue; he then adds: 1. POSTS, 2. MARCH.
At the comnmnd posts, “dicers face outward ;,nd. at the mm-
nland march, step oft in ~uc~c?8sioll at, 4 puees distance, resume
their ,,osts oud order enber; We ,ie,,!mants mm’cb dirwHy to
their posts in rear of their eourp;n~ies.
The nnmk crnses when 011 otticers liarc resumed their posts.
The mnjor then conm~anrla: 1~.Pass in review, 2. Squads right,
3. MARCH, and returns saber.
The buttali”,, n,nrcbes accordin g to’ the principles of review :
when the last commny has ,,i,sed, file cere~uony is c”nc,“ded.
The band continnes to p,;!y whiir the ~on,,xmie~ nrr in ~nareh
upon the ,~amde gromrd. Coin,pnies are fnrmed in c”,~~mn “f
squads, s-itbout bnlti,,~, s,nd nre ,nmehetl to their res,xctire
1!81’8de8 by their cn&,ins.
When the C”III,XIII~ otBcws hnre saluted the mnjor. hc mny
direct them to form line with the still?, in which case they indi-

-
 CEREMONIES.

vidually move to tile front, passing to tile right arId left .Of the
major and *t&T, halt on the line ~stnblished by the staff, Iace
about, and st;md at attention. me mosic CeaeeB when tile om-
cers join the staff. The major eawes the companies to pass in
rwlew under the commnnd of their first sergeants by the same
commands ns before. The company o~icers return saber ~4th
the major and remain at attention. (C. I. D. R., NO. 19.)
Regimento/ Parade.
755. The regiment is formed in line or in line of masses:
the formation having ~rocecded UD to, but not includtng the
Present. the “amde “roceeds as described for the battnlion. with
the follawin~eacepiiom:
“ Colonel n is substituted for “ major ” “ repiment ” for “ bat-
talion,” in the description, and “ bnttnlions ” for “ lmttalion ” in
the eommnnds.
Iieutennnts remain in the line of file closem.
After ““blishiw the orders, the adjutant commands: 1. Offi-
cem, cm&r, 2. MAkH.
The company commanders remain at tlleir posts witlr their
compa”ies.
The l%hl and staff otmicers *mm one line, closing cm the center.
The senior ~o~lmand~: 1. Forward. 2. MARCH.
The second mojnr is the guide and mnebes on the colonel.
After being dismissed by the colonel, each major mcxw in-
dividnnlly to the front, t”rn~ outward, and followed by his WIT
res”mes his ,x,st by the mast direct liue. The colonel directs
the lieutenant colonel to march the re&“ent in review: the
latter moves to a point midway between the colonel and the
regiment and msrche~ the regiment in review RS arescribed. If
the lieu+e!~~nt colonel is not present the colonel gives the nece~
sary commnnds for marching the regiment in ,w’iew.
ESCORTS.
Escort Of tne co/or.
,130. The regiment being ill line. “1‘ line of rnmses, the colonel
dl?tdlS n compnny, Other tllnn the CO1”T rompany, to rrceiat! and
ex”lt the ontiotra1 COlOP to its pkm?e. Ixwin:: the rerernony the.
re@me,~tu, color remains with the color guard at its post with
the regiment.
The band moves straight to its front until ckcr of the line of
field ofi%ers, clmnfes dirwtion to the right, nml is halted; thi!
,lwic”nted c”rnpxny forms C01”“,” of I,lat0011S in renr Of the
band, the color benrer or bearers between the ~,latw,ns.
 172 CEREMONIEB
CEREMONIEB.

The. escort then mnrches witb”“t nmsie to the colonel’s “Blee

or qwmters and is forhred in line facing the “ntr:,nce, the band
on the right, the color benrer in the line of file fi,- closers.
^‘--^--
The color bearer, ,xeceded by the first lie”tenant 1 and fol-
lowed hy a sergeant of the escort. then goes to obtain the color.
When the color bearer c”mes “ut, followed by the lieutenant
and sergeant, he hnlts b&r” the ““tmnc”, facing tbe escort;
the lieutennnt ,\lnces binrself on the ri,@t, the sergeant “1, the
left of the colqr
c”l”r bearer: the escort ~refientn
nre~entn arms, nud the field
music sounds t” fhe co/or; the first lieutenant and sergeant
salute.
Arms nre brought to the order; tbe lleutennnt and serg”ant
return to their posts: the company is formed in COl”rn” Of
platoons, the bnnd taking post in front of the eol”mn: the color
bearer ~rlnces himself between the ~latmns; the escort marches
in quick time, with guide left, back to the regiment, the hand
plaping; the march is so conducted thnt when the escort arrires
at 50 paces In front of the right of the regiment, the direction
of the march shall be ~arnllel to its front; when the color
amires opposite its plnce in line, the escort is formed in line to
the left; the color benrer, pasning between the ,,,at”“na, ad-
vances an.3 balta 12 paces I” front of the eolone,.
The mlor bearer having halted, the c”l”n”l, wb”~bas taken
Wst 30 maces in front of the center “f his re&tm,t, faces abont,
commands: 1. Present, 2. ARMS, resumes his front, and salutes;
the field mnsic sounds fo the co/or; n,,d the co:“= bearer exeeuta
the color salute at the command present m-Ins.
The colonel the” faces about, hrlnm the re@“ent to the order,
at which the color bearer r”s”me~ the carry and takes his post
mlth the c”I”i- compnny.
The exert rresenfs ai-“IS and comes to the order with the re&
ment, at the command of the colonel, after which the capt”in
forms it again in column of platoons, and, preceded by the band,
mnrckes it to its place, p2~k.g nround the left tiank of the
repiment.
The band ~1”~s wtil the escort ,,“SSES the kft of the line,
when it ceases r~lnying nrld returns t” its post on the right,
passing in rear of the regiment.
The regiment “my ix brought to a rest when the escort
passes me left Of the line. cc. I. n. II., Nos. 6 “vad 19.)
7.37. Escort of the color js executed by i* bnttillion :~ec”rding
to the Smile pPi”ciples.

--
 CEWSI.IOBIES. 173

Escorrs of Honor.
75% Eswnts Of honor are detail* for the lmrpose af rereir-
Ing and escorting personages of high rank, civil or military.
The troops for this purpxe nre sekxte.3 for their s”lU”rly
*mearance anrl superior discipline.
The “sc”rt forms in line, “,,r,osite the ,,,,lnce where tbe ger-
~“a@ Dresents himself, the band on the Bank of the eSc”rt
toward which it will mxrcb. On the alr~enrance of the ,,erson-
age, he is receired with the honors due to his rank. The escort
is formed into column of companies, platoon8 or squads, and
takes up the much, the personage nnd his staff “P retinue tak-
tug pOsittons in re:x of the coI”mn: ~ben be leare~ the escort,
line ia formed nnd the same honors are Daid 88 before.
When the poSition of the escort is at n considerable distance
from the point where the wwxwze is to be receixxd, as for in-
stance, where a eourtynrd or wbxrf interrenes, a double line
of sentinels is poEksl from that point to the escort, facing in-
ward; the sentinels successirely snlute xs be passes and BE
then relieved and join the “SCW~.
An 05cer is Rmointed to attend him and bear such CO,,,-
monicntion as he may havs to make t” the commander of the
ewwt.
F”“eral>fscort.
730. The co&ositi”n nnd strength of the e8C”rt are pre-
semea in *my Regulations.
The escort is formed “pposit” the quarters of the deceased;
tie band “n that flank of the escort toward which it 18 to march.
Urn” the “~)w”~anee of the coffin, the commnnder eommnnds:
1. Present, 2. ARMS, and t,,e band ,,,nys an appropriate air;
army BE then brooght to the order.
The escort is next formed into column of c”mpanies, ,,,at”“,,s,
OP squnds. If the e%‘ol‘t be 8ma31, it may be marched in Ii”“.
The procession is formal in the follomiug order: I. kfu(usic.
2. Escort, 3. Clergy. 4. Coffin and p.llbemrs, 5. Moumrs, 6. Mem-
bers of the tormer command of the deceased, 7. Other o,%eers and
enlisted men, 8. LJistinguished persons, 9. Delegations, 10. Sock-
lies, 11. Civilians. miters nna enlisted men (&-OS. 0 nna 7).
with &la mms, are in the “r&r of rank, senior8 in front.
. The rr”ees8ion bein:: formed, the commander of the escort
1)uts it in march.
The escort marches slow’ly to solemn music; the column hnr-
ing nrri~eil o~wositc the grave, iine is formed facing: i:..
 CEILEXOIIEL

The coffin is then cnrried nlon~ the front of ibe eSCort to the
gmw; arms are presented, the rn”SiC DlRys an appropriate air;
me comn having been XaKed over the graue, the rn”SiC ceases
and arms are brought to the order.
The commalldrr next c”m”lands: 1. Panlde, 2. MSST. The
e~eortexecutesparaderest, officersnud men inclining the bead.
When the funeral services are eompkted and the cot%, b,w-
ered into the grave the commander alUseS tile escort to re*ume
attentiou and fire three muids of blank carlrid@a, the ,,,nzz,es
Of the nieces being elerated. rnlm, the escort i9 greater man a
battalion, one battalion is desi,nnated to fire tbe volleys.
A muSiCin,, then SIlUDdS tops.
The escort is then formed into column, marched in qurck
time to the point where it was nssnmbled, nnd dismissed.
The band does not @,lny until it has left the inelowre.
When the distance to the pkms of interment is considernble,
the escort, after having left the camp or garrison, may mara,
at eabe in quick time until it np~mx~hes the burial ground, when
it is brought to attention. The mwdc does not play while mar&-
ing at ease.
In mnrehing at attention, the field music may alternate With
the band in ~kqing.
740. When arms are Iresented nt the funernl of n paw,n
entitled to any of the foliowiug? bonol‘s, the bnild plays the we-
scribed notional air, or the field music sou~da to the co/or, march,
Rourishes, or ,u,Wes, nccol’ding to the rank of the dcc?asad, after
mhich’the band ,ila~s an al>proi?riate air. The commander of
the escort, in forming column. gives the aBDroI)riate colllmands
for me different ~*n18. (C. I. I). n., No. 6.)
741. At the funeral of a mounted officer or enlisted man, his
hw~e, in mourning eagarison, folloms the hearfie.
i48. Should the entrnnce Of tile cemetery prevent the lEame
accomganying the escort till tk! latter hnlts at the grave, the
cni”m” is hnMd at the entrance long enowil to tnke the coffin
from the beawe, when the column is again put in march. The
Cavalry and Artillery, when unable to enter the inchare. tmn
out of the col,mn, face the cohm”, and Salute the remains 38
they pm*.
743. When necessary to eSCOrt me remains from the qonrters .
of the deceased to the chnrcb before the funeral service, arms
are presented upon receiving the remains nt the quarters and
:,m as they ilIT2 borlle illto the chnrch.
744. The cc’nmn>andrr of the escort, ,m?VIOUR to th? *!merzil,
gives the clergyman and pallbearers all needful directions.
 INSPECTIONS.
Company lnspecticw.

745. Being in line at IL bnlt: 1. Open nmfs, 2 MA,PX.

At the command march the froot rank exemtes right dress:
the rear ru,% and tbc file elosers march bnckmartl 4 stews, hnlt,
and execute right dress : the lientenants ,,ass around their
resp~etire flmks md tnkc post, fazing to the front, S pnees in
fruut of tbn center of their res~,ectiro ,,lntoo”s. The eaubri”
aligns the front mnk, rear rank, and file closem, t”Bes post
3 gsces in frcmt of the right gnide, facing to the left, and conl-
m”“ds: 1. FRONT, ‘2. PREPARE FOR INSPECT/OH.
At the secorld com,“x”d the lie”tena”ts CIII‘I’Y saber; the
cn~,t:,i” returns mber n”d I,,Y!wIs them, after wbicb they face
“bout, order saber, tmd sbmd ;It wise; “IX,” the com,,letion of
the inspec!ti”lL they CBI’ry sa,wr, face abont, and order saber.
The cnptnin m:cs dirwt, the lientcni~nts to wcomgany or xssist
htm, in which mm they rctnm saber rind, nt the close of the
ins,,ection, rrsnme their posts in front of the eompnny, dram
and carry mber.
Hnrin~ ins,wctd the lieutemnts, the cn,,t:,i” proceeds to the
right Of thr Cmn~~“S. EBCh mm, 38 the Cnlltain ayyroncllen
him. esn‘otrs inspection amm.
The e:wtain takes the ~icce, grns~iin~ it with his riPbt bmd
just nbme thr mar sizbt, the mnn drorqing hi9 baud% The
wpl:iiu inspects the ~iiece, and, with the hand n”d piece in the
si,n,e DOSition 4s in recoiring it, ,,>i,ldS it ,,a& to the *mn, Wb”
takes it with the left hand nt the bnlnnce and ~XBCU~~S order
(Nlms.
AS the wptain returns the picct! the next ,1\an executes
inspection arms, an* so on through the eompnny.
Shor,ld tbr piece be i”s,,“ted mitho”t b:,“dling. e”cb ““a,,
executes order arms as soon ns the caytain ,X,SY~S to ,he next
nxln.
'lb? inspection is from right to left in font, ;md from left to
rifbt in reilr. Of ‘?:,ch nlllk :,n<, of the lill” of me CI0R~I.S.
176 IFIS*ECTIOHS.

When approached by the captnin~the first serxeennt executes

inspection sober. Enlisted men armed with the pistol execute
ina~ection ,,isto, by drawing the pistol frmn the bolster and
holding it diagonully across the body, barrel up; and 6 inches
in front of the neck, muzzle pointinf UP and to the left. The
pistol is returned to the b”lster as so”” ns the cimtain mssea.
Upon completion of the impectiun the eaPt&o t&8 aost
facing to the left in front of the right guide and on line with
the lieuteymts and commands: 1. Close ranks. 1. MARCH.
At the e”mmand march the lieutenants reswne their posts in
line: the rear rank closes to 40 incbrs, each man COVPI’~TIF.his
file lender; the file dosers clove t” 2 Paces from the r&r rank.
746. If the company is dismissed, rides are put away. In
quarters, headdress and acrouterrmeots arc removed and the
men stand near their resaertire bunks: in enmn thrv stand
covered, but without sccoutmm~~ts, in front of t&r t&s.
If the personal field equipment has not been inspected in ranks
and its inspection in qunrters or camp is Ordered. enctl man Will
armnge the prescribed articles on his bunk. if in quarters or
permanent camp, or in front of his half of the tent, if in shelter
tent camp, in the snme relative order as directwe in pnmgrnph 741.
The ea,,tain, necom~nni~l by the lieutenants, then inspects the
quarters or camp. The fimt sergeant precedes the captain and
calls the men to attention an entering each squad room or on
~PProacbiw the tents: the men stsrld at attention but do not
981”te. (C. I. D. R., NO. 16.)
747. If the insmction is t” include an examination of the
equipment while in ranks, the captain. after closing ranka,
Causes the CompRny to stack mmc4, to march backwnrd until 4
pates in rear of tne stdcks and to tee inrervnla., ae then
commands: 1. UNSLING EQUIPMENT. 2. GPEN PACKS,
At the first command, each man unslings his equipment and
Places it “n the ground at his feet, haversack to the front end
Of the “Xk 1 foot i* front of toes.
At tile second commnnd, Pack carriers are unstrapped, PacliS
removed and unrolled, the longer edm of the Pack along the
lower edge of the cartridge belt. Each mm exP”ses Shelter
 INSPECTIOHS.

tent fins, remwes meat cnn, knife, fork, and spoon from the
,l,e3t-(.i,” n,,,lrh %,“,I “IallOY +h”.*l ,,.> +I.‘, “:..l,t ..* .T.^ 7.....^‘---‘~~
~~~~~ . ..-.... . . . r . . . ..I. . . ..I. “11 L.lr L16”L <,I Lllr LltL”P‘~ail~“~,

knife. fork. “llll S”,l”ll in +I?‘3 nnrn maat I..>“. *Imll..n” il.- can.
teen nncl CUP from the C”“W :a”d plilces theNI on the left eirle I.~..
of the hnverwck; u”stra,x imd spreads “ut bavers:,ck so as
to CX~OW its rontents; folds up the cnrrier to uncover the
c:mtridCe Pockets ; o,,ens sil”lC ; unrolls t”ilet DrtiCleR and
places them on thr “uter R:Q of the buvers:rck; gl:~es under.
wear cnrried in pt,ck on the left half of the “pen pack, with
round fold g:lmllel vitb fr”nt edge “f pack: “pens first-aid
pouch and exposes c”ote”tn t” e3v. speci;ll nrtie,es mrrierl by
individunl men, such “8 fl:vg kit, field g:lnsses compnss steel
tripe. notebook. etc., Will be “l‘L‘il”~Pd on the rh,t hnlf bf the
own pack. Each mnn th”n resumes tb” attention. Plate VI
show the relative poSiti”n “f illI articles except underwear and
speein, nrticlrs.
The eaptni” the,, ,,,nsses nlnng the ranks and ,i,e c,,,sers as
before, inspects the Pquipment, returns to the right, and corn-
mnnds: CLOSE PACKS.
Each man rolls u,’ his t”ilet ilrticles and underwenr. stmns
up his b:,versnck nnd its contents, replnces the meat can, knife,
fork. and S1)“““. and the r:,n+e*n ““d rul,; c1oses cartridge
pa’ckets on11 first-r&l p”“ch; restores s~PI$,I nrtirles to their
proper, r,?C~ptncles; rolls ,,p nnd replaces pack in carrier; and,
le:win,o the equi,mmt in its position on the ground, resumes
the nttention.
All equipments being packed, the captain commands: SLING
Ec,“,PMENF.
The enuipmentS are slung and belts fnstened.
The ctvltain then rnnses me cornpnny to asselnble and take
arms. The i”S,wti”” is <!“mpleted ns nlrendy ex@a,ned.
(C. I. D. R., No. IO.)
9”467’--11-12
178 INSPECTIOBS.
748. Should ~tbe inspector be other than the captain, the
latter, after ~“m,nan,,in~ front, sd,,s REST, nrrr, fnces to the
front. When the ins,,ector n,,~r”;whrs, the ca,,tnin fxees to the
left, brings tile company tu attention, faces to the front, and
salutes. The salute ncknon,ed~rr,, the captain cnrri”s saber,
faces to the left, ~ommnnd~: PREPARE FOR IWSPECTION, and
ngnin faces to the front.
The inswction ~roeeeds as before; the ennta‘n returns saber
and a~c”“,@mies the inspector a8 SO”” as the latter passes him.

Battalion ,“*pection.
148. If tba’e be both inapertion and review, the inspxtiou
may either wwede “r follow the L‘e”ie\v.
The battalion being in column of coqmnies rit full distance.
all officers disnwunted, the major commands: 1. Prepare for in-
epection. 2. MARCH.
At the first wrmn:md each cngtain commands: Open ronka.
At the command march the ranks XL’” ooened in each co‘mww.
as in the inswction of the cornyany. -
The field musicians join their companies.
The drum major wndwts the band to n position 30 paces in
rear of the column, if n”t already there, and open.3 ranks, .
The majm tukes post facing to the front and 20 paces in front
Of the center Of the lending company. The staff takes gost as
if mounted. The color takes p”st 5 ~nces in ream of the stnff.
Field and stat? officers senior in r;uk to the inspector do not
take ,,ost in front of the column but BC~O~DB”Y him.
The inspector inswcts the major, and, ~ccdmpanied by the
latter, insimts the btoff officers.
The major then vxnm:~nds: REST, returns saber, and, Nth
his staff, areompnnies the inswctor.
If the mnjor is the inmector he commands: REST. Wmms
saber, a”,, inslxcts his stnff, which then nccom~ilr,iex him.
The tnspeetor, r”mme”ci”~ at, the head of thn column. the”
“mkes II minute ins,,eetio” of the co,“r +wrd, the no”co”,mlsi-
sioned stnl7. nnr, the IWRIS, r,rroutl?rments, dress, and nmm,,n*-
tion of each solclier of the several cornpunks in succession, and
insgerts the band.
The adjutant cives the necessswy commnndle for the inspection
Of the C”101. gwrd, “““c”r”“,issi”“ed stm. R”d bEI”&
The 131or m;mI nnd noncommissioned staff miw be dlsrnissed
ns SO”” as inxrlected
g
2 ~
P
8
,$
g
,$

;-
z
 IBSPECTIONS. IT9

750. As the inspector a~~m~bes each comwn~ its captain

corum;m”da: 1. Camfiany, 2. ATTENTOR. 3. PREPARE FOR I&
SPECTION. und faces to the frmt; IIS SO”” as inspected be
returns saber and ;Iceompnnies the inspector. The inspection
gi-weeds 8s in compmy ins~mtion. At its eom~letion the cup
tain closes ranks nnd commands: REST. Unless otherwise
directed by the inslieetor, the maim directs that the c”mmm
he “lnrcheil to its ~,nradr and dismissed.
781. If the insyection will L)robahly last n l”ng time the rear
com,mnies may be ,,ennittcd to stack arms and fall out: before
the i”Sww”l‘ np~ronehrs they fall in ;,n* take arms.
75% The band ~1”~s during the inspection of the companies
When the inspector njvmaches the band the adjutant mm-
nrands : PREPARE FOR INSPECTION.
As the inspector a~~roilches him each man raises his instm-
ment in frmt “f the bodr. reverses it s” as to show both sides.
and then returns it. .’
Compnny musicinns execute inspection similarly.
ns?. *t the inspection Of lluwters or camp tw insrE-cto*
is aecompunied by the c:lptnin, followed by the other oticers
or by such “f them xs he may designate. The inqE&i”O is
conducted as described in the c”zn~~ny inspection.
Regimental Inspsction.
754. The commands, means, and principles are the same 8s
described for a battalion.
The colonel trikes Dost faring to the front and 20 TJ~C~S in
front of the major of the leading battalion. His st<ff takes
DOSt t,S if “l”““tt’d. The C”l”r t&es P”St 5 maces in rear of the

The inspector insgects the cokmel and the lieutenant colonel.

and, nceompanied br the colonel, inspects the staff otlicers.
‘The colonel than ~“mrni~nds: REST. returns snber, and, with
the lieutenant C”l”“Pl and Stim, nrcomgnnies the i”spect”P.
If the colonel is the ins~mfm he eommnnds: REST, returns
saber, nnd inspects the lie”te”““t colonel nnd staff, al, of whom
the” ncco”llm”y him.
Thr i”s,wtor, commencinf nt the be;,d of the eolnmn, makes
n minute insgmtion of the color ward, noncommissioned staff,
each bnttalinn in succession, nnd the bnnd.
On the nmronch of th” insjxctor each major brinks his bat.
t:llion to attention. Rntt:llian inspection *“llows.
 180 MUSTER.

MUSTER.

Regimental, Eattlrlian, OP Company Must‘?,.

755. Muster is Preceded by an inspection, and, when proc-

ticable, by a review.
The adjutant is provided with the muster roll of the field
staff, and band, the surgeon with the hospital roll; each c”Dtaid
with the roll “f his company. A list of absentees. :I,,kabeti-
Cillly armngedl, sh”wing cause and place of absence, accom-
wnies each roll.
758. Being in column of compnnie~ nt 0,x” ranks, each ~a,,-
tain, as the musterins “fker ~p~roacbes, brings his company to
right shoulder arms. and eommnnds: ATTENTION TO MUSTER.
The mrlstering officer or captain then calls the names on the
I’dI: each nlnn, as his ““me is cn,,~rl, &wers Here and brings
his piece to order arms.
After muster, the mustering ofic!er, acCOml)mied by the corn-
pnny commanders and such other officers as he may desig-
nate, verifies the rresence of the men reported in hospital, on
ward. etc.
757. A company mny be mustered in the same manner on
its OWLI ~nratle ground, th? muster to follo~v the company
inspection.
HONORS AND SALUTES.
1.58. Further rule! i ~oorernirx honors. courtesies. etc.. are nre-
scribed in Army Regulations.
759. (1) Salutes shall be exchnnzed between ollicers and
enlisted men not in n. military formation, nor nt drill, work,
&w”es, or mess, o” every occn~io” of their.meetinp. ,v,ssine “a,,,.
or being addressed, the officer junior in r&i 0; ‘~~~k~~,,~~~d
man saluting first.
(2) When an “~%eer enters x r”“m where there are sever”,
enlisted men, the word ” attention ” is given by some one who
perceives him, when “,I rise. uncover, and remain standing at
attentim until the oficer lenses the room or directs otherwise.
Enlisted men at meids Stop eating and remain seutd at
attention.
(3) An enlisted man, if seated, rises “n the x~,xoacb of an
officer, faces toward him! stands at attention. and salutes.
Standing he faces an officer for the same purpose. If the
 ROlVORS *AD SBLUTES.

ImPtieS remnin I” the Einme ~laee 0

c”mDlimcnts lIeed not be rqmlted. f?iii$Fg:;:$;: :;:1:
do not cease work to Salute an “nicer U”k 4cl essetl by him.
(4) Before addressing ;I” omcr, nn enlisted
,,rescribed Sal”te wit,, the ,wnyon with which he Tf”licsLS m)ep, the or,
if unnrmeil, with the rm,t hnntl. He alSO makes me ‘sJme .
Snl”b after reecivinp n reply.
(5) In nniform, rovered or uncovered, but not in formntion.
omcers am enlisted men S:II”te mi,itnry rmxons 38 follows:
with arms in h”“,,, the salnte ,XCSrribC,I for tnut xnn (senti-
nels “11 interim guard lluty exce”ted, : without arms, the right-
hand salute.
(6) In civilinn dress, covered or UncoTered, omers and
enlisted men salute military I)WSO”S mm me right-band snlute.
(7, ,,mers and enlisted men Will render the mescribed
salutes in a military mmner, the ofticer junior in mik, or the
enlisted ,nen, salutin,n first. TVhcn swerat omcers in company
are Snlnt<YI, :,11 erltitkd to the SBl”h? ShlIll return it.
(5) Except in the field umler ctlrnpnign or simulated Calm
rxmn conditions, n mounted officer ,or soldier) dismonnt~ be-
fore addressing 11 suyerior officer not mounted.
(9) A man in fm-mation shall not Snlute when directly ad-
drrsnrr,, but shnll s”nle to :,t,tentio,l if at, rest or at ease.
(IO) Saluting distnnoe is that within which recognition is
easy. In genernl, it clors not exceed 30 pees.
(11) When an ot?icer entitled to the Sillute Dasses in rear of
R body of troop% it is brought to nttention while he is opposite
the lost Of the rommander.
(12, I” public conveyances. sue,, as rzlihmy trnins and street
mrs, xld in public phlces. such ns theaters, honors zmd personnt
salutes may be omitted when ,mlnably inrwro~inte or apt to
disturb or annoy civilians present.
(13, Soh3krs at nil times and in all situntions pay the same
e”n~wn*“ts tn OrnCWS Of the nnny, NBW, MllPim? corps. and
Vnlunteers, and to omrrn of the Nationnl GumYl as to officers
Of their own regiment. COPPS,or nnn Of SeTvice.
(14) Sentinels on post cloing interior gu:m, duty eonform td
the foregoing principles. but salute by wesenting arms when
armed with the rifle. They will not salute if it interferes with
‘$ tile prol)er ~erformnnce Of their tluties. Troops under UYns
Will Snlnte “8 gremam-l in drill reyu1ations. cc. I. D. R.,
x0. 17.)

-
 182 FtOROa* *Im SblUTES.

780. (1) Commanders Of detachments or other eommxnds

will salute odieer~ of grades higher than the ~)ers”n command-
ing the unit, by first briwin,D the unit to attention nnd then
saluting as requirtul by sob,xirngmph (61, pxagraph 759. 1f
the person saluted is “f a junior or equal frtrde. me “at Ilee<,
not be nt attention in the eich;~nge of snlut”s.
(2) If two detRrhmelltS or “tiler commands meet their eom-
mxnders will exchang” salutes, both c”mmnn& being at
attention.
(C. 1. D. E.,N”. 17.)
761. SalUteS nnd honors, as a rule, are not paid by tmogs
act”nllY engnjied in drill, on the mnrch, or in the field under
enmpaign or sim”lnted mrrrp:~ign conditions. Troops on the
service of security 1x19 no comphments whatever.
cc. I. D. R., NO. 17.)
782. If the commnnd is in line at n halt (not in the field) and
armed with the ride. or with snhrrs dlmmn, it shall be brought
to present arms or present sobers before its commander salutes in
the following cases: When the National Anthem is played or
when to the co/or or to the standard is sonndled dlnring cerem”r;ies
or when a person is saluted who is its immwlinte or higher corn:
mander or a general “ii&r, or when the national or regimental
color is saluted.
(C. I. D. R., NO. 17.)
76% At parades and other ceremonies, under arms, the corn-
ma?? shall render the prescribed salate and shall remain in the
gosltlon of salute while the National Anthem is being played:
also at retreat and during cerenlonies when to the co/or is played
if no band is rresent. If not under arms. the organizations shali
be brought to attention at the first note of the National Anther,,
to the co/or or to the standard. nnrl the snlute ren<,lered by th;
offker or noncommissioned oRicer in command as prescribed in
rqulntions, as amended herein.
cc. I. D. R., Nos. 6 nmt 17.)
764. Whrnevrr the Nnti”nal Anthem is played at any p1aee
when persons brlonainp to the military service RI-” present. all
officers nnd enlisted men not in formation shall stnnd nt atten-
tion facing toward the music (except nt retrent, when they
shall face toward the flng). If in nnifnrm, c,,vered or “,,c”\~.
wed, or in civili:,” clotbcs. uncovered, they shall salute at the
first note of the anthem, retaining the position of salute until
 HOmmS *Im’ !3.4LIJTES. 163

the last note of the anthem. If not in uniform and covered.

they shall u”~~w~ at the first note of the :Inthem, holdilll: the
henddress o,,posite the left shoulder and SO remain ““tit its
dose, except that in inclement weather the headdress may be
slightly raised.
The stlme rules apply when to the color or to the standard is
sounded tls when the Nnti”,,a, Anthem is played.
When played by an Army bad, the Nlitional Anthem shall
be “lnyed through without repetition of >,ny Dart not required
to ,ie &ented to make it c”mDl”t~.
The same mnrks “f respect prescribed for observance during
the playing of the National Anthem of the United States shall
be s,,“,w, t”w:,rd the nation:,, anther,, “f any “theI’ c”““tV
when Wayed upon oflieinl oecasi”ns.
(C. i. fi.~R., NO. 17.)
,‘36. Ot,icers und enlistHI men pxssiny: the onc:,s”d cotor will
render honors ns follows: If in uniform, they will Salute as
required by subparagraph (5). l)?u’wrapb 759; if in ciyilian
dress and covered, they will unc”““~, holding the headdress
oppaosite the left shoulder with the right hand; if uncovered
they will Salute with the right-hand salute.
(C. I.D. R., NO. 17.)
 PART V.--MANUALS.

TIIE COLOR,.
766. The word “ color ” im,,,ies the national color : it ineludes
the regi,w’ntn: color when both are ,,resent.
The rules prescribing the COlOPS to be carried by regimeuts
and hntt:dions on ~1, o~ensiom arc contained in Army Rugula-
+i”nS.
767. In garrison the c”,om, when not in we, are kept in the
attic” or qnarters of the colonel, and are escorted thereto and
+hwrf,~o,n by the c”Ior gum,. In c:u,q, the colors, when not in
use, are in front of the c”,“:,~,‘s +r,,t. Fro”, rerri,,r to retreat,
when the weather permits, they are disp,ilyed uneased; from re-
trent to rereille and durin g inclement weather they are cased.
Colors it,?3 Paid t” be cased whe” furled and ,,r”teeted by the
“il.cloth ear-ering.
‘iSS. ‘The regimental color salutes in the ceremony of escort
of the c”,“r, and when sainting nn officer entitled to the honor,
but in no other “as”.
If marching, the salute is escchtcd when :!t G paces from the
otflcer entitled to the snlutc; the carry 18 resumed when 0 paces
beyond him.
‘The nntionnl color renders II” salute. (C. 1. D. IL, No. 6.)

The Color Gum-d.

788. ‘The color guard coksts of two col”r sergeants, who

3~ the coke hearers, and two experienced privates %&cted by
the colou”,. ‘IIre senior r”,or sergeant carries the nationa,
color: the junior color sergeant c;mies the regimental color.
The rcgimentnl color, when c;~rried, is B,WB~Y on the left of the
nationill ~010~. in whatever direction they may face.
1% THE CDImL

770. The color guard is formed and marched in one mnk,

the color henrers in the center. It is mnrched ill the Same nran-
llPP alid by the Snme C"mll,andS iIS a sqqoarl, substituting, when
necesswy, guml for wJ”Od.
771. The co1or comr)nnLy is the center or right center co”,-
nnny Of the center or right center bnttnlion. The edor gum*
remains with tbnt company unless ~tberv,i~e directed.
77% In lime the color guard is in the inter\w1 between the
inner guides of the right nnd left center companies.
In line of pol”mns or in Cl”% me, the cohr g”ard is mklmxg
betmel?” the right and left center eumD3.uieo nnd on li,E With
the eavtaim.
In eblnmn of compnnies or pkktoons the color gunrd is mid-
way between the color com,,IInp nnrl the eomanny in renr “f
the color mmI)any and eqllidistamt from the flanks of the
column.
In close column the color raard is “n th,? Bunk of the color

In column of squads the color guard is in the eolmnn between

the color ~orn~lany alld the eum~~tnv ori~irlnlly on its left.
when the Peginle,lt is formed in he of ma8Fe8 *or ceremonies.
the Color forms an the kit Of the leading eomp*ny of the center
(right center) bnttnlion. It rejuins the color eomgnny When
the reaiment cba”gl?s from line Of nlaASes. (C. I. D. IL, NO. 2.)
773. The e”lOr guard Whrn with n bilttalio” thnt takes the
battle formation, joins the regimental revsve, whose commnnder
directs the color gunrrl to join D certain rompmy of the reserve.
(C. I. D. IL, NO. 2.)
774. The C”km gum1 exc(.,,tcs I1CiflW’l‘ landings nor fir’illgs:
in rendering honors, it executes a,, movements in the mm,ua,;
in drill, illl mOvementS unless Specially escuaed.

To Receive the Co/or.

775. The Color gmrtl, by eo”mr*uN, Uf the se”ior color ser.
gennt, presents *I-Ins on IweiYin:: nllcl pnrting with the color.
After pnrting With the COIOI., the Cd,X cu:m, is brought to
order arms by eomm;Lnd of the amior nN?m,,er who is placed as
me right mnn Of the &wlrrl.
,,a At drills nm Cemmnies, excepting escort of the co/or.
the color, if present, is receive,, by the coL”r eompnny after its
formution.
 THE COLOR. 187

The formntioo of the color C”III,EIIIJ co,n,,leted. the m,,t;rin

faces ta the front; the eo,or guard, conducted by the senior ser.
gem+. ayoronehes from the front :md h:rlts nt t, distance of 10
paces from the captain, who then f;aces about, brings the con-
pnny to the ,wesent, fnceu to the front, salutes, again fncrs
about and brings the com,>nrry to the order. The color guard
comes to the presellt and order at the comluand of the cu@,in,
and is then mirched by the color sm~eant directly to its p”st on
the left of the color company.
777, When tbr b:,tti,li”n is disn~sed the coior guard escorts
the color to the o&e or quarters of the colonel.

Mcm”d of the Co/or.

77R. At the carry the heal of the pike rests in the socket of
the sling; the right band grasps the pike at the height of the
shoulder.
At the order the hoe, of the pike rests on the grou,,d near the
right toe, the right hand holding the yike in a vertical position.
At pnrode rest the heel of the pike is un the ground, m at the
order: the pike is held with both hemIs in front of the muter of
the body, left hand “Ppsmmst.
The order is resumeoJ at the eomnmnd attention.
The left hand a8sists the right when ,,ecessary.
The carry is the habitual pmitim when the troops ape ;,t n
shoulder, port, or trail.
The order and parade rest are executed with the troops.
The co/or salute: Being at a carry, slip the right hand us the
pike to the height of the eye, then lower the pike by stwigbten.
iw the arm to the front.
 THE BAND.
770. The band is formed in twoor more ranks, with 8~s.
Cknt iIIterVa!s ba?tween the men and distances between the
ranks to permit of a free use of the instruments.
The field music, when united, forms with and in rear of the
band; when the band is not present the posts, movements. nnd
duties of the field music are the same as nrescribed for the band.
when a musician is in charge his position is on the right of tb;
front rank. When the battalion or regiment turns abont by
Wadf, the band executes the countermarch; when the battalion
01’ reglmeilt exeCUtes right, left, 01‘ about face, the band faces in
tile same manner.
In marching, each rank dresses to the right.
I” exE”ti”g 0,~” ranks ,?a& mnk of the bnnd takes the dig
tance of 3 paces from the rank uext in front; the drum major
verities the alignment.
The field music sounds the march, flourishes, or rufiles. and to
the cofor at the sigm,1 of the drum major.
780. The drum major is 3 knees in front of the center of the
front rank, and gives the signals or commands for the mope-
meuts of the band 8.s for a ~qwd, substituting in the commands
band for squad.
Signok of the Drum Major.
781. Prepnrntory to n Sigunl tile staff is held with the right
hand near the head of the staff, band below the chin, back to
the front, ferrule pointed u,,ward aud to the right.
Pre,xtre to ~foy: Face toward the band and extend tbr right
am to its full length in the direction of the staff. Ploy: Bring
the arm back to its original position in front of the body.
Pre,mre to ceme ,daying: Extend the right an,, to its f,,,,
length in the direction of the staff. Cease plnyying: Bring the
arm back to its original position in front of the body.
To march: Turn the wrist and bring the staff to the front.
the ferrule pointing upward and to the front; extend the arm
to its full length in the direction of the star.
To ho/t: Lower the staff into the raised left band and r:,iss
the staff horizontally above tbe head with both hands, the ai-ms
1548
 TEZ BAND. I89

extended; lower the staff with both hands to a horizontal posi-

iion at the height of the hips.
To countermwch: Ehe toward the band n”d give the &“a,
/ _...1~ I~~ ~~~~~~~, b
to march. The COUULWU:~~CI~ 1s execurw oy ei~cu nnnran..
man to the right of the drmrr major tw”ing to tbe right about,
each to the left, turniug to the left about, each followed by the
men corering him. The +“F, major ~xxsses throqh the center.
T. .c,:~~~~~ - ,.
Y oo~ryoe: amlg rue scan to n nmlmutal positiu”, the hea, .I
Of tur 8 taff omasite the neck, the ferrule pointing in the direr-
tion the “““‘IUt: is to be made; extwd the ax’“1 to its full length
4” ih”
.- a:“^^t:^..
Iyc Ullrill”” Of the staff.
To march 6y the right flank: Extend the arm to the right, the
staff vertical, ferrule ngrvard, bnck of the hand to the rein.
To march by the left flank: Exteud the zum to the left, the
staff vertical, ferrule uPward, back of the hand to the front.
To diminish front: Let the ferrule Ml into the left hand at the
height of the eyes, right hand at the height of the hip.
To increase front: Let the frrrule fall iuto the left hand at the
height of the hip, right’hand nt the height of the “wk.
The march, flourishes. or rufOnes: Bring the staff to n vertical
imsition, hand opwsite the neck, back of the band to the front,
ferrule ,x,inti”G down.
To the color: Bring the staf? to B hor‘i&o”tal 1)ositio” at the
height of the neck. back of the hand to tbe reni-, ferrule point-
inr t” the ,rw
When the band ia glaying, in marching, the drnm major beats
the time with hi8 staff and supports the left hand at the big,
fingers in front, thumb to the rear.
The drum major, with srafl i” band, sxl”tes by bringing his
^/.‘-
WALL L-
L” ” vcrtienl Position, hex, of the staff “I> aud ol),,osite
^I.^..
the left UIIIUAUCL~. 11^..
The drum major. “xxchi”g in reriem with Staff in hand,
Snlutes by briuging his stuff to a vertical position, bead of the
staff “I’ and o,,,,osite the left sboulder.~
At a halt, and the bn”d no t IllaYi”& the-dry major holds
!- .
his staff with the ferrule to”chlllg t”e gnu”” imo”t I-.-- znch rro~lr .
toe of right foot, nt an nugle of about (io”, ball pointing upward
to the right, right hand gmsDi”g staff “ear the ball, back of
the hand to the front: left band at the bin, tingers in frant,
thumb to the rear. (C. I. D. R., No. 6.)
 MANUAL OF THE SABER.
782. 1. Draw. 2. SABER.
At the ~cmmuln~l draw unhook the saber with the thumb and
first two firlmrs of the left hand, thumb on the end of the hook,
finmrs lifting me np,rer ring; grasp the ecnbbard With the left
hnd at the upper band, bring the hilt a little forward, seize
the gri1, with the right hand, an* draw the hhde 6 inches mt
of the scabbard, pressing the scnhbnrd aganst the thigh with
the left hand.
At the cammnnd sober drnw the saber
quickly, raising the
nrln to its full extent to the right front, at a,, an,q,e of about
45” with the horizontal, the saber, edge down, in a strnigbt line
with the arm ; make a Elight ,,ause and bring the beck of the
hhae ngninst the shoulder, edge to me front, nrm nearly ex-
tended, hand by the side, elbow back, third and fourth ,i~gers
back of the grip: at the same time hook 111) the scnbbnrd with
the thnmb and first two fingers of t,he left hand, thumb through
the user ring, fmgers su~rmrting it ; drop the left band by the
silk.
This is the position of CLIPPYsaber dismounted.
OtWers and noncomlnis~ioned oEicers nrmed with the saber
unhook the ~abbar(l before nmmting: when mounted, in the
first motion of draw saber they reach with the right hand over
the bridle hand and without the aid of the bridle hand draw
the saber as before: the right hand at the cmv-y rests on the
right thigh.
On foot the scabbard is carried hooked up.
783. When wblishing orders, calling the roll, etc., the saber
is held ses~~endd from the right wrist by the saber knot; when
the saber knot is ufied it is ,,,aced o,, the wrist before drawing
saber and taken off after returning saber.
784. Being at the order or carry: 1. Present, 2 SlB.ER (or
ARMS).
At the eo~nlnnd present rake nnd cnrry the saber to the
front, base uf the hilt BS hiph as the chin and 6 inches in front
of the neck, edge to the left, point 6 hwbes farther to the front
than the hill:, thumb extended on the left of the grip, al, fingerfi
gritsping the grip.
1.90
 Id6ANIJBL OF THE S.4BER.

At the eomnrnnd saber, or mms, lower the sxber, point in

prolon~c,tion of the right foot and “enr the gmond, &ge to the
left, bnnd by the side. thunab OR left of grip, arm extended. If
mounted. the h:,“d is held bebi”d the thigh, Wint ” little t” t,he
right nnd front of the stirmp.
In rendering horrors with tro”,,s “,ticcrs eseeutc the first “I”-
ti”” of the ml,,tr ;it tile command ,,resent, the second “lotion “t
the CO”“,,:,“~ arms; enlkted lnen’with the snbrr exrwte the
first “,“li”” at me c”“,“l:l”d arms 2nd omit tile SW”“,1 motion.
785. Being at, a canny: 3. Order. 2. SABER (or ARMS,.
Drop the point of the saber dil’ectlg to the fxmt, wi”t on or
near the gronnd, edge durrn, thnmb on back of grip.
Bcin~ at the mesent saber. should the next com"laud be order
arms, “ECerR and n”“c”m”~issi”“e II ““irers armed with the
eaber e-de,- sober: if the c”mmn”d be other thn” order (1llm8. they
emxnte carry sober.
When anus nre br”“xht to the “rder the olticer6 or e”liW!d
men with the saber dmkm order saber.
788. The saber is INa, nt tk? cnrry Whik? giving eommnnds,
marching at “ttenti”“, or changing ,,“Siti”” in quick time,
When at the order snbers nre brought to the cnrry when “rtns
we brought to any p”sitio” exccat the wesent or paradepest.
(C. I. I). R., NO.2.)
787. Being nt the order: I. Ponrde, 2. REST.
!&die the position “f parade rest except that the left hand is
“PPerm”*t and rests on the right hund, wint ,,f saber on 0,.
“N&the ~r”Und I” front of the center of the body, edge to the
At the command attention resnme the order saber and the
pusition of the soldier.
?R8. In “,;,rehi”g in do”ble time the 61bw is carried
““ally acros8 the breast, edge f” the fr”“t: the left
Steildies the n,.“hh”“a
i ..\““y‘..II_

188.08 icrrs and nonCOmlniSsiOned otiicera nrmsl with the

snber, on n II duties under arn,a ,,rnm amI retmn finher mith”“t
waiting for com”m”d. AIL e”mm:,“ds to s”me*s under al‘“38
“lx given With tb2 saber dTXV~“.
700. Being at a cilrl’~: 1. Retlrm, 2. S*BER.
At the comnmud return camp the right hnnd “rIIaite tc1 and
6 inches from the left shoulder, aher vertk~1, edge to the left :
nt the same tinx ““hook and lower the scnbbnrd with tb, e left
bnnd nnd grasp it at the “ppcr bznd.
ma lu.LNUBL OF THE SABER.

At the eonunand sober dro,~ the point to the rear and LXISS the
blade ncros~ and along the left nrn, ; turn the head slightly to
the left, fixi,,l: the eyes on the o,,ening “f the sci,bb:,rd, raise
the right h;lnd, insert aud return the blade; free lhe wrist froni
the saber knot (if insc?rtul in it), turn the head to the front,
drop the right hand by the side; ho”,< u,) the scabbard with the
left hnnd, drop the left hand by the side.
Officers “nd rroneonnnissiolled otiicers :irn~d with the saber,
when mounted, return saber without using the left hand; the
scabbard is hooked uy 01, dismountin&
79 1. At inspection enlisted men with the saber drawn exe-
cute the first nwtiw of present saber itnd turn the wrist t”
show both sides of the blade, res”mi~~ the CU’W when the in-
spector has panned.
 MANUAL OF TENT PIWING.
.we,tsr rents. ’ “C!, ^
792.
ma. Being in line or in cohnnn column of platoons. t&‘@aqtain
t&‘&pin
c”““m”,ls: FORM FOR SHELTER TEMTS.
The of8cers. tirst seh’etmt, and guides fall “ut : the cooks form‘\
tint sergetmt,
a file on the flank of the company nearest the kitchen, the first
sergennt and right guide fall in, fanning the right file of the
compnny: blenk files nre filled by the file closers or by men
hken
tLLke” from the fr”nt fr”“t rank;
rank: t,he remaining
wm”ininz guide,
mide..., “1‘
or
.~ guides.
m,i,les~ and
_-.-.., “nil
-..-
me closers for”, on i, C”“~e”ie”t fan,;. Before : forming
formi”~ c”,“m”
c”l”m”
of platoons, preparntory to pitching tents, the company may be
redivided into two or “lore plntoons, regardless Of the size Of
each. CC. I. D. IL, No. 2.)
79% The c!apt:lin then C~USPS the com~nny to take intwrnls
as described in the School of the Rqund, and commands: PITCH
TENTS.
At the rommand pitch tents, e”c!r mn” &ells off oblic,,,el~~ ~to
the right with the right foot and hws his rifle “n the ground, ths
butt “f the rifle near the toe of the right foot, munirle to the
front, barrel to the left, :,nd ste~,s back into his place; each
front-r:lnk man then draws his bzly-onet and sticks it in the
ground by the outside of the right heel.
Equipments nre uns,un,rr, ,,ttcks openal, shelter half and pins
removed ; wch man then spenrls his shelter half, slni~ll triangle
to the reitr, flat upon the ground the tent is to oecu,,y. the rear-
ran% nmn’s b”lf on the right. The h”Ives are then huttoned to.
gether: the guy hops at both ends of the lower half are ~,“sse,l
through the huttonholes ,xovi,,ed in the Iower ;,“,I u,,,,er halves;
the \vlti~,~etl end of the gny rope is then ~asscxl tbrougb b”tb g,,y
l”“w a”,, secured, this at both ends of t,he tent. Each front-
rank man inserts the muzzle “f his rifle under the front end of
the ritlgr and holds the rifle upright, sling to the front,, heel “f
butt on the nmmtl beside the bnyonet. His rem-rank nun pins
d”wn the front corners of the tent on the line of bayonets,
stretching the tent taut: he then inserts II pi” in the eye “f the
front KU? P”~X rnxl drives the pin at such n distance in front of
the rifle ns t” hold the rope taut; both men go to the rear of the
Dxw-I,--13 193
194 bu.NU*L OF TEKT PITCHING.

tent, each pins down B corner, stretching the sides and rear of
the tent before Securing; the rear-rank man then inserts an in-
trenching tool, or a bayonet in its scabbard, under the rear end
of the ridge inside the tent, the front-rank nran pegging down
the end of the reilr guy I’oDes; the rest of the pins are then
driven by both men, the rear-rank man working on the right.
The front flaps of the tent are not fastened down, but thrown
back on the tent.
AS soon as the tent is pitched each man arranges his equip-
ment and the contents of his pack in the tent and stands nt at-
tention in front of his own half on line with the front guy-
rape pin.
TO have B uniform sloge when the tents are pitched, the guy
ropes Should all be of the same length.
In shelter-tent cnmps, in localities where suitable material is
procnrable. tent poles may be improvised nod used in lieu of the
riEe and bayonet or intrenching tool ns supports for the shelter
tent. CC. I. D. R., .vos. .z, 5 and 8.1
784. When the pack is not carried the company is formed for
shelter tents, intervals are taken, arms are laid aside or on the
ground, the men iwe dismissed and proceed to the wagon, secure
their packs, return to their places, and pitch tents as heretofore
described.
795. Double Shelter tents may be pitched by first Ditching
one tent as heretofore described, then pitching a second tent
against the opening of the first, using one rifle to suI)I)ort both
tents, and paming the front guy roDes over and down the 8ides
of the opposite tents. The front corner of one tent is not pegged
down, but is thrown back to permit an opening into the tent.
Single Sleeping hg.
?w3. Spreild the poncho on the ground, buttoned end at the
feet, buttoned side to the left ; fold the blanket once across its
short dimension and lay it on the aoncho, folded side along the
right side of the poncho; tie the blanket together along the left
side by means of the taDes provided: fold the left half of the
poncho over the blanket and button it together along the side
and bottom.
DouUe Sleeping gag.
797. Spread one poncho on the ground, bnttoned end at the
feet, buttoned side to the left ; spread the blankets on ton of the
 HBNUAL OF TENT PITCHINci. 195
Ponchn; tie ttx? edges “f tbr blnnkcts together wit,, the tripes
,,r”Yidetl ; sprrild i, Sewn,, p”nch” 01, top Of the blno!wts, but-
tonwl end at the fuet, buttoned Sidle to the right; bntt”” the two
P”“ChOS tugether along both Sides ll”d ULTOSSthe end.
To Strike Shelter Tents.
‘TE79k%. The men stnn<,ling in front “f their tents: STRIKE
EqniPrrrsnts and rifks :,rf! L-Pmowt, fronr the tent ; the tents
nre lowmrd, pa&S nl;r,1r up, and eqnipnl*“tS string, nnr, the men
stand at attention in the p,:,ces originally ocrupied at-ter tnltinp
intervals. (C. I. Ll. It., NO. 8.)
Common and Wall Tents.
709. To pitch all types of Arms tents, except shelter ant,
Conical wn,, tents: Mark me Of tents by driving n wn,, pin on
the snot to be oceuok!<, bV the e&t ,or left, r”PnPP Of enrh
tent. - Far pymmid~l ted the ir&val between adjacent pins
sho”l,l be about 30 f&t, ,vhid, will give a pnssnge of two feet
between teds. Spren,, tripod 01, the ground where the center
of tent is to be. if tri~o,, is used. Sprend the tent o,, the
ground to be oceu~ied, do”~ to the front, nnd ,,lnre the right (or
left) frorlt wall loop “YW the pin. The dO”P (OLI ,toors, if more
than one) being fastened an,, held together at the bottom, the
left (or right) cor”w ~\-a,, luol, is cnrried to the left (or
right) as far as it will go and n wm pin driven through it, the
pin being plnccd in line with the right (or left) corner pins
nlready driven. At the same time the rear lxwner wall kmps
are pullnl to the rear and outwnrd so that the rear mall of the
tent is stretcbfrl to complete the reetnngh?. wall pins ore
then driven through these loons. Each C”,TEP gin should be
directly in rear Of the eorresponaing front corner pin, making a
L‘Wt3”&?. Unless the cnnrns be wet, a small amount “f slnck
should be allowed before the corner pins arc driven. Acmrdinp
to the size of the tent OLE or two men, crnwlilrg under the tent if
necessary, fit each ~“le or ridge or upright into the ring or ridge
pole hdes, nnd such n~~essories as hood. fly, and brace ropes are
adjusted. If a tripod be used an ndditionnl mm will go under
the tent to adjust it. The terd. stcatlied by the remni”ing men,
one nt each corner guy rope, a-ill then he raised. If the tent is
il ward or storage type, corner poles will now be placed at the
196 ?LmTu*LL OF TEl?T PITCHnTG

four corners. The four corner guy rows are then placed over
the ~OWP~notch& of the large pins driven in grolongntion “f the
diagonals at such distance as to hold the valls and ends “f tbe
tent vertical and smooth when the guy ropes are drawn taut.
A w:~lt pin is then driven tbrongh each remaining wall loop and
n large pin for earb guy rope is driven in line with the corner
guy pins olrendy driven. The guy ropes of the tent are ptncert
over the lower notches, while the guy ropes of the fly are plnced
over the upper notches, and are the” drawn taut. Brace rows,
when used. are then secured to stakes or Dins mitnbls’ placed.
(C. I. Lt. n., NO. 11.)
soo. Rescinded. (C. I. n. FL., NO. 11.)
Conical lvd, rent.
801. mi7e the door pin and center pin 3 feet 3 inches apart.
Using the hood lines with center pin as center, describe two Con-
centric circles mith rntlii 8 feet 3 inches and 11 feet 3 inches.
In the outer circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet opnrt. At
intc~rvI,,S Of nh”nt 3 feet drive tile other guy pin.
In other respects coniea1 tents are erected practically na in
the case of pyr:ulidnl tents. (C. 1. D. R., NO. 2.)

To Strike Common, Wall, Pwmidol. and Conicnl i’n// Tents.

802. STRlKE TENTS.
The men first ren,ove ntl pins except those of the four come*
g~ly ropes, or the four cyxidrant gny ropes in the cnae of the
~oni~at wall tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their
receptncte.
one m:,n holds each guy, am, when the ground is etenr the
tent is ,owere,,, folcted. or rolled ;m,, tied, the poles or tripon
and pole fustened together, snd the *enmining pins collected.
To Fold Tents
809. For folding common, wall, hospital, “nil storage tents:
Spread the tent tblt on the wiund, folded at the ridze so that
,,r,tton,s “f side ,W,lS are even, emIs of tent forming trinnglrs
to the right an* left: fold the trinng”lnP ends Of the tent in
tmmrd the middle, making it rectangulnr in shape; fold the top
over about 9 inches; fold the tent in two by cnrrying the top
 MmlJAL OF TENT PITCEIND. 197
fold “VW clear to the foot; fold again in two from the top to the
foot; throw all guys on tent except the second from eac!,l end:
fold the ends in so its to cowx about two-thit‘ds of the second
cloths; fold the left end “ver to meet the turned-,,, edge of the
right end, then fold the right end over the top, completing the
bundle; tie with the two exposed guys.

Method of Foolding Pyramidal Tent.

The tent is thrown taanrd the rear and the back ma,, and
roof canvas pulled out smooth. This may be most easily accom-
plished by lenviruz the rear-corner wall pins in the ground with
the wall loops attached, one mnn at each rear-corner guy. and
One holding the sqiqunre iron in a perpendicular ,xxitiou nnr,
pulling the canvas to its limit away fr”m the former front
of the tent. This leaves the three remaining sides of the tent
on top of the rear side, with the door side in the middle.
Now carry the right-front corner over and lay it on the left-
rear corner. Put, a,, cnn~as Sm”,,th, throw ~,lys toward x,uare
iron, and gull bottom edges even. Then take the right-front
corner and rCt”rn to the right, coverinf the right-rear corner.
This folds the right side of the tint on itself, with the cren~e
in the middle and under the front side of tent.
Next carry the left-front eornw to the right nnd back as de-
scribed above: this when c”mD,eted wit, leil~e the fr”“t and
rear sides of the tent lying smooth and flat and the two side
w~,,s folded in\,~,rd, each on itself.
Place the ho”d in the square iron which ha6 been folded down-
m:,rd toward the bottom of tent, and continue to fold ar”“nd the
s(luare iron 3s a core, pressing all folds down Rat and smo”th,
and puatlet with the bottom of the tent. If each fold is com-
p:,ctly mnde nnd the canvas kept smooth, the tat fold mill
r~artl~ cover the ,o\,.er edze of the C~IIYRS. Lnv a,, exnosed
guys along the folded canvas exccT)t the two 0” the c&,ter
width, which sbou,,, be ,>,,l,ed out and away from bottom ed@
to their ex+rm%~ length for tying. Nom, beginning nt one end.
fold toward the center on the first seam (that joininc the first
nnd second Mdths) and fold again toward the center so that
the tltrendy fotdrd CX”V:,S milt come to within about 3 inch=
of the middle width. Then fold over to the opwsite edge d
middle width of CD~YBS, Then begin folding from “pposite ad.
,198 X.4NUdL OF TENT PITCEINci.
folding the first width in Imlf, then nuking n second fold t”
come within about 4 or 5 inches of thnt ntre:ldy folded, turn this
fold entirely ““fx that already fullled. ‘Puke the exposed guys
and draw tlleln taut aeros~ each other, turn bundle over on the
under guy, cross guys 0” tag of bundle dmwing tight. Turn
bundle over “11 tbc crossed guys nnd tie lengthwise.
When properly tied and pressed t”getber this will make R
pnckage 11 bg 23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8,855 cubic inches
to store or pack.
Stencil the or&mizntion designation on the lower half of the
middle width of canvas in the back watl. (C. I. 0. IL, NM.
1 and 8.)
 MANUAL OF T?IE BVGLE.
Wnr”ing Ccl,/%

804. First. ~a//, guwd mounting, full dress, ove~colrts, drill.

sfoble, water, xnd boots and saddles precede the assembly ,,y such
i”terYill as mm be “rescribed bv the eammnndins o,lker.
Mess, church;and iatigoe, cl&&d as s~,vice c&q ,nay also be
used 86 wnrning calts.
First calf is the Arst sianl for formation for roll call and for
all reremonies except mard mounting.
Guard mounting is the drst sigmt for guard mounting.
The field m”sic nssembles at first cal, and guwd mounting.
In a mixed command. boots and saddles is ttle signal to
mounted troops that their formation is to be mounted; for
muunted guard mounting or mounted drill, it immedintety fol-
lows the si~gnnet guard mounting or drill.
When full dress or ““ere”at8 are to be worn, the full dress or
overcod call immediately follows first eoll. guard m,,unt;ng, or
boots and saddfes.
Formation Calls.

805. Assembly: The signal for c”mpauie8 or detnila to fall in.

Adjutant’s call: The @,a, for eom~anies t” for,,, battalion:
also for the guard details to form far guard mounting on the
camp or garrison parade ground; it follows the assembly at
such interval ns may be prescribed by the commanding or3iicer.
It is nlw~ used as a signal for the battalions to form regimeot,
following tbe first adjutant’s ca/l at such intervnl as the com-
manding “Eicer may prescribe.
To the co/or: Is suunded when the color salutes.
A/m-m Calls.

SOB. Fire call: The signal for the men ‘CO fall in, without
arms, to extinguish fire.
Te amns: The signal for the men to Ml in, under army, on
their company parade grounds n6 quickly 88 possible.
199
200 Y*BlT*L OP THE BLWLE.
To horse: TbC &ml, for monntml m3, to pmeeea unaer arms
to their horses, siNme, mount .I,,,~ assemble at a aesiQlatea
gk%ce ns q"ic,i,y as possible. In entenaea or&r this signal ia
"Sea t" remount tr"Ow
Service Calls.

807. Tattoo, tops, me%% sick, church, recoil, issue, bfficers’, cap-
tains’, first sergeants’, fatigue, school. and the general.
The geneml is the signnl for striking tents and loading wagons
-_^_^..^H._I
yreyilrn ',"LY A^
L" -^“^l.in”
ILrar~"LLrE,.
Reveille yrecedcs the assembly for roll call ; retreat follor.. us t? .Jt3
o**embly.~ tilt interval between being only that required for
formation ana 1‘01, cn,,, exreyt when there is pmaae.
Tops is the signal for extinguishing lights; it i,s usually IIre-
ceded bv cd, to ouorters by such interval ns grescribed by f Lrmy
Regulations.
Assembly. reveille, retrent, adjutant’s ca//, to the color, the
thmishes, ruflles. and the marches are sonnde~J by all the Rrld
rnnni~ nnitd: the ,,tb‘?r calls. na n rule. are so u,, dd b) I the
GZiGofihe~&&i or oxI& musieiai; he may alSO Sound
tile ossemh," wbai t,,u n1osiciaus are not unitea.
The morning gun is fired at me first note ai reveille, cx-. if
umrcbes br &,yed before reveille, it is fired at the COUP” enct
ment of the Rrst Ill&l.Cb.
The ewniog guu is Rred at the hst note Of retreat.
 BUGLE CALLS.

1. FlRST CALL.

Qyy s‘
~@g$&zJ&+:c/-j4F

sEj?I
flu. - m
@*-+z-wm , - - -7
2. Guam tvb”NT,NQ

@$Fje$$~~~~‘;; 7 ?-q

*-----3--- ,m
~Gi+~ _
,ty.qqzp r’y j H
@ i!,iiiI ,J=r’i:!+4
202 BDGLE CALLS.
3. FULLDRESS
~~~~~~~~~~~~
@ #

4. OvERcoATs.
--- -_
@$z$Ej/j~qqqf+

5. DRILL.
~~~~~~~~~~

@jEE”#*~
6. STABLE.
Quick.
7% C
%+ -. ‘j-q&=
--
r ff?W
[@& .+ r r F +-q~*
 BUGLE GALLS.
7. WATER.

Quick. 8. BOOTS
AND
SADDLES.

9. AssEuei”.

10.
 Wk. m m n
I 7,
‘-tl ! - $.’ 7.&&f’
” - dI
dT;-+=?S ; / ; .if,..:;
z&z-i--3++-&& :I : / :. IF
e .i*:-3,
&peatpi
/gzps/Y*~~7p~g.+~
 BUQLEc*mL3. 206
14. TO HORSE.

15. REYEILLE.
Quit?+.
@m&J$gg~~

--
gp&+*~;xy2*&
16. RETREAT.

r---j7

6+=yq+&-~-+@gi=Ji=J5q*
I’
206 BUOLECALLS.
RETREAT-ameiuded.
BUGLE CALLS. 207
17. TATTOO.
 BUGLE
CALLS
208~a~ro~o

~~jpJJggjg
gjg*qyqq7q
5
ygpj+-
3-e
rg-o4 ‘i_
p$<‘J
MYs!icizE
--
BUGLE CALLS. 209
210 BUGLE CALLS.
18. CALL l-0 QUARTERa

m _. h
gi3 L=’;:“I ‘T r r i A* J-217’ f
20. MESS
&aick.- -
k$ r r ;r j’ I; r 7I? kbw-?-z*-
rGre‘+4
i ;.. c,
Eiiw~U --ilcqrr:ti‘-I’ ‘L!ze-Y.2
L-m-, , @”
t& -: = i l iA -;” Ii _I& ‘ii =k
 BUGLE CALLS. 811
21. SICK.

m
@=q&-- mi-~ +F -: F
- :i$+gi-&&-&

22. CHURCH.

Eg$szi*~*$~*~

g!izz&T~*%~~~~~*~*

23. RECALL.
J&demfO.~
Y&---3
r ,&Tic
g+- Id 1

w-,
!&:,A+ -* -g-&+
- ‘“ii’ xf
24. ISSUE.
a12 BUGLE CALLS.
25. CJFFICERS'CALL.

7 f-Fd-+r--:-
r ?:I I iii I
26. CAPTAINS
CALL.
QZ~~~If?
~+T-(~-~-&&r++$~
-z,,r iax& ;
I4
 BUffLE CALLS. 218

29. SCHooL
m-
!Wj? :a j ’ q !fy

“r+pFL ,-e?!-?!,~~ ! :*
-. -TLC- --*
~+=i+-h ” -+=+
2% THEGENER.u’S
MARCH.

(6’. I. D. R. No.& Sept.8,~f/t.)

814 BUQLE CALLS.
30. THE GENERAL.

30K FLOURISHES FOR REVIEW.

cc. I. I).. x., NO. P.)

 BUGLE SIGNALS.
Seepnmsrsph11.

31. ASSEMBLE. MARCH.

Same 84 Assembly, No. 9.

32. ATTENTION.

33. ATTENTlON TO ORDERS.

34. FORWARD. MARCH.

36. DOUBLE TIME. MARCH.

 BUGLE SIGNALS.

37. To THE REAR. MARCH.

33. COMMENCE F,n,~o.

40. FIX BAYONETS.

41. CnanaE.
” f&a .#* l . . .

“~:.~~~~i~.~~~~~.=!r~
, I.-)’ ..WLU,,.,L

. Rep&at will.
-c.$-e~* --
--
.I* *-+#-F
.-
E&@&L; tT:i$!+ kr’ c
 APPEXDIX A.

WA& DEPAWMENT,
OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF STK+P,
Washington, December 2, 1911.
TBe Infantry Drill Regulatians, 1911, have been ~repnred for
me use Of troogs armed with the united states magazine rifle.
model 1993. Bor’the guidance of organizations armed with the
United States magazine rifle, model 1898, the fallowing alter-
native paragraphs are published anll Will be eO,,Sider* as sub-
stitute paragraphs for the correspon8ing paragraghs in the
text: 75 (in Pnrt), 96, 9s. 99, 134, 139, 141, 142, 145, and 160.
By order of the Sea-etary of War:
LEONdnD WOOD,
diejor Deecrel, CM@ Of staf.
7.5. * * *
Third. The cut-off is kept turned down, except when using
the mamzine.
*- * * * * l *

99. Being at order arms: 1. Unfix. BAICNET.

If the bayonet scabbard is carried on the belt: Take the posi-
tion of par:lde rest, a’asp the hnndle of the bayonet firluly with
the right hand, yress the syring with the forefmger of the left
hand, raise the bnyonet until the hnndie is aboat 6 inches
above the muzzle of the piece, drop the point to the left, back
of hand tonxrd the body, and, glnncing nt the scabbard, retw,,
the bnyonct, the blade pussing between the left arm and body;
rec,~nsp the ~ieee with the right hand and resume the order.
217
218 AIVEIYDIX.

If thz bnxonet scabbard is carried on the hnYersae%: Take

the bayonet from the rifle with the left hand and return it to
the scnbbard in the most convenient manner.
If mlarching or l~irlr down, the bnyouet is fixed nod unfixed
in the most expeditious am3 conrenient manner and the lliece
returned to the origillill pOBiti0”.
Mx and unRx bayonet are executed with promptness and reg-
ulnrity, but not in cadence.
9% Being at order arms: 1. inspection, 2. ARMS.
At the second command, take the position of port arms.
(TWO) With the right bond “pen the mngazioe gate, torn the
bolt handle up, draw the bolt bock and glance at the magazine
and chamber. Having found them empty, or having emptied
them, r&e the head nod eyes to the front.
99. Being at iuspection arms: 1. Order (Right shoulder, port),
2. ARW.5.
At the preparatory commnnd, p”Sh the bolt forward, turn the
handle down, close the magazine gate, pull the trigga, “nd
resume port “mm. At the commnnd “~“8, complete the move-
ment ordered.
134. Plwes being loaded and in the position of load, to exe
cute other movements with the pieces loaded: 1. Lock, 2. PIECES.
At the command Pieces turn the snfety lock fully to the right.
The 8ufety lock is said to be nt the “ ready” when turned to
the left, and at the “ snfe ” when turned to the right.
The cut-off is said to be “on” when tdrned up and “otI”
when turned down.
159. Being in line or skirmish line at bolt: 1. With dummy
(blank or boll) cartridges. 2. LOAD.
At the command loud each front-rank man or skirmisher fnces
half right nnd curies the right foot to the right, “b”“t one foot,
to such position 89 will insure the grentest firmness and steadi.
news of the body; raises or lowers the pieee and drop6 it into
the left hood Rt the bnlnnee. left thumb extended along the
Etock, muzale st the height of the breast. With the right hand
he turns and draw-~ the bolt back, takes a curtridge between
the thumb and first two fingers and plows it in the receiver;
places palm of the hand against the bock of the bolt handle:
 dPPEIiDIX. 819

thrusts the bolt home with a quick motion, turning down the
handle, nnd caTie* the band to the small of me stoct Each
renr-ran!% mm mc!YeS to the right front, tnlres a SirnihP PoSition
opposite the interval to the right of his *rout-rank man, muzzle
Of the piece extending beyond tile front Em%, and lands.
A skirmish line may load while moving, the pieces being held
as nenrlp as practicable in tbe position of load.
If kneeling or sitting the position of the piece is similar; if
kneeling the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting the
elbows nre supported by the knees. If lying down the left hilnd
steadies and supporta the piece nt the bnlnnee, the toe of the
butt restiag on the ground, the muzzle off the ground.
For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying
down) are desigmted a* tllst Of lord.
141. FILL MAGAZINE,
mite the pation of kd, if n0t dreaay there, OWN the gate
of the magazine with the riebt tbnmb. t&e five enrtridera from
the box &belt, and ylace tik, with ibe bullets to the frop It. in
the magnzine, turning the barrel slightly to the left to facilitate
the insertion of the cartridges; close the gate and cnrry the
right hand to the small of tile stock.
TO land from the mngnzine the commnnd From mogarine will
be given preceding that of LOAD: the cut-off will be turned un on
coming to the position of hod.
TO resume landing from the beit the commnnd From belt will
be given grecdng the commautl LOAD: the cut-off will be turn&
dOw” 0” coming to the position Of load.
The commands from mnsorine and from belt, indicating the
change in the manner of loading, will not be reneatud in snbse
quent commands.
The words from belt apply to cilrtridge box as well ns belt.
In loading from the mngrzine cnre should be taken to push
the bait fully forwtlrd itnd turn the bnndle down before dmw-
ing the bolt back, BS otherwise the extractor mill not cntch the
cartridge in the chamber, ‘nud jamming will occur with the
cartridge *allowing.
To Iire from the mng%zine, the command MAGAZINE FlRE may
be given at any time. The cut-off is turned up and an increased
rate of fire is executed. *fter the magazine is exhnusted the
cut-m is turned dawn am the firing eontinuea, heding from
the belt.
220 *PPEmnX A.

Magazine fire is emplo~e.3 only when, in the opinion of the

platoOn lender or company commander, the nmXirn”rn rate of
fire becomes rEceSSmy.
142. “NIQAD.
All take the poliition of luad, turn the cut-off up, if not alreadjl
there, turn the safety lock to the left, and alternately oven and
close the chamber until all the cartridges are ejected. After
the last cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed and the trig-
ger ~ulkd. The cartridges are then picked up, denned, am3
returned to the box or belt, and the piece brought to the omler.

148. CUP FIRE.

Turn the cut-off ,I,,: 6re ot will (reloading from the maga.
he) until the cartridges in the piece are exlwusted; turn the
CUt-OE dovn; fill magazine; Ekmd and take the position Of
svs/Jend firing.
150. CElSE FIRING.
Fiirin~ S~OI)S; pieces not already there are brought to the
,msition of land, the cartridse is drawn or the empty shell fs
ejected, the trigger is pulled, tights me laid down, and the piece
is brought to the order.
Cease firing is used *or long DmE.es to prepme far changes Of
position or to steady the men.
 APPEPU’DIX B.

WAB DEPARTMENT,
OFFICE or THE CHIEF OF STABF,
Woshinyton, DecemlJcr B, 1911.
Paragraphs T4i, i92, 793, TM, 795, 796, RX, and 798, Infantry
Drill Ke~ulations, ,011, n,,,,,y only to troo,,s e,,ui,,,,ed with the
Infantry EquipImnt, mxle, 1910. Far tr00gS eQ”iaped under
General Orders, x0. 23, war mwrtment, 1Ocl6, nnd orders
xmeudatory thereof, the alternative Dara3pmphs ,,ublished here-
nm Will govern.
By order Of the secretary of war:
LEONAED WOOD.
a4ajw General, Ghi@ Of majff.
147. If the inspection is to inclltde a” evnmination of the
blanket rolls the enntnio, before dimissing the cm,,~any and
after ins~Iecting t,he file elosers, directs the lieutennnts to remain
i” “lace. C,“S~S r‘8”B~. stacks arms. dreses the com”anv hack +A,
fuur peaces from the stacks. t&s i”tervaIs, and e&mnnds:
1. Unsling, 2. PACKS, 3. Open, 4. PACKS.
At the secoud command each mnn ““slings his rull and places
it on the ground at his feet, rounded end to the front, square
end of shelter half to the right.
At the fourth eommnnd the r’o11s xx ““tied, laid peergendicn-
lar to the front with the triangular end of the shelter half to
the front, o~~rred, and ““roiled to the left; each mah ,xqxares
the contents of his roll for inspection n”d res”“,es the attention.
The ~antnin then retwn~ MM-, rxmses along the ~“!a and
file elmem as before, ins,mts the roU8, returns t” the right,
draw8 saber and commnnds: 1. Close, 2. PACKS.
At the second commnnd each “1813, with his shelter half
smoothly 8nre:id 0” the gro”“d with b”ttom up nnd triangular
end to the front, folds his blanket once ncro~s its length and
placea it upon the shelter half, fold toward the bottom, edge
221
222 dPPEBDIX B.

onehalf inch from the wuare end, the same amount of CII~VB~
““covered at the top and bottom. He then places the parts of
the Pole 0” the side of the b,nn!zet neat the sq,,are ““d “f shelter
half, near and rx~alle, to the fold, end of ,I”,” about 6 iuches
from the edge of the blanket; nests the gins similarly near the
opposite edge of the blanket and distributes the other articles
carried in the roll; folds the trianrulnr end nnd t&n the ex-
posed portion of the bottom of the shelter half “ver the blanket.
The TV” men in each file r”ll and fasten first the roll of the
front and then of the rear rank mnn. The tile closer~ work simi-
larly two and two, or with the front rank man of n blank file.
Each wir stands, on the folded side, rolls the blnnket ra,, closely
and buckles the str:,Ds, ,x,ssing the end of the strap through
troth keeper and buckle, back over the buck,” and under the
keeper. With the I-“,, so lying on the gronnd that the edge of
the shelter half can just be seen when looking wrtically down-
ward one end is bent upmilrd and over to meet the other, B
clove hitch is taken with the guy rope,tirst around the end t”
which it is nttilched and then around the other end, adjusting
the length of row between hitches to suit the wearer.
AS SO”” a8 a file eompktes its two roll8 each man plnces his
roll in the position it was in after being unslmig and stands at
attention.
All the r”1,s being completed, the captain commands: 1. Wng, ’
I.9 PdPWP
,."..".
At the second command the rolls are s,ung, the end contoin-
ing the pole to the mai-.
The company is assembled, takes arms, and the captain corn-
pletes the inspection as before.
702. Being in line “P in column “f platoons, the captain
comma”ds: FORM #OR SHELTER TE”TS.
The “dicers, first 8erg”““t, and guides fall ““t; the ~““!a
form n file on the Bank of the c”m,x~ny nearest the kitchen, the
first sergeant and right guide fall in, forming the right file of
the company ; blnnk files are filled by the 131” closers or bg me,,
taken from the front rank; the remaining guide or guides. nnd
me closers form on n Convenient flank. Before forming column
of ~llntoons. nreanrntorv to nitchine tents. .thn comnanv mav
be divided i&d two 0; more ~hto&s re&dless of &he kze of
each. (0. I. D. R., No. 8.1
79.3. The captain then cause8 the company to take interrals
ns described in the School of the Squad, and commands : PITCH
TENTS.
 bPPmiDIX B. 223

At the command pitch fenfs, each man steps off obliqueIs to

the right with the right foot and lS.vs his rifle on the ground, the
butt of the rifle near the toe of the right foot. muazle to the
front, barrel to the left, nnd steps bnck into his plnce; each
front rank nmn then draws his bayonet and sticks It in the
ground by the outside of the right heel. All unsling and “pen
the blanket rolls and take out the shelter hnlf, poles, nnd Dills.
Each then spreads his shelter half, trim& to the RX’, flat
up”” the ground the tent is to occupy, renr rank mnn’s half
on the right. The halves are then buttoned together. Each
frront mnk man joins his pole, inserts the top in the eyes of the
halves, and holds the pole upright beside the bayonet ~lnced in
the grounn; his red* rnnlr man, using the pi,ins in front, mm
down the front ~“rners of the tent on the line of bayonets.
stretching the eanvn~ taut; be then inserts n pin in the eye of
the rope and drives the pin nt Swb distance in front Of the ~“le
ns to ho14 the rope taut. Both then go to the rear of the tent;
the rear rank man adjusts the pole nnd the front rank man
drives the pins. The rest of the gins are then driven by both
men, the rear rank man working on the right.
As soon as the tent is pitched each mm 8rrmgeS the contents
of the blanket roll in the tent nnd stands at attention in front
of his own half on line with the front guy rope pip.
The guy ropes, to have a uniform slope when the Shelter tents
me pitched, should all be of the Same lag-th. (0. I. D. IL,
NOR. 2 and 8.)
704. When the blanket ~‘Sll is mt carried, internis are
taken ns described above; the Iiosition af the front pole is
mnrked with n bayonet and eqniwnent~ me laid nside. The
men then proceed to the wag”“, secure their rolls, return Lo
their places, and Bitch tents ns heretnfore described.
795. TO pit& double shelter tent. the captain gives the Sane
commands SS before, except Toke holf intwwl is given instead of
Take intervd. In taking interral each man follows the preced-
ing mm nt 2 PBE~S. The cnptnin then commands: PfTCH
DOUBLE TENTS.
The first sergeant places himself on the right of the right
guide and with him pitches R single shelter tent.
Only the odd n”mberS of the front rnnk mark the line with
the bayonet.
The tent is formed by buttoning together the square ends of
two Single tents. TWO eomp,ete tents, except one pole, xl-e used.
!L’wo guy rOpeS nrS used St each end, the guy pins being placed
In front of the comer pins
224 dPPENDIX B.

The tents are pitched by numbers 1 and 2, front and rear

rank; ana by numbers 3 and 4, front and rear rnnlt; the men
falling in on the left arc numbered, counting off if necess;iry.
AIL the me* sprend their shelter halves on the ground the
tent is to occupy. Thaw of the front rank a*” placed with the
trianguiar ends to the front. All four halves are tbeu buttoned
together, first me ridges xnd then the Sn”nre end% The front
corners “f the tent are ,~imEd by the front-rank men, the “dd
number holding the gales, the even number driving the gins.
me rear--rank men similarly pin me rear corners.
while the Odd numbers stenay the poles, each even number Of
the front rank tikes his pole and enters the tent, where, assisted
by the even number of the rear mnli. he adjusts the pole to the
center q-28eye8 Of
of the shelter halves ill io the f”ll”ming
foll”ming older:
order: (I)
(1)
The lower haif of the front tent; (2) tile lower half Of tbc rear
tent; (3) the upper“~per half “f
of the front tent; (4) the “Dpx
“~&r half
of the rear tent. The puy ropes nre then the!” adjusted.
The tents having been be‘3 I,itched,
pitched, the trbmgular
tri;mguiar ends arc
am turned
back, Contents
contents Of
of the PO116
~“116 arranged,
nrran~ed, nnd the men stand at
attention, ench “iI1)“site
opposite his “IYU OIYU shelter half and facing “a from
the tent.

796. omittea

78,. Omitted

798. omitted.
co. “r;” :e!“- “‘- ‘~
 APPENDIX C.

XANUAL OF THE BAYONET.

WAR DEPARTMEAT,
omrcr OF THE Crl,r;F OF STAFF.
washinu7fOn, f”dJruarv 20.191d
The following Manun! of the Bnyonet, ,mpared-by ‘a bawd
ronnisting of Capt. Herschel TIIT)~S, Wmt Infantry, and Cant.
Oros~anor I.. l’omnsend, First Infantry, is approved and issued
for the i,,formation a”,, government of the Regular Army an,,
the Orgnnized Militia Of the United sbltes.
Ry order Of the Secretary Of War.
IlE”N*m w000,
Major General, chief Of stqy.
im4Oi~-1i-E 225
 MANUAL OF THE BAYONET.
UNITED STATES ARMY.

1. The infantry soldier relies mainly on fire action to disable

the enemy, but be should know that personal combat is often
necessary to obtain 8”ccess. Therefore, he must be iustructed
in the use of the rifle and bayonet in hand-to-hand encounters.
2. The object of this instruction is,to teach the soldier how to
ma’x effectire use of the rifle and bayonet in personnl combat;
to make him quick a”d proficient in handling his rifle; to give
him a” accwate eye and n steady hand; and to give him con-
fidence in the bayou& in offe”se and defense. When skill in
these exercises has been acquired, the rifle mill still remain a
most formidnble weapon at dose quarters should the bayonet
be lost or disnbled.
3. Etlicieney of organizations in bayonet nghting will be
judged by the skill shown by individuals in personal combat.
For this ~“rpose lairs or groups of opponents, selected nt XC”-
$am from among recruits aud trained Mldiers, should engage
m aSSa”ltS, “8ing the fencing equipment provided for the p”r-
IlOSe.
4. Officers and specially selected nnd thoro”ghly instructed
noncommissioned of6cer6 will act 88 instmctor(i.
6. Instruction in bayonet combat should begin 8s 800” “8 the
8oldier is fnmilinr with the hnndling “f his rifle and will pr”.
En%% as far “a practicable, in the order followed in the text.
8. Instruction is ordinarily given on even ground; but prac
tice should “lso be had on ““even ground, e~peeially in the at-
tack and defense of *ntreneJlments.
7. These exerciseswill not be used as a calesthenie drill.
8. The PrinCiPks of the commands are the same 88 those give”
in Paragraphs 9, 15, and 38, Infantry Drill Regulations. Inter-
**,
228 lcs-nv.L OF TEE B*YQNET.

vals and distances will be taken as in paragraphs 109 and iii,

Infantry Drill Regulations, extent that, in formations for bago-
uet exercises, the men should be nt least four paces apart in
cvfry direction.
9. Before requiring soldiers to take n position or execute a
movement for the first time, the instructor executes the. some
for the purpose of illustration, after which he requires the sol-
diers to exccute the morement indiridunlly. Movements pm
scribed in this manual mill not be executed in cadeuee as the
attempt to do so results in incomplete execution and lack of
vigor. Each movement mill be executed correctly as quickly
as possible by every man. As soon as the movemeuts are ex-
ecuted accurately, the commands are siren ml,idly, as expert-
lms with the bayonet depebds cbietly upon quickness of mo,:on.
10. The exereimzs will be interrupted at first by short and fre-
queut rests. The rests will be less frequelit iis prodeiency is
nttained. Fatigue and exhaustion will be speeinlly gonrdwl
against, as they prevent nro~er interest being taken in the
exercises and delay the progress of the instruction. Rests mill
be giwn from the Bosition of order arm in the manner pre-
acribed in Infantry Drill Regulations.
THE BAYONET.
N”MEKcLaTunE AND D%S”BIPT,“N.
11. The bayonet is D cutting and thrusting weapon con&sting
of three principal parts, viz, the Ma&, guard, and grip.
 HrnUBL OF THE BBYONET. 229

12. The blade bns the following parts: Edge, f&e edge, back,
~~‘ooY~s, point, nnd tang. The length of the blade from guard
to point is IF inches, the ulge 14.5 inches. and the false edge
5.6 inches. Length of the rifle, bnyonet 6xed, is 59.4 inches
The weight of the bayonet is 1 pound; weight of rifle without
bayonet is 8.69 ~)ounds. The center of gravity of the rifle, with
bayonet fixed, is just in front of the rear Sight.
I. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT TRE RIFLE.
13. The instrnctor explnins the ~importance of good footwork
and impresses on the men the fact that quickness of foot and
suppkness of body ime ns important for attack nnd dcfcnse 3s
is the ability to parry and delirer n strong point OF cut.
14. All foot movements &ould be made from the position of
guard. As far as ,xxtic*b:e, they will be mnde on tho balls of
the feet to insure ouiekness and agility. So hnrd and fast ru,c
cm be kid don” ns to the length of the various foot move-
merits; this depends entirely on the situations oeeurring in
eombat.
15. The men harins take” interrnlS”rdist:mces, theinstructor
eommnnds :
1. Bayonet exercise, 2. GUARD.
At the command guard, halt face to the right, can-y back and
B,DC” the right foot about one” and n half its length to the reap
and about 3 inches to the right, the feet farming with each other
an angle of *bout GO”, weixht of the body bnlnnced equally on
the balls of the feet, knees slightly bent, palms of hands on
hips, fingers to the front, thumbs to the rear, bend erect, bend
and eyes strnight to the front.
16. To resume the attention, 1. Squad, 2. ATTENT,,,N. The
men Lzke the position of the soldier nnd Bx their attention.
17. ADVAXCE. Advance the left foot quickly about once its
length, follow immediately with the right foot the same d,st*nm.
IS. RETIRE. More the right foot quickly to the I‘~QP about
one* its length, follow immedintely with the left foot the same
distance.
19. 1. Front, 2. PASS. Place the right foot quickly about once
its length in front of the left. advance the left foot t” its pr”p*r
rmsition in front of the right.
230 HANUAL OF THE BAPONET.

20. 1. Rear, 2. PASS. Place the left foot quick,y about once
its length in rear of the right, retire the right foot to its proper
Position in rear of the left.
The passes are used to get quickly within striking distance or
to withdraw q”ickly therefrom.
21. 1. Right, 2. STEP. Step to the right With the right foot
about Once its length and place the left foot in its proper relative
position.
12. 1. Left. 2. STEP. Step to the left with the left foot about
on& its length and place the right foot in its proper relative
Position.
These steps are used to circle around an enemy, to secure B
more favorable line of attack, or to avoid the opponent’s nttaek.
Better ground OP more farorable :icllt may be gained in this
way. In bayonet feneiog and in aet”al eombnt the foot first
moved in stepping to the right 01 left is the one which at the
moment bears the least weight.
II. INSTRUCTION WITH TRIG RIFLE.
23. The commands for and the execution of the foot n,ov+
ments are the came as already given for movements without the
rifle.
24. The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor
commands :
1. Bayonet exercise. 2 GUARD.
At the second command take the position of guard (we par.
16) ; at the same time throw the riEe smartly to the front, grasp
the riEe with the left hand just below the Iower band, fingers
between the stock and gun sling, barrel turned slightly to the
left, the right hand gasping the sma31 of the stock about 6
inches in front of the right hip, elbows free from the body,
bayonet point at the height of the chin.
25. 1. Order, 2. ARAtS.
Bring the right foot up to the left and the rifle to the pai-
tion of order arms, at the ame time resuming the position of
attention.
20. During the preliminary instruction, attacks and defenses
will be executed from guard until proficiency is attained, after
x*HU*L OF THE BIYONET. 231
,.UNUAL OF THE BAYONET.
 MABUBL OF TRE BAYONET. 233

which they may be executed fro”, nny ~“siticn in whit,, the

rice is held.
-..-...- ATE4”KS.
27. 1. TARUST.
Thrust the rid? quickly forward to the full length “f the left
ZIP”J, turning the barrel t” tho left, and direct the point “f the
bayonet iIt the Bcint to be attacked, butt c”verir 1%the right fore-
DPUI. At the same time straighten tb” rignc 1~ ~~ig”r”usly and
throw tbo wei@t of the body fcrrrard aud on the left leg, the
bnil of the right foot always “n the ground. Guard is resumed
immedintely without commnnd.
The force of the thrust is delivered principally with the right
arm, the left being used to direct the bayonet. ‘The ,,“ints at
wbich the attack 6b”uid be directed RE, in order “f their im.
~“rtnnce, stomach, chest, heild, neck, and limbs,
m 1_. --.
--. ,,,Ynr- -,
Es ecuted in the snme manner as the tbrustt except tbnt the
left foot is carried fcmnrd about tmice its ,e”gtn. ‘the left
heel must nlwnys be in r”nr of tb” left line”. Guard is resumed
immediately mithcut ccmmnnd. Guard may alsc be resumed by
ndmucing the right foot if, for any reascn, it is desired to hold
the ground gained in lunging. In the lattL?r ease, the prepaxn-
tow commm forward will be &a,. Each method should be
,mCticed.
20. 1. Butt, 2. STRIKE.
Straighten right arm and riEbt len vixcol‘cusly nnd sming butt
of rise against point “f attack. pi%& lb” ride in the left
band iIt nbont the height of the left shculder, a,,“r~i”g th”
bayonet to ,XISS to the rear 01, the left side of the bead. Guard
is resumed mith”=h n*--enA
“L L”UL”UYU_

The uoints “f : attack in their order “f importance are, head,

neck, stcu~acb, and crctch.
SO. 1. Cut, 2. GOWN.
Execute a quick downward stroke, edge of bay” net directed
at pcint “f attack. Guard is resmwd without command.
31. 1. Cut, 2. RIGHT (LEFT).
With n quick extension of the arms execute a cut to tbe right
(left), directinz the edge tcwnrd the point attacked. Guard is
resumed withat commnnd.
234 XIBNVAL OF TRE Bt.YOBET.
 YAmJ*I OF THE B*YtmET. 23.5

The cuts are es~ecinlly useful ngainst the head, neck. and
hands of an enemp. In executing left cut it should be remem-
bered that the false, or back edge, is only 8.6 inches long. The
cuts can be executed in continuation of strokes, thrusts, lunges,
and wmies,
32. To direct an attack to the right, left, or rear the soldier
will change front as quickly 8s possible in the most convenient,
manner, for example: 1. To the right em,-, 2. Cut. 3. DOWN:
1. To the right, 2. LUNGE: 1. To Me left, 2. THRUST. etc.
Whenever possible the impetus gained by the tumlng move
mat of the body should be tbrom into the attack. In general
this will be best nco,mllliSbed by turning on the ball of the
*ight foot.
These mwements constitute a change of front in wbieh the
position of guard is res”med at the completion of the movement.
33. Goad judgment of distance is essential. Accuracy in
tbrnsting nnd lunging is best attained by practicing these at-
tacks against rings or other convenient awnings. about 3 inches
in diameter, suitably suspended ot desired heights.
34. The thrust and lunges at rings should first be practiced by
endenvorinz to hit the owning looked at. ‘This should be fol-
lowed by directing the attack against one opening while looking
*t another.
35. The soldier should also experience the effect of actual
resistance offered to the bnyonet and the butt of the ride in
attack& This will be taught by Practicing attacks against a
d”llUIly.
36. Dummies should be constructed in such n ,na,,,er as t,,
Permit the exwution of attACka without injury to the point or
edge of the bayonet or to the barrel 0~1 stock of the ride. A
suitable dummy can be made from pieces of rope about 5 feet,
In length Plaited closely together into B cable between 6 and
12 inches in diameter. Old rope Is preferable. Bags weighted
and stuffed~with bay, straw, shavings, etc., me also suitable
DEFENSES.
ST. In the arelimimrg drllla fn the defenses the position of
gOard is resumed, by command, after each parry. When the
XANU.4L OF THE BAYONET. 23,
233 ?dA?TlJ.4I OF THE BAYONET.

men hnx become proficient. the instructor will ca”se them to

re8”me the position of yard inStant,y without command after
the execution Of each ,lnrry.
33. 1. Parry, 2. RIGHT.
ICeeDing the right hand in the guard position, move the ride
sharply to the right with the left arm, so that the bayonet point
1s about 6 inches to the right.
33. 1. Parry, 2. LEFT.
Move the ride shnr,,,y to the left front with both hands so as
to cover the point attacked.
40. 1. Parry, 2. HIGH.
Raise the rifle with both hands high enough to clear the line
of vision, barrel downward, poi”t of the bayonet to the left
*rant.
When nwe~ea,‘y to raise the rifle we,, “bore the head, it may
be mm”orted hetw(P” the thumb aud fooredneer of the left hand.
This position will be necessary ngaimt atta:ks from higher &-
vations, such 88 men mounted or on top of pnrapets.
41. 1. Low parry. 2. RlGXT (LEFT).
Darry the Point of the bayonet down until it 1s at the height
of the knee, moving the point of the bayonet sufficiently to the
rieht Cleft, to keer, the omo”e”t’6 attacks clear of the point
threntened:
These parries are rarely used, as an attack below the waist
leaves the head nnd body eqxmed.
42. Parries m”st not be too wide or sweeping, but sharp, short
motions, Bnished with a jerk or quick catch. ‘The bands should,
a.8 far 88 posible, be kept in the line of attack., Parries agaiost
butt strike me made by quickly moving the guard 80 88 to corer
the point attacked.
43. To ,,rov,de against attack from the right, left, or rear the
soldier will change front 88 quickly as Bossible in the most co”-
vdent manner; for example: 1. To the left rear, 2. Parry,
3. NIGH: 1. To the right, 2. Pnwy, 3. RIGHT. etc.
These movements constitute a change of front in which the
position of guard is resumed at the completion of the movement.
In chan3,ng front for the ,mrpose of attack or defense, if
there is dmger of wounding a comrade, the ride sho”ld firat he
brought to a vertical position.
YlAlWAL OF THE BAYONET. 239
 240 XABUAL OF THE BAYONET.

III. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE BAYONET.

44. 1. Club rifle. 2. SWING.
Being at order ~“1% at the areparatom @.~,~“a”d quickly
mlse and turn the rifle, regmsping it with both hE”ds between
the reilr sight and muzzle, bnrre, down, thumbs around the
stock and toward the butt: at the same time raise the ride
above the shoulder farthest from the o,,,,o”ent, butt elevated
and to the rear, elbows slightly bent and k”ees straight. Each
individual takes such positio” of the feet, shoulders; and hands
as best accords with his natural dexterity. SWING. Tigbte”
the grasp of the hands and Swing the rifle to the front and
dow”ward, directing it at the head of the opgo”e”t and imme-
diately retur” to the position of club rifle by comp,eti”g the
swing of the rifle downward and to the ,~a=. Bepeat by the
commnnd, SWING.
The rifle should be svung with sudicient force to break
through a”y guard or parry tint “my be interposed.
Being at club Me, order arms 16 resumed by Command.
The use of this attack against dumluies or in fencing is pr.y
hibited.
45. The position of club rifle may be trike” from ““y gositia”
of the rifle prescribed i” the Na”ua1 of Arms. It will not be
take” i” personnl combnt ““less the emergency is BU& as to
nrwlude the use of the bayonet.
IV. COMBINED MOVEMENTS.
46. The purpose of combined movements is to develop more
vigorous attacks and “lore effectire defenses than are obtnined
by the single movements; to develop skill in pczssi”g from at-
tack to defense and the reverse. Every movement to the front
should he accompanied by an attack, which is increased in
effectiveness by the forward movement of the body. Every
mO?‘ement ia the rear should ordinarily be accompanied by a
,Xrry and should always be followed by a” attack. Moveme”ts
to the right or left may be “~~o”q,a”ied by attacks or defenses.
47. Not more than three movements mill be used in any earn-
bination. The instructor should first indicate the “umber of
.xunJAI. OP THE SBYONET.
 242 MANUAL OF THE B.4YONET.

mO%?mentR that are to be combined ns two movements or three

movements. The execution is determined by one command of
execution, an4 the p”SitiOn Of guurd is take* upon the compb3.
tion Of the last movement only.

EXAMPLEB.
Front pass and LUNGE.
Right step and THRUST.
Left step and low parry RIGXT.
Rem- POSS. fxm-y left and LUNGE.
Lunge and cut RIGHT.
Parry right and parry HIGH.
Butt strike rrnd cut DOW,,.
Thrust and go,-ry HIGH.
Parry high and LUNGE.
Advance, thrust and out SIGXT.
Right step, gorry left and out DOWN.
To the left. butt strike and cut DOWN.
To the Fight raw, cut down and butt STRIKE.
48. Attacks against dummies Will be pma33a. The npproaeh
will be made against the dummies both in quick time and
double time.

V. PRACTICAL BAYONET CONBAT.

49. The principles of practical bayonet combat should be
taught 88 far 88 possible during the progress of instruction in
bayonet exercises.
SO. The soldier must be continually impressed wkb the ex-
treme importance of the ol?eensivedue to it*mora1 eEeet. 8hould
an attack fail, it should be followd immwliately by another
attack before the opponent has an opportunity to a88ume the
offeensive. Keep the opponent on the defensive. If, due to cir-
c”mstances, it is nezes681‘y to take me defenatve, constantly
watch for an opportunity to a*Sume the offensive and take
immediate advantage of it.
51. Observe the ground with n view to obtaining the best foot-
ing. Time for this will generally be too limited to permit more
than B ah& hasty glance.
 XANUAL OF TXE BAYONGT. 243
52. In perpmal combat watch the opponent’s eyes if they an
be plainly seen, am d” not fin the eyes on his weapon nor upon
the point of your attack. If his eyes can not be plainly seen,
ns in night attacks, watch the movements “f his weilpon and
of his body.
53. Icee~ the body me” covered and deliver attacks vig”rouQ.
The mint of the bayonet should nlwnys be kept ns nearly as
possible in the line of attack. The 18~8 the rifle is moved up-
ward, domnmnrd, to the right, or to the left, the better prepared
the soldier Is for attack or defense.
54. Constantly watch for z clulnce to attncli the opponent%
left band. His poosition of guard will not di!Yeer materially from
that described in pamgraph 24. If his bayonet is without R
cutting edge, he will be at a great disadvantage.
55. The butt is used for close and sudden attacks. It is nat-
tieularly useful in riot duty. From the position of port arms a
sentry cm strike n severe blow with the butt of the rifle.
56. Against a man on foot, armed with a sword, be cnrefnl
that the muzzle of the rifle is not graspxl. AU the swordsman’s
energies will be dirwted toward getting past the bayonet. At-
tnck him with short, stabbinx thrmt~, and keep him beyond
striking distance of his weawm.
5%‘. The adversary may attempt a greater extension in the
thrust and lunge by quitting the grasp of bin piece with the left
hand and advancina the right as far as mxsible. When this
is done, a aharp parry ma: cause him 6 lose control of hia
rifle, leaving him exposed to a counter attack, which should
f”llOTv promptly.
SD. Against odds a small number of men can Bght to best
advantage by grouping themselves so 8s to prevent their being
attacked from behind.
59. In dghting n mounted mnn armed with a saber every
effort must be made to get on his near or left side, because here
his reach is much shorter and his parries much weaker. If not
xwssible to disable web nn enemy. attack his horse and then
ienew the attack on the horsema-n.
SD. In receiving night attack* the assailant’s movements cm
be best “baerved from the kneeling or prone position, as his
244 ?d*ITu*I. OP TEE BAYONET

approach generally brings him against the sky line. When he

arrives within attacking distnnce rise quickly and lunge Well
forward at the middle of his body.
VI. FENCING EXERCISES.
61. Fencing exercises in two lines consist of combinations of
thrusts. parries. and foot morelnents euecutsd at command or
at will. t& opponent replying with suitable parries and returns.
62. The instructor will insgeet the entire fencing equipment
before the exexise begins and ossuro himself that everything is
in such condition as will merent accidents.
63. The men equip the&selves and form in two lines at the
order, f;rchg each other, with intervals of about 4 paces b&well
files and a distance of about 2 paces between 1Lnes. One line
is designated na number 1; the other, number 2. Also ns attack
and defense.
64. The opno&ts being at the order facing each other, the
instructor commands : SALUTE.
Each man, with eses on his o,wonent, carries the left hand
smartly to the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb nod
fingers extended and joind, forearm horizontal, forefinger
g;whi”g the bayonet (Two.) Drop the arm Smartly by the
This salute ia the fencing salute.
AU fencing exercises and nil fencing at will b&tmeen inil-
~iduals will begin and terminnte with the formal courtesy of
the fencing salute.
65. After the fencing salute hns been rendered the instructor
commands: 1. Fencing exercise, 2. GUARD.
At the command guard each man comes to the position of
guard, heretofore dedne4, buyonets crossed, each man’s bayonet
bearing lightly to the right against the corresponding portion
of the opponent’s bayonet. This position is known as the
engage or engage right.
66. Being at the engage right: EMGAGE LEFT.
The attack dmps the point of his bayonet quickly until clear
of his opponent’s rifle and describes a semicircle with it wward
end to the right; bayonets are crossed similarly aa in the en-
 aaalvnar cm THE B*YOBET.

gaged ~osltion, eneh man’s bayonet bearing lightly to the left

nglllnst the corresponding pm-tim of me opponent’* bayonet.
67. Being at engage left: ENGAGE RIGHT.
The attack quickly drops tbe point of hia bayonet until clear
of his opponent’s rifle and deaxibes a semicircle with it upward
and to the left and engages.
68. Being snglrged: ENOAOE LEFT AND RIGHT.
Phe attack engages left nnd then immedintely engages right.
69. Being engaged left: ENGAGE RlGHT AND LEFT.
The attack sngllges right and then immediately engsgss leff.
70. 1. h’umber one, -ENGAGE RUNT (LEFT);.% Number two.
CGWTER.
Number om? executes tlx mouem~t ordered, as abo7e; num-
ber two quickly drops the point of his bayonet and circles it
upward to the original positio,,.
71. In au fIxKing Nhik maintnining the pressure in the en-
gage, a certain freedom of motion of the ride is nllownble, con-
&ding of tie play, or upand-dowu motion, of one bayonet
sgninst the other. ‘This is necessary to prevent the opponent
from dhining the intended attack. It also prevents his using
the mint of contact as a pivot for his msmlts. In changing
from one engage to the other the movement is controlled by the,
left hand, ule right remaining stationary.
72. After w,me exercise in engqe. eqg&,e Mt. and countcu;
smrcises will be giwn in the assaulta,

73. The part of the body to be attacked will be designated by

name, as head, neck, cheat. stomach. lea No attacks will be
made below the knees. me commands a& given and me more-
ments for each line are first explained thoroughly by the in-
&r”etor: *Ill? exemtion beeins It the.-- rommnnn
_.~-~~~- arsadt.
-~~ Nnrn-
-.__
berane~xecutestlreattaclr,sndI ~~~~_onrries : con~ewA,v.
Ilnnbcr two ~~~ ~~~~~.“.
at Command, numba two attacks and number one ll~mles
74. Wr convenience in instruction nssnults are divided into
sinwle attacks. counter attacks, attacks on the rifle. and feints.
246 iYLuxAL 02 THLE BAYONET.

snDI.B ATXCKB.

75. Success in these attacks dewends on qulcknes~l of move-

ment. There RR three simple attacks-the straight, the disen-
g~,eme”t, and the caunte~ disengagenrent. They are not preceded
by B feint.
76. In the straight the bayonet is directed straight at an “pen-
ing from the engaged position. contact with the opponent’s
rifle may, or may not, be ubnndoned while making it. If the
opening be high or low, contact with the ride will “s”a,ly be
abandoned on commencing the attack. If the “penlng be near
his guard, the light pressure used in the engage may be eon-
tinued in the attack.
Example: Being at the ~9~188 riqht, 1. Number one, at neck
(head, chest, right leg, etc.), threet; 2. Number two,‘pllrry right:
3. ASSAULT.
77. In the disengagement contact with the o~~nent’s rifle is
abandoned and the point of the bayonet is circled under or over
his bayonet or rifle and dirwted into the opening attacked. This
attack 18 delivered by one continuow spiral movement of the
bayonet from the moment contact is abandoned.
Examale: Being at the engage right. 1. Number one, at stomach
(left chest, left leg, etc.), thrust; 2. Number two, p.wy left (etc.) ;
3. ASSAULT.
73. In the counter disengagement n swift attnek is made into
the opening disclosed while the “DBonent is ZttemDting to change
the engagement of his ride. It is delivered by one continuous
s&al movement of the bayonet into the “~ening.
Example: Being at the engage right. 1. Number two. engage
left; 2. Number one, at chest, thrust: 3. Number two. party lett:
4. ASSAULT.
Number two initiates the movement, number one thrusts a8
8wn a8 the opening is made, and number two then attempts to
parry.
1% A coude~ attack or return is one made instantly after or
in continuation of a marry. The aarry should be a.8 narrow as
,,ossible. This makes it more di&ult for the “,,ponent to re-
cover and counter parry~ The counter attack shollld ah” be
 MANUAL OF TIIE BAYONET. 24,

made at, or just before, the fall extension of the oooonent’s

attack, as when it is so made, a simple extension of ?he arms
will !wXrally be sdicient to reach the op~onent’s body.
Example: Being at engage. 1. Number two, at chest, lunge:
2. Number one, plrrry right, and at stomach (chest, Lead, etc.),
thrust; 3. ASSAULT.
ATTACKS “A THE Rf&l
60. These movements e.w made for the purpae of f&&g a*<,
disclosing an opening into which an attack can be made. They
are the prese, the beat, and the twist.
81. In the press the attack quickly 1)resses against the “ppo-
nent’s bayonet or ride with his own and continues the pressure
88 the attack is delivered.
Example: Feing at the engage, 1. Number one, preaa, and at
chest, thrust; 2. Number two, parry right; 3. ASSAULT.
82. The attack by disengagement is partiCularly
partimlarly etPective fol-
lowing
lowine the press.
n-ass.
Example:
Ex&ple~ Being nt the engage. 1. Yvmber one, pew, and at
stomach, thrust; 2. Number two, low parry left; 3. ASSAULT.
63. The beat Is an nttaek in which a sbapp blow ie struck
against the opponent’e ride for the purpose of forcing him to
expose
egpose an opening into which an attack immedrately follows.
It IS used when there is but slight oomsition or no contact of

Exxnmple: Being at the engage. 1. Number one. beat, and at

:AO;I;BTCh (chest, etc.), thrust; 2. Number two, prrry left; 3. AS-

84. in the tlviet the rm i8 crossed over the opponent’s rifle

or bayonet and h& bayonet forced downward with a circular
motion and a straight attack made into the opening. It requires
suwrior strength a,, the part of the attack.
Example: Being at the engage, 1. Number one, twist. and at
stomach, thrust: 2. Number two, low pm-r,, le+t: 3. ASSAULT.

85. Feints are movements wbicb threaten or simulate attacks

and are made with a view to inducing an opening or parry that
248 HANUKCOF TEE BhYONET
exposesthe desired point of nttnck. They are either single or
double.ax!ordin~ to t,,c numberof such movementsmadeby tllc
attack:
86. In order mnt the at1tack may bc ehnnged ~uic!d~, as little
forel ? as possible is put into n feint.
lc ~nmple: Being at the engage. Nvmber one, feint bead thrust:
nt stomnch, lunge; 2. Nvmber two, parry right and low fmrry right:
3. ASSAULT.
Number one exeCutes the feint nmi then the attack. s-umber
two executes both pnrries.
8,. In double *tints first one part of the body ah3 then an-
other is threntened and R third xttncked.
Example: Being at the engqw, 1. Number one, feint straight
thrust nt chest; disengagement at chest; at stomach, lunge:
2. Nvmbw two. pcwy right, parry left, and low prrrry /eft; 3. AS-
SAULT.
88. A,, menine mm be oftered or procured by om,osition, 8s
in the pm& or h7t.
8% I,, fencing exwcises every feint should at firfit be pnrried.
When the dcfensc is able tu judge or divine the cbarncter of
the attack the feint is not necessarilS wlrried, but may be nulli-
fied by n eountw feint.
90.-h counter feint is n feint fOlioming the opponent% feint or
fomwing a parry of his attnck and generally occur-‘s in corn-
bined momxnents.
CoMnrNro MOVE~~ErTS.
91. When the men hare become thoronghly familiar with the
various *Gilt movenEnts, parrim, hwnm, attacks, feints, etc.,
the instructor eoti~bines several of them nnd gives the mm-
ma”&? iu quick s~~ccessi”“, i,,creasi,,~ the ,‘i,,,idity >ind llulnber
of movsments 8s the men become more skillful. Opponents will
br. than@ frequently.
1. Exmwle: Being at the engage, 1. Number one, by disen-
gogement at chest, thrust; 2. Number two, pcvv left, r~ight step
(left foot first), and lunge: 3. ASSAULT.
2. Exam~lr: Being nt engtge left, “wnber one. press and
f&y; 2. Number two, parry wht, left step, and thrust; 3 AS-
 XANTJAL OF IEE BAYONET. as.9

3. Example: Being nt the engage, Number one, by disengage-

ment at chest, thrust: 2. Number two, ~(IFF~ left, front pass. and
at head butt strike; 3. Number one, right step: 4. ASSAb’LT.
63. Examples 1 and 2 are typical of muvements known as
CPOSScounters, and exam111e No. 8 of moveluents knorn as the.
counters.
93. A chcrncery is an nttxlt by menus of which the opponent is
disarmed. which GLUY”S him to 1”~” c”ntr”l of his rifle, or which
dianbles hiv Weapon.
94. When the different combimrtions BP” executed with SUB-
cimt skill the instructor aili devise series of movements to be
memorized and “seated at the cornmaul ossoult. ‘The acc”rac~
and celerity of the movements will be corefully watched by the
instructor, with a view to the correction Of fx”ity execution.
95. It is not intended to restrict the number “f morements,
but co leave to the discretiou of eompnny commanders and the
ingenuity af instructors the selection of such other exercise9 ns
accord with the object of the drill.
VII. FENCING NT WILL.

96. As satisfactory rogresa is made the instructor will pro-

ceed to the exercises n F will, by which is wennt assaults between
two men, each end~avodng to hit the other and t” avoid being
hit himself. Fencing nt mill should not be allowed to degenerate
into random attacks and defenses.
97. The instructor can supervise but one mir of combatants
st n time. Frequent changes should be made so that the men
may learn differeut methods of attack and defense from each
other.
98. The contest should begin with simple, careful movements,
with a view to forming n c”r*eet opinion of the adversary;
nfterwnrds everything mill depend on c”“hess, rayid and correct
execution of the movements and quick perception of the adrer-
snry’s intentions.
99. Continual retreat from the adversary’s attack and fre-
nuent dodging to escape attacks should be avoided The
o~enaive should br continuslly encouraged.
 YAIiUAL OF TBE BAYONET.

100. Ill *eenc*ng at Will, When no commands are given, oppo-

nt!nt* facing each other at the position Of order arms, salute.
They then immediately and simultaneously assume the position
of guard, rifles engaged. Neither man may take the posit,“”
of guard before his opponent hils completed his 8al”te. The
choice of position is decided before the salute.
101. The onwnents being about tmo wces apart and the fenc-
ing salute having bee” rendered, the instructor commands, rlt
will. 2. ASSAULT. after which either narty bns the right to
“ttack. TO interrupt the Contest the i”str”ctor will command
HALT, at which the combatants will immediately come to the
order. TO terminate the contest the instructor mill command,
1. Halt, 2. SALUTE, nt which the combatants will immediately
come to the order, Mute, and i-emove their m”&s.
102. When me” have acquired confidence in fen&g at will,
one onoonent sbonld he reauired to advance ““on the other in
quick-time at charge baron&, from a distance not to exceed lo
yards, and deliver an attack. As soon as a bit is made by
either oywnent the instructor commands, HALT. and the assault
terminates. Opponents alternate in @sn”lting. The assailant
is likewise reauired to ndTa”ce at double time from a distance
not exceeding -20 yards and at a r”” from a distance not excee&
ing ‘30 yards.
108. The instructor will closely observe the contest and deelde
doubtful “oints. He will at once stoo the contest “ran the
slightest ;“dication if temrvzr. After ehndusio” of the wmbat
he will comment on the action of both wrties, point out errors
y&d$icieneies and explain how they may be avoided in the

104. As additional instruction, the men may be permitted to

wield the ride left handed, that is on the left side of the body,
left hand at the small of the stock. Many me” aill be able to
we this method to advantage. It is alao of value in ease the
left hand is wounded.
106. After mm have fenced in l)airs, Bractice should be give”
in fencing between gro”ps, equally and ““equally divided. When
practicable, intrencbments will be wed in fencing of this char.
acter.
I@EANDdL OP THE BAYONET. 251

.
252 MANUaL we THE 3ASO~~2~

In group fencing it vi,1 be necess3ry to have n Eudicient num-

her of umpires to decide hits. An individual receiving a bit is
vithdram at once from the bout, wbicb is decided in favor of
the group having the numerical s”C”xi”rity at the end. The
*encing salute is not required in group fencing.

RULES mu mmCIN0 *T WILL.

100. 1. Hits on thelegs below tbe knees mill not be counted.

No hit counts unless, in the opiuion of the instructor, it has
*umcient force to dismk.
2. Upon reeking a hit, call out “ hit.”
3. After redring 3 fair hit 3 counter nttaclr is not wrmittt‘d.
* position Of engage IS ‘^ A^,-^-
Ltne5”.
4. A second or tbir ,d bit in a combined attack will be counted
only when the first hit was not enlled.
6. when it is necessary to atop the contest-for eram~le, be
cause of brenking~of wennons or disnlncement of menns of W”-
t&ion-take the pas ,ition of the “rd&
0. When it is necessary to suqlend the assault for any enuse,
it will not be resumed until the adversary is ready and in “on-
dition to defrnrl~-____-.--...
l>imaeW
7. Attnrks directed at the crotch are p’obibited in fencing.
8. Steppin g put of bounds, when established, counts a* a hit.

SUoGrslroNs FOE FENCIN” AT WILL.

107. When engnging in an assault, first study the adversary’s

position and grocred by false attacks, executed with speed, t”
discover, if possible, his instinctire parries. In order t” draw
the adversary out and induce him to ex,~“se that Dart of the
body at whirb the nttmk is to be made, it is advimb,” t” simu-
late an attack by a feint nnd then make the real attack.
108. Return attacks sb”“ld be frequently ,mxticed, as they
are dilticult to parry, nml the opponent is within ensier rencb
and more ex,,“ser,. l’be return can be made n continuation of
the parry, ns there is no plwi”“s wnl’nm “f its &?mery a,-
 3&xl“r; SE TI-IL 9dPONET. 8.53

though it should always be expected. Returns are made witb-

out Iunging if the adversary can be reached by thr”sts or cut%
104. E”deavor to overcome the tendency to make a return
without knowing where it will hit. Making returns blindly is
a bad habit and leads t,o iostinctive returns-that is. habitual
returns with certain nttnck% from certni” parries--a fault which
the skilled oDnone”t mill soon discover.
110. DO not dram the ride back preparatory to thrusting and

111. The purpose of fencing at will is to teach the soldier as

mnny forma of simple, ~ffwtive nttacks and defenses as PO.%
ai~4ittcomplieatd and lotricnte movements sho”ld not be at-

112. The influence of the iostructor is great. He m”8t be

master of his weapon, not only to shorn the various movements,
but also to lead in the exercises at mill. He should stimulate
the zeal of the men aud aro,,se treasure in the work. OEiCers
should qualify themselves as instructors by fencing with each
other.
11% The chnracter of each man, his bodily conformation, and
his degree of skill must always be take” illto nccount. When
the instructor is demonstrating the combinations, feints. re-
turns, nnd wrries the ranidity of his attack sho”ld be regu-
lated by the skill of the lx@ and no more force than is plece9~
&lry Should be used. If the pupil oxposes himself too much in
the feints and ,,arries the instructor will, by a” nttack, con-
vince him of his error; but if these retunes be too swiftly or
1~3 strongly mede the pupil will become ovxcautious a”d the
Precision of his attack will be im~8ired. The object is to teach
the ~~)il, not to give exhibitions of superior plkill.
114. Oceasi”nall~ the instructor shouid leave hlmself “ncov-
ered nnd fall to marry, in order to teach the pupil to take Qu‘ck
advantage of such oyportunitiea
254 l&uKrAL OF THE BAYONET.

VIII. COMPETITIONS.

115. In comgetitions between different orgnnizotions none but

skillful fencers win be aknved to pn*ticiDlte.
1113. In contests between two men judges may assign ~aluea
to hits E&B follows :

/ygg cuts. 1 :;

Gtornaeh
._............... ~.~..~ ; :::::::::: .._,____
f
cheat
Eead..._........... ~~~.~~~~.~.~.~ i ; ;
Neck... 1
Ia@.
Armsawihan’is ~~~.~ ~~.~~ : 1
mepm.g
cutOfbamds,
4&Km.%
117. When supsriority between two men is decided by bouts,
exb bout will be decided by itself, i. e., points won in one bout
can not be carried over to another.
118. Details other than those mentioned above will be ar-
ranged by the oi%ials of the competition

0
 [C. I.D. R. x3.1

INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.

CHnNGEs WAR DEP.4RTJIEwr,
NO.IO. WABHINDTON,
‘4pl‘iz14, 1.917.
Paragraph 2821 is added to the Infantry Drill Regulations
immediately after the bending “Mass IWrmntions,” and para-
graphs 25.3, 731, and 536, Infantry Drill Regulations (edition
n~provd Aufust ID, 1011, nnd edition corrected to ~Cwember,
Em,, i,re eb:inged 88 follows:
Mass Formations.
2821. Being in column of squads, to form a line of cdumns
of companies or company Subdivisions, facing in any desired
direction, at any desired intervni, on the right or left Of the
lendinz element of the bnttolion: 1. Line ot companies Ihd+
cornpa&,
. . . - ^ ,. ^ - platoons). at (so many)
. - paces, guide riq’ht (left). 2.
MAfKm, 3. mxf(l,,O”, 4. “A‘,.
The leading 03mgaDy or (subdivision) marches in the diree-
tion preyiously indicated by the major until the command halt
is ZiW” ona3 tilei3 bnlts. Each SuceeedinY COmDanY (lx sub-
di+on) mnrcbrs by tile most direct route to iis pi& at the
prescribed intend on the left (right, Of the next precediug
cmupmy (or subdivision). halting aben it is abreast of the
leading element Of tire battalion.
If the battalion be in any formation other than eohmn of
scjuacls, the major indicates the desired direction to the leading
cianent. The entire commandforms Column Of Sq”adSana
executesthe mowment in conformity with the principles indi-
I-:, trt, ilb0T-P. cc!. 1. D. R.. N”. 19. *ar. IL. 10*7.,
283. Being in line, Ii& of cbmpanies, or column of mm-
pmies : 1. Close on first (fourth) company. 2. MARC”.
If at n halt, the indiCBted eompEl*y stands fast ; if marching.
it is halted : each of the other companies is conducted toward it
snl3 is halted in proper order in close column.
 [C. 1. D. n. 19.1
2
If the battalion is in line. companies form successively in
rem of the indicnted company; if fn column of squads, corn-
panics in rear of the leading company form on the left of it.
I” Cl”E column formed from line on the first company, the
left guides cover ; farmed on the fourth company, right guides
cover. If formed on the lending eompnny, the guide remains ns
before the formation. In close line. the guides are halted
abrellst of the gum? Of the leading eomgnny.
The battalion in column closes on the leading company only.
(C. I. D. R., 60. 19, Apr. 14, 1917.)
[2573756, A. G. 0.1
734. Change the fourth subrmxgra~b to read 8.9 follows:
Just before the last note of retreat, the adjutant comes to
sttention and, as the last note ends, conmmnds: 1. Battnfion.
2. ATTENTION. 3. Present, 4. ARMS, and salutes, retaining that
position until me 1nst note Of the mltiona, *“the”,. He men
turns about and regora: Sir, the parade is formed. The major
directs the adjutant : Take your pmt. Sir. The adjutant moves at
n trot (if *ismounted, in quirk time), ~zisses by the major’s
right, and takes his pmt.’ ( C. I. D. R., Xo. 19, Apr. 11, 1917.)
D55.5880, A. G. 0.1
736. Add thewxds “or lineaf masses” aftertheword “line” in
the first line. Omit the wards “in line ” in the third line of first
subprapxph, and also in the seventh line from the end of the
paragraph. (C. I. 1,. It., 270. 10, Apr. 14, 1917.)
12543646, A. G. 0.1
BY OP.“* OF TEE SECRETaaP OF WAR :
H. L. SCOTT,
Jfajor f%ne%l, Chief Of stajq.
ommrar. :
H. P. MCCAIN,
The adjutant Ghmzl.
 [ 0. I. 0. n. 20.1

INFANTRY DRILL REGULATIONS.

CEIANGES WAR I~EPARTMENT.
NO. 20. 1 ,V\SHISGTOR..42LOtMIX. 1017.
Pnrnmlgh 150 and pnragrnph 150 “f A,,,wllrlix A. Infnntrs
IWill llegulations (currected to *Dr. 15, 1917), are ch*“&wl is
fUliO\W, to Cwl’eit error made in printing t,mt editio”:
1.50. (I’>,&?, 47.) CEBSE FIBRiO.
lviri”:: st<qls ; pieces ““t nlreadly thcrr :,re bPO”gllt to t,llP port-
/ is,,, “l ,,,i/d : I,l<,hP n<,t ,oncled are landed: Sights aI%2 hid, ,h=W~
i,w l”d<wl ill/l, w”““lrt I” the ~,UlW.
Cease firing is used for lo”:: pnuses to prepare for ehngen Of
~loSitiO”, or t” st,!x,y uir “W”. (C. I. Il. II. NO. 20, AlLgust 18.
1’117 1
_~_._,
r306.73. A. G. 0.1
150. (I?,,, 220. Apyendix A.) CEASE FIBINQ.
leillf st”,E; ,aws nnt nlreadg there are brtwght to the
,,witic,n of l”:d, the c”t~“tI t”r”Cd don” if tiring irow r”ng:wine.
the wrtridge Is drn\in or the empty shell is e,iwted, the trieger
is pulled. Sights ;,re laid down, unll the picce is brought to the
older.
cease firing is USed for long p*uses to prepare for changes Of
yii~;,:, or to strndy the “En. (C. I, D. K. NO. eo, August 18,
_i_._,
,36”.73,A. 0.0.1
R-2 “N”F.R OF ‘THE SecamaeY OF w*x :
n. L. SCOTT.
a4ajor General, miet Of staff.
OmrcIaL:
H. I’. McCAIN,
The Adjutant Qeneral.
“8tJS’--17
WISHIN<IToN : COvnaNldENT PBINTIN.3“PBTCR: lOi,